

HI 













r> 



^ "•, '^l^V O " „:+\ 

























































; 





























































PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



SPANISH LANGUAGE, 



COPIOUS EXERCISES; 

THE WHOLE RENDERED SO EASY AS TO BE INTELLIGIBLE EVEN 
WITHOUT THE AID OF AN INSTRUCTOR. 



</ 



By S. WHITEHEAD, 

Author of A Practical Introduction to Latin Grammar. 



'* Pocos habra que nieguen la utilidad de la Gramatica, si ae 
considera como medio para aprender alguna lengua estraiia." 

Gram. Castel, 



LONDON: 



PRINTED FOR BALDWIN, CRADOCK, AND JOY, PATERNOSTER-ROW; 
AND BOOSEY AND SONS, OLD BROAD-STREET. 



1826. 







C. Baldwin, Printer, 
New Bridge-street, London. 



TO THE 

REV. WILLIAM BUCKLEY FOX, 

WHOSE IMMENSE ERUDITION IS NOT MORE CONSPICUOUS 
THAN HIS VIRTUES^ 

THIS LITTLE WORK, 

IN TESTIMONY OF A FRIENDSHIP 
OF MORE THAN FIFTEEN YEARS DURATION, 

IS MOST AFFECTIONATELY INSCRIBED 
BY 

THE AUTHOR. 





ERRATA. 




Page 






13 for 


atro read 


otro. 


24 — 


regen ■ 


rigen. 


60 — 


vido ■ 


visto. 


75 — 


hubiereis 


hubieres, 


100 — 


habierau — 


hubieron, 


100 — 


pado ~ 


partido. 


112 — 


fuistes 


fuisteis. 


149 — 


hicerais 


hicierais. 


149 — 


hicieran — 


hicieren. 



And perhaps a few others, too slight to require pointing out. 



PREFACE. 



The increasing interest attached to Spanish litera- 
ture, and the extensive commercial relations recently 
established with Spanish America, have rendered the 
acquisition of the language an object of greater im- 
portance at the present time than at any former period 
of our history. Hence, every improvement in books 
designed for the use of students in that language, is 
entitled to some share of public approbation. 

Whoever is thoroughly acquainted with the Spanish 
Grammars which have at various periods been pub- 
lished in this country will readily admit, that a new 
one, on a plan at once compendious and simple, is a 
great desideratum. The author of the following work 
has no wish to speak disrespectfully of those who have 
preceded him in the same path, but he may be allowed 
to observe that most of them were illiterate foreigners, 
men as ignorant of the true principles of language as 
of good taste. Destitute of all originality and clearness 
of conception, they either abbreviated, and in so doing 
distorted the meaning of what has been written on the 

a3 



Vl PREFACE. 

subject by the Spanish Academicians, or they servilely 
copied from one another, and multiplied imperfections. 
They proceeded as if their only object were to com- 
pile a given number of pages within a given time, no 
matter how ill-digested their performances might be. 
This language may appear severe, but the author con- 
ceives himself fully justified in using it. 

In this censure, however, all foreigners who have 
written on the subject of Spanish Grammar are by no 
means to be included. Two or three of them have 
shown that they were sufficiently acquainted with the 
structure of the language. But in the prosecution of 
their labours they encountered two insurmountable 
obstacles : they were not conversant enough with the 
import of our auxiliary verbs, the nature and extent 
of our moods and tenses, and the peculiar genius of 
our language ; and they were totally ignorant of the 
systematic mode both of execution and of arrangement 
which a British public expects to be observed in ele- 
mentary introductions to modern tongues. These, 
clothed in the unwieldy costume of Priscian or Peri- 
zonius, may be admired in Spain, but they will no 
longer be tolerated in England. 

To remedy the defects then which the author con- 
ceives to exist in preceding introductions to the 
Spanish language, and to compose a work which should 



PREFACE. VU 

combine simplicity of arrangement with perspicuity of 
manner, which should be practical rather than the- 
oretical, has been attempted in the following pages. 
To the definitions he has paid more than ordinary 
attention ; and wherever any thing likely to occasion a 
real difficulty has occurred, he has endeavoured, and 
he trusts not without some degree of success, to render 
the subject as intelligible as its nature would admit. 
The Exercises, as well as the examples designed to 
illustrate the rules, have been selected from the best 
Castilian writers ; and as neither the peculiar manner 
of an author, nor the necessary connection of language 
can be fully learned from isolated and detached sen- 
tences, narratives of considerable length have been 
given in the Promiscuous Exercises to Syntax. 

Like most of his predecessors, the author has often 
availed himself of the assistance afforded by the Royal 
Spanish Academy, in its celebrated grammatical 
treatise. But in the general conduct of his work, he 
is as little indebted to that learned body as to any 
other authority. He admires as much as any man 
the diligence of research, the acuteness of investi- 
gation, and the logical accuracy displayed in that 
treatise; but he is by no means inclined to consider 
it of much use to any other than a well educated 
Spaniard. It is totally inapplicable to the wants of 



Vlli PREFACE. 

a learner, and especially of a foreign learner; and 
its metaphysical subtilties are sometimes such as to 
render it unintelligible even to those for whose use 
it seems more peculiarly adapted. Some help has 
also been derived from the Grammaire Espagnole 
Raisonnee of Josse, a work which, though extremely 
defective in regard to Syntax, is the best the author 
has hitherto seen on the subject. Occasionally, 
reference has been made to other sources. 

In conclusion, if the following little work be found 
to answer the design of the author, his humble labours 
will be abundantly rewarded. That it contains some 
imperfections, he is by no means disposed to deny; 
but concerning these, he may be allowed to use, 
with a slight variation, the words of a great critic : 
" Lectores peritos harum rerum rogo, ut si qua in re a 
me erratum reperirent, quod non uno loco ne factum sit 
vereor, aut ignoscere mini, aut in viam me reducer e 
velint ; sed ita 9 ut ego in aliis Jeci 9 hoc est } secundum 
Ennianum illud } Erranti comiter monstrat viam." 



CONTENTS. 



INTRODUCTION. 

Page 

Pronunciation 1 

Accents 7 

ETYMOLOGY. 

Article 9 

Noun 10 

Classification of Nouns by the Spanish Aca- 
demy « 10 

Gender 13 

Number . . 16 

Case 16 

Declension of Nouns 17 

Observations on the Cases of Nouns 19 

Exercise on the Articles 24 

Adjective 26 

Comparison of Adjectives 27 

Comparatives joined to Nouns, Verbs, and 

Adverbs 29 

Exercise on the Feminine aud Plural of Ad- 
jectives 31 

Exercise on the Degrees of Comparison. ... 33 



X CONTENTS. 

Page 

The Cardinal Numbers 37 

The Ordinal Ditto 38 

Adjectives which when joined to Substantives 

lose one or more letters . . 39 

Pronoun 40 

Personal 40 

Observations on the Personal Pronouns .... 42 

Relative Pronouns 43 

Adjective Pronouns 46 

Exercise on Pronouns 51 

Verb 56 

Moods 58 

Tenses 58 

Of the Terminations ra, se, and ria 63 

Conjugation of Haber 69 

Tener m 71 

Ser and Estar 76 

Observations on the Verbs Ser and Estar . . 81 
Exercise on the Verbs Haber, Temer, Ser, 

and Estar 82 

First Conjugation — Amar 90 

Second Conjugation — Temer 94 

Third Conjugation — Partir 99 

Exercises on Regular Verbs Active 104? 

Changes in certain Regular Verbs 110 

Conjugation of Verbs Passive Ill 

Exercise on Passive Verbs . . 117 

Conjugation of Verbs Reflected 119 

The Irregular Verbs 123 

Exercise on the Irregular Verbs 170 

Verbs Defective 174 



CONTENTS. XI 

Page 

Participle 178 

Some Observations on the Participle 179 

Adverb . . . . . 182 

Preposition 184 

Conjunction 188 

Interjection , . .. 188 

Appendix to Etymology 189 



SYNTAX. 
Article 202 

Exercise on the Rules for Articles 206 

Adjective 210 

Exercise on Adjectives 216 

Pronoun 219 

Verb 222 

Concord of the Verb 222 

Government of Verbs 224 

Verbs Requiring Certain Prepositions 226 

Exercises on Verbs 229 

Verbs Passive 234 

Infinitive Mood 235 

Participle 237 

Exercise on the Prepositions required by 

Verbs Passive, &c 239 

Preposition 241 

Conjunction 242 

Interjection 244? 

Exercise on the Rules for Prepositions and 

Conjunctions 241 



XII CONTENTS. 

Page 

Promiscuous Exercises : 

I. Gil Bias and the Sick Canon 247 

II. Gil Bias serves Doctor Sangrado. ..... 252 

III. The same continued 255 

IV. Gil Bias and the Archbishop 259 

V. The same continued 263 

VI. Ditto 267 

VII. Ditto concluded 273 

VIII. Martyrdom of Hermenigildus 279 

IX. Invasion of Spain by the Saracens .... 285 

X. The same continued 290 

Appendix to Syntax 296 



SPANISH GRAMMAR. 



INTRODUCTION. 



The Spanish Alphabet consists of twenty-eight 
characters : 

A, B, C, CH, D, E, F, G ? H, I, J, K, L, XX, M, N. 
N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z. 

PRONUNCIATION. 

1. Of Votvels. 

The vowels are a, e, i 9 o, u, and sometimes y. 

A is sounded like the same vowel in the English 
words part, far. 

E, like a in acre. 

J, like the same vowel in tuindouo. 

O, like the same vowel in the first syllable of odor. 

U 9 like oo in poor, 

U is silent in the syllables que, qui, gue> gui, unless 
it admits the diaeresis. Thus agilero is pronounced 
agooero ; but in guerra the u is not sounded. And 
what is worthy of remark, though the g before the 
vowels e and i is a deep aspirate, yet in such instances 
as guerra it retains its hard sound as if the u were pro* 
nounced, viz. that of gin the English wot A guest. 

Y, as a vowel, sounds like the Spanish i. 

2. Of Diphthongs and Triphthongs. 

A diphthong is the union of two vowels pronounced 
by a single emission of the voice ; as ai in dahais, 



Z INTRODUCTION. 

Spanish diphthongs are proper ; that is, both vowels 
are heard, but not always with equal distinctness. 

These diphthongs are ai 9 ay 9 au 9 ei 9 ey 9 ea 9 eo } eu 9 
ia > ie 9 to, iu 9 oe, oi, oy, ua 9 ue 9 ui 9 uy, no. 

In ao 9 au 9 ei, ey, eu, iu 9 id, uy 9 the first vowel is more 
distinctly heard than the second : in ai 9 ay 9 oi, oy 9 both 
are equally sounded ; in the rest the final vowel is more 
clearly heard. 

A triphthong is the union of three vowels pronounced 
in the same manner ; as iai in preciais. 

The triphthongs are iai, iei 9 uai 9 uei, uey. 

The only direction which can be given for the pro- 
nunciation of diphthongs and triphthongs is this: Unite 
the simple sounds, and pronounce them with so much 
rapidity that they may appear one. After a few trials 
the effort will be attended with little difficulty. 

When there is a combination of two or three vowels 
in the same word, and none of those vowels are accom- 
panied by an accent, the learner may conclude that 
they are to be sounded by one emission of the voice ; 
but if one of the vowels be accented, it forms a syllable 
of itself. 

3. Of Consonants. 

B, D, F, K, L, M, N, P, S, V,* are pronounced in 
Spanish as in English. But K, by a late decision of 
. the Academy, is to be dismissed from the alphabet, 
and allowed only in some proper names of foreign ad- 
mission. 

C 
Sounds like h before a, o 9 u. 

Before the vowels, it has a sound resembling that of 
ih in our word thanks, but somewhat more liquid. 

* The Spaniards often confound the pronunciation of b and v so 
that they cannot be distinguished from each other. This, however, 
is a defect which the Royal Academy of Madrid condemns in a late 
treatise. / 

The natives of Andalusia, of Murcia, and perhaps of some other pro- 
vinces, sound the final d like ih in the English word with; but this is 
not the genuine Castilian sound. True it is that this letter, when final, 
5s considerably softened down in pronunciation : it, seems almost to 
expire on t\iQ Dos, Ivit it still preserves its invariable elementary 
sound, % 



INTRODUCTION, 3 

The true sound of c in the latter case is what we call 
a slight lisp. 

CH 
Is sounded as in our word church, except in proper 
names of Hebrew or Greek derivation, where it is pro- 
nounced like h'; as in Melchisedeclu* 

G, 

Before a consonant, or the vowels a, o, u, has the same 
hard sound as it has in the English words gap, got. 

But before the other vowels it becomes a deep aspi- 
rate, or rather a guttural. It is considerably deeper 
than our h aspirated: its sound bears a strong analogy 
to that of ch in the Scottish pronunciation of the word 
loch.f 

H 
Is scarcely ever aspirated in Spanish. Before ue 9 and 
between two vowels, as in huevo, almohada, there is 
indeed an aspiration; but, as the Academy observes, 
it is so slight that it is hardly perceptible.^ 

J 

Is a guttural before all the vowels. Its sound is exactly 
that of g before the vowels e and i. 

LL 

Has no corresponding sound in English. That of ly 
(very liquid) is the nearest approximation that can be 

* CH has no longer the power of k except in the cases above- 
mentioned. The Academy has suppressed the h after c before a, o, u, 
in all words where h was not sounded, and where c alone had con- 
sequently the power of k. Thus choro is now written coro. And for 
eh before e, i, the same authority has substituted qu in words where 
the sound was the same ; as querubim, for cherubim. 

t " La g formando las si Fab as ge, gi, es guttural fuerte. Esta es 
una pronunciacion particular, y propria del Castellano, porque en 
otras lenguas la g siguendose las referidas vccales, se pronuncia de 
diferente modo." 

Spanish gutturals are of oriental origin : they were introduced by 
the Moors during the long space of time in which the followers of 
the prophet held the dominion of the peninsula. 

% u Lafc.es seiiel de aspiracion tan tenue y delgada que nose per- 
cibe las mas veces»" 

b2 



4 INTRODUCTION. 

given. Thus lleno is pronounced in a manner nearly 
similar to that which it would be if written lyeno (two 
syllables). The French word Jille is still nearer in 
sound.* 

N 
Has likewise no corresponding sound in our language. 
It is something similar to that of ny in English. Thus 
senor is not much unlike the sound which senyor 
would have if pronounced as a dissyllable. Gn in 
the French word has almost the exact sound of the 
Spanish n.\ 

Q, 

Which is always followed by u 9 has before a the same 
sound as it has in the English word quart: before e and 
ij qu sounds like k, as in quexas, &c. And in some 
words of Greek or Hebrew derivation, qu is substituted 
for ch hard ; as quimera, querubim, and is consequently 
pronounced like k. See the pronunciation of U* 

By a late decree of the Academy, qu (the u without 
the diaeresis) is in future to be used only before e and 
i ; as in quemo, quicio. Qua, qile, qui, quo, are to be 
written with c ; as cual 9 cuestion, cuota. 

K 

Has a smooth sound, like the same consonant in the 
English word rod, and a rough one as in the word rage. 
R is rough at the beginning of a word, as in Roma ; 
after /, n, s, as in Jwnra ; after b in words compounded 
with the prepositions ab, ob, sub, as abroga ; and in 
some other combinations, as in the second syllable of 
prerogaliva. 

Has two sounds. Before a consonant, or a vowel 

* " Esla letra es expresiva de aquel sonido que se nota en las 
voces llane, lleno, &c. el qual los Franceses distinguen con las dos 
II precedidas de la i, que llaraan I mojada." 

f '*■ Los Italianas y los Franceses tienen esta pronunciation, y la 
explican con la gn" 

$ " La x tiene un sonido guttural fuerte semejanto al de la j y de 
la g, con todas las vocales, como en axuar, xergon. El mismo sonido 
si bien algo menos perceptible tiene siempre esta letra en fin de 



INTRODUCTION. 5 

marked with the circumflex accent, it is sounded as in 
the English words exit, experience. 

But when it begins a syllable, and the following 
vowel has no circumflex, it has the same guttural sound 
as g and /. 

When x is final, its guttural sound is less sensible 
than when it occupies another place : it assumes, too, 
something of a liquid sound. And in some of the pro- 
vincial dialects of Spain, x final is pronounced like ss. 

Y, 

When a consonant, has a sound somewhat stronger than 
ours. 

z, 

Before all the vowels, and when final, has the same 
sound as the Spanish e before c and i 7 — that is, rather 
more liquid than th in our word thanks, — a slight lisp* 

diction, como en carcax, relox. Esta letra equivale a cs, poniendo 
sobre la vocal a quien hiere, la nota del accento cireumflexo, 6 
siguendo consonante." — It appears, however, from a treatise lately 
published by the Academy (whose words in the original have fre- 
quently been quoted), that the guttural sound of x is to be discon- 
tinued. Its place is to be supplied by j before a, o, u, and generally 
by g before the other vowels. Thus xaban is to be written jaban ; 
and the vowel following x is not in future to have the circumflex 
accent. 

The student will perceive that the Spanish Academy has lately 
made many important innovations in the orthography of the lan- 
guage, — so many indeed that foreigners will frequently be puzzled 
by them. Whether these innovations be improvements, may reason- 
ably be doubted. No common motives should have induced that 
learned body to deviate from a system which has been so long re- 
ceived both by natives and foreigners. 

* ** La 3 en Castellano es de sonido uniforme con todas las vocales ; 
pero como la c tiene la misma pronunciation que la z con la e y con 
la i, es preciso para su diferencia en lo escrito, atender al uso y al 
origen de las voces. La s se ha de usar antes de las vocales a, o, u t 
en que tiene su particular pronunciation, como en zagal, zarzal. 
Antes de las vocales e, i, no debemos usar de la s, sino quando la 
hai en el origen de las voces, y ei uso la ha conservado, como en 
zefi.ro, zizaua. En las voces que en singular acabau con z, como 
paz, vez, feliz, aunque los plurales que terminan en la silaba ces, 
pueden escribirse tambien con z, conservando la misma pronuncia- 
tion, se acostumbrara no obstante, escribirlas con c conforme a su 
origen ; como paces, veces,f dices." 



t> 




INTRODUCTION 








Exercise on Pronunciation. 




ba, 


be, 


bi, 


bo, 


bu. 


ca, 

cha, 

da, 

fa, 


ce, 

che, 

de, 

fe, 


Cl, 

chi, 

di, 

fi, 


CO, 

cho, 

do, 

fo, 


cu. 
chu, 
du. 
fu. 


gua, 
ha, 


ge, 

gue, 

he, 


gUi. 

hi, 


go, 
ho, 


g u - 
hu. 


la, 

11a, 


le, 
lie, 


Ik 

Hi, 


lo, 
llo, 


lu. 
ilu. 


ma, 


me, 


mi, 


mo, 


mu. 


na, 


ne, 


ni, 


no, 


nu. 


na, 


ne, 


ni, 


fio, 


fiu. 


pa, 

qua, 

ra, 


pe, 

que, 

re, 


qui, 


po, 

quo. 

ro, 


pu. 
ru. 


sa, 
ta, 


se, 
te, 


si, 
ti, 


so, 
to, 


su. 
tu. 


va, 


ve, 


vi, 


vo, 


vu. 


xa, 


xe, 


xi, 


xo, 


xu. 


za> 


ze, 


zi, 


zo, 


zu. 



Another, on those Letters only 'which are attended "with 
any difficulty to English Learners. 

C. 

Capitan, capa, correo, camara, recuerdo, recobrar, 
cebada, celebre, ciego, cierva, cesto, cierto, cima, 
cecina. 

CH. 

Chapin, ochento, chico, chocolate, chucho, chiminea, 
chimista, Melchisedech. 

G. 

Galgo, gemelos, girar, muger, region, mago, mar- 
gen, elegir, alguno. 

J. 
Jamas, hijo, jesuita, viejo, viejecito, junto, jurar. 



INTRODUCTION. 7 

LL. 

Llanto, lleno, llara, Uuvia, caballo, polio. 

N. 

Senor, arariar, ensenar, mufieca, pafio, panuelo, 
rebano. 

U. 

Gue, guij gue, giii. — Que, qui, que, qiii. Guitarra, 
guerra, vergiienza, argitir. Queso, question. 

X. 

Examen, enxambre, sexo, xefe, relox, proximo, 
xaque, box. 

Z. 

Zapata, zizana, luz, feliz, zorra, zarza, capaz* 

ACCENTS. 

The accent mostly used in the Spanish is the acute 
(' ), which serves to distinguish some words from one 
another, and to lengthen the pronunciation of others. 

The vowels a, e, 6, u, when used as prepositions 
or conjunctions, should always be accented. 

Pronouns and other words are distinguished from 
one another by this accent ; as mi, me, from mi 3 my ; 
tie, thou, from tu, thy ; el 9 he, from el } the, &c. 

The same accent also marks the pronunciation of 
verbs, and distinguishes the tenses : enseno, I teach ; 
enseno, he taught ; ensenard, he will teach ; ensendra, 
he would teach, &c. 

The circumflex ( A ) is used to distinguish the soft 
sound of x from its guttural one ; as fluxion, exactitude 
But, as we have before observed, the academy has de- 
creed that when x is guttural, its place shall be sup- 
plied by g or/, and the circumflex no longer used. 

The diaeresis (") is placed over u followed by e or /, 
when the u is to be sounded in the syllables, gue, gui 9 
que, qui ; as arguir, question. 

The rules given for the accentuation of nouns are so 



8 INTRODUCTION. 

indefinite, and liable to so many exceptions, that they 
are of little use. The accentuation of verbs may be 
known from the examples which will hereafter be 



Spanish Grammar may now be divided into two 
parts, Etymology and Syntax. 



PART L 



ETYMOLOGY 

Treats of words, enumerates their different species, 
and shows their various modifications and combina- 
tions.* 

Words are significant signs of our ideas, and are by 
grammarians denominated parts of speech. 

In Spanish there are ten different species of words, 
or parts of speech : Article, Substantive or Noun, 
Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Participle, Adverb, Prepo- 
sition, Conjunction, and Interjection. 

ARTICLE. 

An article is a word prefixed to nouns, or to words 
that supply the place of nouns, sometimes to limit, and 
sometimes to extend their signification. 

In Spanish there are two articles, into, a, and el, the. 
Both agree in gender and number with the nouns to 
which they are joined. t 

Vno is called the indefinite article, because it points 

* Etymology in a more extended sense treats also of the deriva- 
tion of words either from primitives existing in the same language, 
or from parent words in other languages. But this part of the sub- 
ject belongs to lexicography rather than to grammar. 

f Scali^er calls the French article (le) insirtimentum otiosum gentis 
loquacistimcs. The same sarcasm might with equal justice be ap- 
plied to the Spanish el. In both languages this article performs the two- 
fold and contradictory office of limiting and of extending — -of defining 
and of rendering indefinite the signification of nouns. Thus el hornbre 
(Vhomme) signifies both the man, and man in general. This is un- 
doubtedly a defect, 

B 5 



10 ETYMOLOGY. 

out in an indeterminate manner the thing or things, to 
which it is joined : Un 1iombre } a man ; unis hombres, o 
some men. 

El is called the definite article, because it generally . 
ascertains what particular thing or things are meant : " 
El hombre, the man ; las mugeres, the women. 

Lo, the neuter of el, has no plural ; and it is not 
prefixed to nouns, (for this language has no neuter 
ones) but to adjectives substantively used ; as lo util> 
the useful. 

N. B. The declension of the articles tvill be given Voith 
that of the nouns. 

NOUN. 

A noun is the name of a person or thing. 

Nouns may be divided into two classes, proper and 
common. 

A noun is called proper when it is appropriated to 
some individual person or thing; as Nero, Toledo, 
Tajo : it is common when it may be applied to all 
persons, or things of the same kind ; as un hombre, a 
man ; una cmdad, a city ; un rio, a river. 

Nouns are of the third person when spoken of and 
of the second when spoken to. When the former are 
nominatives to the verb, they consequently require that 
verb to be in the third person also. 

To nouns belong Gender, Number, and Case. 

Classification qf Nouns hy the Spanish Academy. 

Besides the division of nouns into proper and com- 
mon, the Academy has admitted other distinctions 
which, though morescholastic than useful, are here laid 
in an abridged and altered form before the reader. 

I. The primitives are those which are derived from 
no other words, and which cannot therefore be reduced 
to any of greater simplicity ; as cielo, tierra 9 monte 9 
palacio. 

II. The derivatives are those which are derived from 
their primitives, and w^hich may therefore be reduced 
to simpler words existing in the language ; as celeste^ 



ETYMOLOGY. 11 

celestial, from cielo ; terrazgo, terreno, terrund, terrestre> 
terraqueo, terrenal, from tierra ; montera, monteria- 
montarfz, montesino, montariego, from monte. To de? 

rivatives belong gentiles, patronymics, augment 'atives, and 
diminutives. 

1. The gentiles denote the people, nation, or country, 
of any person or thing ; as Espanol, from Espaha ; 
Castellano, from Cast ilia ; Toledano, from Toledo, &c. 
These are adjectives formed from proper names. 

2. The patronymics are surnames ; as Sanchez, Alva* 
rez, Fermandez. % 

3. The augmentathes increase the signification of the 
primitives from which they are derived. This increase 
is formed by adding certain terminations to the noun. 
On, azo, onazo or ote, form the masculine, and ona 9 
aza, or onaza, the feminine increase. The final vowel 
of the primitive is generally dropped before the ter- 
mination is added. Thus, from hombre, a man, are 
formed hombron, hombrazo, liombronazo, a tall stout 
man : from muger, a woman, mugerona, mugeraza, or 
mugeronaza, a tall stout woman. Adjectives also are 
susceptible of augmentation : Grande, great ; grandon % 
grandate, grandazo, grandonazo, very great. 

4. Of diminutives there are two sorts. The one 
which expresses tenderness, and has ito or ico, for the 
masculine, and it a or tea for the feminine. These 
terminations are added to either nouns or adjectives, 
by suppressing the final vowel of the primitive when. 
it ends in one : Pajaro, a bird ; pajarito, a little, or a 
pretty little bird. Casa, a house ;" casita, a little, or a 

* Patronymics were originally formed from the Christian names of 
fathers, by changing o final into ez; as from Mendo, Mendez ; from 
Ordofio, Ordonez. Those ending in yo were similarly formed 3 asPe- 
layo, Pelaez Payo, Paez. To those ending in any other vowel 2 was 
added ; as JDia, Diaz; Lope, Lopez. To those ending in a conson- 
ant was added ez; as Lain, Lainez ; Martin, Martinez. Others be- 
came Patronymics without any change. Don Martin, Dona Vrraca, 
Dona Sancha assumed the surname Alfonso from the proper name of 
theix father, Alfonso the ninth of Leon. But many surnames were 
derived from other causes— from personal qualities or defects, from 
particular actions, and innumerable accidental circumstances. 



12 ETYMOLOGY. 

pretty little house. The other has zuelo. Mo, or eillo, 
for the masculine, and zuela, ilia, or eilla, for the 
feminine. Of these the first (zuelo) always, and the 
latter (illo or eillo) generally, expresses contempt or 
disgust. Perro> a dog ; perrillo 9 a vile little dog. 
Muger, a woman ; mugereilla, mugerzuella, a pitiful 
little woman. Hombre, a man ; hombrecillo, hombrezuelo, 
a pitiful little -fellow. There are a few other diminu- 
tives in ete, in, ejo, &c. but they are little used. And 
here it may be proper to observe that not all the nouns 
which have the preceding terminations are augmentative 
and diminutive. Attention must be paid not only to 
the termination, but also to the signification and deri- 
vation of nouns. None can be considered as belonging 
to either of the preceding classes, unless they can be 
easily traced to primitives, whose signification they 
Increase or diminish. Thus jiisilazo has the augmenta- 
tive termination, but it is not derived from fusil, be- 
cause it does not signify a large musket, but a musket- 
shot. 

III. The collective are those which embrace under a 
singular term a plurality of persons or things ; as ejercitOy 
an army ; rehano, a flock of sheep. 

IV. The verbals, as their name implies, are those 
which are derived from verbs. Every noun therefore 
of this class may be traced to some verb which exists, 
or which has existed, in the language : it is founded 
on action, and though a noun, it still retains many 
properties of the verb. From andar are derived anda- 
dory andadura andadero, andariego ; from hacer, hace- 
doYy hacimiento, hechura, hacedero. Those which end 
in or denote the agent of the action ; those in on, ion, 
ura 9 and ento 9 denote action, the effect of action, or 
both ; and those in ble, ero, Sfc. are adjectives signifying 
the facility or impossibility, the dignity or merit of an 
action. 

V. The compounded are those which consist of two 
or more words ; as traspie, from the preposition tras 
and the noun pie. This class of substantives is exceed- 
ingly numerous in Spanish. 



ETYMOLOGY. 13 

GENDER. 

Gender is the distinction of sex. 

There are two genders, the masculine and the femi- 
nine. 

The masculine is applied to males ; as hombre, a man; 
rey, a king. 

The feminine is applied to females; as muger, a 
woman ; reyna, a queen. 

Gender was originally applicable only to animated 
beings, — to those in which the distinction of sex was 
too evident to be misunderstood. But in the Spanish, 
as in most other languages, the application of this term 
has absurdly been extended to objects which can have 
no relation to sex. Thus pan, bread, is masculine, 
and salad, health, is feminine.* 

RULES FOR THE GENDER OF NOUNS, 

1. By Signification. 

1. Nouns which signify males, or which denote the 
dignities, employments, professions, &c. of men, are 
masculine. Those, on the contrary, which signify 
females, or which denote the dignities, employments, 
professions, &c. of women, are feminine. 

2. The names of rivers are masculine. f 

3. The names of winds are masculine, except Brisa 
and Tramontana. 

4. The names of the arts and sciences are feminine, 
except dibujo and grabado. 

* Besides the distinction of masculine and feminine nouns, the 
Academy admits of two other species, epicene and common, which 
have but one termination for both genders. The former compre- 
hends those nouns which do not vary the article to denote the mas- 
culines or feminines of a class : El raton, the he or she mouse; la 
rata, the he or she rat. The latter do vary the article, and by this 
means the gender is known at once : El testigo, the male witness ; 
la testigf. the female witness : el homicida, the homicide, (mas.) la 
homicida, (fern.) 

t Sin embargo en Valladolid se dice la Esgueva, y en Zaragosa. 
la Guerva a dos rios que tiene nestos nombres, por costumbre, aunque 
no tenga atro fundamento. Gram, Castei. 



14? ETYMOLOGY. 

5. The figures of grammar, poetry, and rhetoric, are 
feminine, except metaplasmo, pleonasmo, and hiperbaton. 
Hiperbole is both masculine and feminine. 

6. The letters of the alphabet are feminine. 

7. The names of the musical notes which compose 
the octave are masculine. 

The Spanish academy has given other rules for ascer- 
taining the genders by signification ; but they are 
so indefinite, and liable to so many exceptions, that 
they are of little use. 

2. By Termination. 

1. Nouns ending in a are feminine. 

Exceptions — Adema, albacea, almea, anagrama, 
aneurisma, antipoda, aporisma, apotegma, axioma, 
carisma, clima, comet a, crisma, clia, diafragma, digama, 
dilema, diploma, dogma, drama, (and its compounds,) 
edema, enigma, entimema, epigrama, esperma, Etna, Ja 9 
guardacosta, guardaropa, gnardavela, idioma, largomira, 
lema, manci, mapa, numisma, paradigma, paragua, pen- 
iagrama, planeta, poema, prisma, problema, progim- 
rtasma, sintoma, sistema, sojisma, tapaboca, tema, teo- 
rema, viva. 

2. Nouns in e are masculine. 

Exceptions — Aguarchirle, alache, alsine, anagalide, 
axe, azumbre, barbarie, base, calvicie, calle, capelardente, 
caridtide, came, catastrqfe, ceiiidumbre, churre, clase, 
clave, clematide, cohort e, compage, corambre, corte, cos* 
tumbre, crasicie, creciente, crenche, cumbre, didcedumbre, 
elatine, enante, epipdctide, esferoyde, especie, estirpe, 
etiopide, falange, fame, fase, fe, Jievre, frente, Juente, 
genie, liambre helice, helsine, hemionite, herrumbre, 
hipocistide, hojaldre, hueste, incerlidnmbre, indole, ingle, 
zntemperie, lande, landre, laringe, lande, leche, legumbre, 
lente, lieure, liendre, lite, Have, lumbre, manseclumbre, 
mengnante, mente, mole, molicie, muchedumbre, muerte, 
mugre, nave, nieve, noche, nube, panace, paralaxe, parase- 
lene, parte, paten te, peplide, pesadumbre , peste, pir amide, 
pixide, planicie, plebe, podre, podredumbre, progenie, 
prole, qaiete, salumbre } salve, sangre, sede, serie, servi- 



ETYMOLOGY. 15 

dumbre, sirte, suerte, superficie, tarde, teame, techumbre, 
temper ie, tilde, torre, trade, tripode, trope, ubre, v.r- 
diembre, varice, velambre, xislumbre, jiride. 

3. Nouns in i and y are masculine. 

Exceptions — Diocesi, graciadei, grey, ley, metropolis 
palmacristi, parafrasi. 

4. Nouns in o are masculine. 
Exceptions — Mano, nao. 

5. Nouns in u are masculine. 
Exceptions — Trihu. 

6. Nouns in d are feminine. 

Exceptions — Adalid, alamud, almud, arcuilaud, ar« 
did, ataudj isped, huesped> laud, sud, t almud. 

7. Nouns in / are masculine. 

Exceptions — Aguamiel, cal, capital, carcel, col, de* 
cretal, hiel, miel, piel, sal, serial, -vocal. 

8. Nouns in n are masculine. 

Exceptions — Verbals in ion, and also the following: 
arrumazon, barbechazon, hinazon, cancion, cargazon, 
ckrjazon, din, or crin, complexion, concion, condicion, 
desazon, imdgen, jurisdicion, ocasion, plomazon, razon, 
sarten, sazon, segazon, sien, sinrazon, trabazon. 

9. Nouns in r are masculine. 

Exceptions — Bezaar,Jlor, labor, segur, zoster, 

10. Nouns in s are masculine. 

Exceptions — Anagiris, antiperistasis, apoteosis, baca~ 
ris, bilis, colapiscis, crisis, diaper isis, diartrosis, diasis, 
enjiteusis, epiglotis, etiies, galiopsis, hematites, hipostasis, 
hipotesis, lis, macis, meiamorfosis, metemsicosis, rales, 
parataxis, paralisis, parenesis, polispastos, raquitis, res, 
selenites, sinderesis, sineresis, sintaxis teses, tisis, tos, 

11. Nouns in t are masculine. 

12. Nouns in x are masculine. 
Exceptions — Salsifrax, sardonix, trox, 

13. Nouns in z are masculine. 

Exceptions — -Cerviz, cicatriz, codorniz, contrahaz, coz, 
cruz, faz, haz, hez, hoz, luz, matriz, nariz, ninez, nuez, 
paz, perdiz, pez, pomez, raiz, sobrehaz, sobrepelliz, te%, 
vez, voz. Acid all those in ez denoting abstract qualities. 

The following are of Doubtful Gender. 
Alb aid, anatema, arte } (which in the plural is always fe- 



16 ETYMOLOGY. 

minine) cisma, canal, cutis, dole, emblema, hermafrodita, 
hiperbole, mar, (its compounds are feminine) mdrgen, 
nema, neuma, pringue^puente, reuma. Of these however 
albald, cisma, canal, are generally masculine ; and 
anatema, hiperbole, mar gen, nema and reuma, are 
generally feminine : Orden, signifying command, is fe- 
minine ; but when it denotes order, it is doubtful. 

^ NUMBER. 

Number considers objects either as one, or as more 
than one. Hence nouns have two numbers, the singular 
and the plural 

The singular denotes one object, as el libro, the 
book. 

The plural denotes more than one, as los libros, the 
books. 

When the singular ends in an unaccented vowel, the 
plural is formed by the addition of s ; as carta, cartas ; 
reyno, rey?ios. 

When the singular ends in an accented vowel, in 
ay or ey, or in a consonant, the plural is formed by the 
addition of es ; as jabali, jabalies, rey, reyes, arbol, 
arboles. 

But nouns and adjectives ending in z change the 
final consonant into ces in the plural; as luz, luces; 
jelix,Jelices* 

Nouns which from their very nature have no plural 
in English, have generally none in Spanish ; as oro, 
gold; irigo, wheat. 

CASE. 

Case is the relative situation of the noun. 
Spanish nouns have four cases., the nominative, the 
accusative, the objective, and the vocative. 

* These nine nouns do not increase in the plural : Cortaplumas, 
sacamuelaSy sacatrapas, br'mdis, Limes, Martes, Miercoles, Jueves Viernes. 

The following are used only in the plural : Albricias, alicates, 
angarillas, bofes, c a lend as, completas, despabiladeras, efemerides, exequias, 
fasces, fauces, idus, largas, livianos, llares, maythies, modules, nonas, 
pechugas, preces, pitches, semejas, tenezas, tinieblas trebedes. visperas, 
viveres. 

Maravcdi forms its plural in three ways : maravedis, maravedies and 
maravadises, but the second of these forms is seldom used. 



ETYMOLOGY. 17 

The nominative is the name of a thing, or the subject 
of the verb, as Pedro, Peter : El maestro ensena, the 
master teaches. 

The accusative is the object of an action, and is 
always governed by an active verb ; as Ella desprecia 
las riquezas, she despises riches. Here riquezas is in 
the accusative,, because it is governed by the active verb 
desprecia. 

The objective case of nouns * always follows, and is 
governed by prepositions ; as Hablare por tu hermano> 
I will speak for thy brother. Here hermano is in the 
objective, being governed by the preposition por. 

The vocative calls or addresses ; as Pedro, O Peter. 

DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

Masculine. 

Singular 

Norn, un libro, a book. 

Ace. un libro, a book. 

Obj. con un libro, with a book. 

Voc. O libro, O book. 

Plural. 

Nom. unos libros, some books. 

Ace. unos libros, some books. 

Obj. con unos libros, with some books. 

Voc. O libros, books. 

Singular. 

Nom. el libro, the book. 

Ace. el libro, the book. 

Obj. fdel libro, of or from the book. 

Voc. O libro, book. 

* The first objective case of personal pronouns is not governed by 
a preposition, but, like the accusative, by a verb. This class of words 
are very peculiar in their construction. See the declension of personal 
pronouns and the observations immediately following. 

t Del is a contraction of two words, the preposition de (of or from') 



18 ETYMOLOGY. 

Plural. 

Nom. los libros, the booh. 

Ace. los libros, the boohs. 

Obj. de los libros, of or from the boohs. 

Voc. O libros, boohs. 

Feminine. 

Singular. 

Nom. una casa, a house. 

Ace. una casa, house. 

Obj. a una casa, to a house. 

Voc. O casa, house. 

Plural. 

Nom. unas casas, some houses. 

Ace. unas casas, some houses. 

Obj. a unas casas, to some houses. 

Voc. O casas, houses. 

Singular. 

Nom. la casa, the house. 

Ace. la casa, the house. 

Obj. de la casa, of or from the house. 

Voc. O casa, house. 

Plural. 

Nom. las casas, the houses. 

Ace. las casas, the houses. 

Obj. de las casas, of or from the houses. 

Voc. O casas, houses. 



and the article el. Al is also a contraction of 6 (to) and el. De 
el and d el may often be found in the old Spanish writers, but the 
open sound of the two vowels is always disagreeable. For this 
reason the contraction has been sanctioned by the Academy. 



ETYMOLOGY. 19 

Proper names require no Article, and are thus declined : 

Singular only. 

Nom. Pedro, Peter. 

Ace. a Pedro, Peter.* 

Obj. de Pedro, of or from Peter. 

Voc O Pedro, Peter. 

The Neuter Article declined XJcith an Adjective substan* 
lively used. 

Singular only. 

Xom. lo util, the useful. 
Ace. lo util, the useful. 
Obj. a lo util, to the useful. 

Observations on the Cases of Nouns. 

In assigning four cases to Spanish nouns, the author 
has deviated so widely from the example of preceding 
writers on the same subject, that he thinks it necessary 
to state his reasons for the deviation. But before he 
does so, some preliminary observations on the nature 
of cases may not prove unacceptable to the learner. 

Originally case had doubtless respect to the termina- 
tion of the noun ; but Spanish nouns have no inflexions, 
and consequently no cases in the strict sense of the 
word. The Spaniards like most other European 
nations, have therefore been obliged to determine the 
case of a noun, by its position in the sentence, and to 
express the various relations of things by certain w T ords 
called prepositions, which are placed before nouns, and 
which when associated with those nouns, have precisely 
the same import as the terminations of the Latin and 
Greek substantives. Hence, as both the noun governed 
by the active verb, and the noun preceded by the 

* To account for the use of the preposition d before the accusative, 
see the Observations on the cases of nouns, and the Syntax of active 
verbs. 



20 ETYMOLOGY. 

preposition have the nature., they have obtained the 
name, of case. 

If the student be unacquainted with the ancient lan- 
guages of Rome and Greece, he will not easily compre- 
hend what has just been said. To render the subject 
more intelligible to him, we shall reverse the order in 
which it has usually been treated, — we shall reason, not 
from the ancient to the modern structure of language, 
but vice versa. 

Case, as we have before observed, is the relative 
situation of a noun, and a noun has been defined to be 
the name of a person or thing. Case, then, in other 
words, is the relative situation of a person or thing. In 
the phrase, the book of God, both book and God are 
nouns, but they do not stand in the same relation. Book 
is merely the name given to a thing, and it is therefore 
in the nominative ; but God is the object of a certain 
relation, which relation is denoted by the preposition 
of. Now of is a Gothic noun, signifying offspring, &c. 
If therefore we were permitted to do a little violence 
to the structure of the language, we should turn the 
phrase the book of God into the book offspring God, — 
the book emanating from, or produced by, God. When 
we say the book, and nothing more, the mind can form 
no notion of relation, because there is no reference to 
any other thing ; but when we say of God, we clearly 
express one. Of God therefore constitutes a case, and 
that case is the objective. 

The same reasoning must hold good in Spanish as 
well as in English : El libro de Dios. Dios is the ob- 
ject of the relation expressed by de ; and de Dios is 
therefore a case as much as the English expression of 
God. But de has not exactly the same meaning as our 
of: the latter, as we have shown, signifies offspring, fyc. 
but the former implies abstraction, and is equivalent to 
our from. El libro de Dios then may be rendered the 
book from God, — the book in which the action of ema- 
nating or proceeding began with God. 

If we translate the phrase into Latin, we shall have a 
still clearer notion of the nature of case. The book 
of God is in that language liber Dei. Here the student 



ETYMOLOGY. 21 

will perceive that there is no little word before Dei cor- 
responding to the English of and the Spanish de. In 
what manner then is the relation expressed ? By the 
termination of the noun. Dens is in the nominative : 
it signifies God only, without reference to any other 
object ; but Dei signifies of God, and points out the 
relation as clearly as either the English or the Spanish 
expression. 

Again: God gave the book to thejooorld (Dios dio el 
libro al mundo.) Here are three nouns, God, booJc 7 
"world, and all have different relations to one another. 
The first is the a vent or doer, — the cause of the verb 
gave, and this cause is in grammatical language termed 
the subject or nominative of the verb. Every nominative 
then is the person or thing which produces the verb, if 
that verb be active. — The second of these, booh, is the 
noun influenced by the active verb gave : it is therefore 
the object of that action, and is in grammatical language 
termed the accusative case. It stands in a very different 
relation to God, the nominative : the latter is the pro* 
ducer of the verb ; the former the receiver or endurer of 
the influence exercised by the verb". The last of these, 
"world, is the object of another relation expressed by the 
preposition to. To is derived from a Gothic noun, 
signifying end : it implies that the action of giving pro- 
ceeding from God 9 terminated with the world. 

The preceding sentence translated into Latin is Deus 
dedit librum mundo. Librum, the accusative, to which 
the action implied in the verb dedit passes from the 
agent Deus, has for its nominative liber ; and mundo, the 
term of the action, mundus. Liber signifies the book 
merely, without necessarily involving a reference to 
any action or relation: librum also signifies the book; 
but its case, in other words its termination, shows that 
it is the object of some influence exercised either by a 
verb or a preposition. In the same manner mundus 
signifies simply the world; but mundo, signifies to the 
"world. 

Latin nouns then have terminations, or cases, to de- 
note their various relations ; but Spanish and English. 
nouns have no such advantage. We have, however^ 



22 ETYMOLOGY. 

already shewn that a noun in either of the last men- 
tioned languages, when preceded by an active verb, or 
a preposition, may be said to form a case as certainly 
as if it had a distinct termination to express its relative 
situation. This being admitted, we now come to the 
inquiry, how many cases should be assigned to Spanish 
nouns ? 

The Spanish Academy, has, in imitation of the 
Latins, adopted six cases. These are the nominative ', 
or subject of the verb ; the genitive which is preceded 
by the preposition de ; the dative, which is governed by 
the prepositions a and para ; the accusative, which is 
the object of the verb ; the vocative, which calls or 
addresses ; and the ablative which is governed by 
various prepositions. But in adopting this number, 
that learned body cannot have the same reasons as the 
Romans, who were compelled to six by the inflections 
of their nouns. It has multiplied cases without neces- 
sity, and rendered the syntax of the language too corn- 
plicated to be easily understood by students un- 
acquainted with the Latin. As the genitive, dative, 
and ablative cases have the same termination, and are 
all governed by prepositions, why should they not be 
incorporated into one ? 

The example of the Academy has been followed by 
almost every succeeding grammarian. One, however, 
has ventured to deviate from the old beaten path : he 
has assigned hvo cases only to Spanish nouns ; but in 
avoiding Scylla he has fallen into Charybdis. Two cases 
are inadequate to express the various relations of things. 
The nominative and the vocative, though clearly dis- 
tinct in their nature and use, are confounded together ; 
and the same case is made the object both of active 
verbs and of prepositions. This is the way to darken, 
not to elucidate, a subject which, in whatever light it 
is viewed, is surrounded with considerable difficulties. 

When the author commenced his present underta- 
king, he intended to adopt three cases only, making 
one the object of both active verbs and prepositions. 
But as he proceeded, and his views of the subject ex- 
panded; he found that his objective was too compre- 



ETYMOLOGY. 23 

hensive, — that it included too many relations to be 
clearly understood. This he discovered more fully 
when he came to the personal pronouns, a class of 
words which have for the most part three terminations 
exclusive of the vocative, and which consequently 
require as many distinctions of case. 

The four cases which the author has assigned to 
Spanish nouns, are the nominative, the accusative, the 
objective, and the vocative ; and the office allotted 
to these cases will, he hopes, be found sufficiently in- 
telligible. The nominative and the vocative are, as 
before observed, distinct enough in their nature and 
use to warrant a corresponding distinction of name. 
The accusative he makes to be governed by active 
verbs ; and to form the objective, which is governed 
by prepositions, he has incorporated three other cases, 
the genitive, the dative, and the ablative of the Spanish 
grammarians. He has thus, he ventures to hope, 
adopted a division of cases that will considerably sim- 
plify the hitherto complicated system of syntax, and be 
found comprehensive enough to embrace the most im- 
portant relations of which substantives are susceptible. 
The names which he has assigned to these cases may 
perhaps be cavilled at ; but they are not of his inven- 
tion. He is well aware of their absurdity; but they 
have been sanctioned by long prescription, and he does 
not think himself authorised to substitute others in 
their place. 

Here the reader should be warned that when the ac- 
cusative is a reasonable being, in other words, a person. 
it is preceded by the preposition a: Oygamos al apos- 
iol : imitemos a los santos de Dios : Let us hear the 
apostle : let us imitate the saints of God. But the pre- 
position in this case is a mere expletive : it has no in- 
fluence on the following word, and it seems to have- 
been introduced for no other purpose than that of dis- 
tinguishing the accusative from the nominative. The 
Spanish order of construction is much more inverted 
than ours ; and the two cases would often be con- 
founded if the particle were not placed before the go- 
verned noun, Mato a Ant eon Hercules, is by no means 



24? ETYMOLOGY. 

an uncommon instance of inversion ; and what reader 
unacquainted with the ancient fables concerning Her* 
cules could point out the nominative of mato if the 
preposition a were omitted ? When the governed noun 
is not a reasonable being, the preposition is seldom ex- 
pressed ; but then the order of construction is not so 
much inverted, and the two cases are easily distin- 
guishable. If the writer conceived that any doubt 
could exist as to the subject and object of the verb, (and 
such doubt would often exist when both nouns were of 
the same number) he would consider it his duty to 
insert the preposition before the governed noun, if even 
that noun were not a reasonable being : ha preposition 
rige al nomhre: los verbos regen a sus accusativos (Gram. 
Castel.) And on the other hand when the object 
of the verb is a person, the particle a is sometimes, nay 
often dispensed with if the case be sufficiently distin- 
guishable without it. — See the Syntax of Active Verbs. 

Exercise on the Articles. 

N.B. The gender of every noun, and the formation erf 
the plural of nouns, may be learned from the rules before 
given. 

A man. Of a man. With a man, To a man, 
hombre Con 

Some men. Of some men. To some men. With 
some men. A woman. Of a woman. To a woman. 

muger 
For a woman. Some women. Of some women. To 
Para 

some women. With some women. For some women. 
A child. Of a child. To a child. From a child. 

nino 
With a child. Some children. Of some children. 
To some children. For some children. A husband. 

marido 
A wife. Of a husband. Of a wife. To a husband. 

esposa. 
To a wife. Some husbands. Some wives. To some 
husbands. To some wives. With some husbands. 
With some wives. 



ETYMOLOGY. 25 

The man. The woman. Of the man. Of the woman. 
To the man. To the woman. The men. The women. 
Of the men. Of the women. To the men. To the 
women. The child. The children. Of the child. Of 
the children, /fo the child. To the children. O child. 
O children. O man. O men. O woman. O women. 
The husband. The wife. Of the husband. To the 
wife. The husbands. The wives. Of the husbands. 
To the wives. The book. The paper. The pen. 

libro papql plmna 

The door. The window. The city. The labourer. 

pnerta veniana ciudad labrador 

The physician. The books. The papers. The pens. 

medico 
The doors. Of the books. To the paper. To the pens. 
To the door. The windows. The cities. The labourers. 
From the pens. To the books. To the papers. With 
the cities. For the labourers. The physicians. To 
the physicians. The shepherd. The chamber. The 

pa si or quarto 

kingdom, The bishop. The poem. The table. The 
reyno obispo poema mesa 

emperor. The country. The wine. The wisdom. 
emperador campo vino sabiduria 

The king. 
rey 

The child of the man. The door of the city. The 
window of the chamber. The cities of the kingdom. 
The wife of the shepherd. The poems of the bishop. 
The wisdom of the king. From the emperor to 
the king. From the man to the woman. From 
the husband to the wife. From the door to the 
window. The wife to the husband. To the doors. 
To the cities. With the tables. 

From the wives to the husbands. From the windows 
to the doors. For the pens. To the pens. The books 
of the physicians. The wisdom of the bishops. The 
windows and the doors of the chambers. From the 

y 

emperors to the kings. From the children to the men. 
The children of the women. The wives of the labour- 
er 



26 ETYMOLOGY. 

ers. The constancy of the kings. The rewards of the 

constancia premio 

men. The virtues of the bishops. The lives of the 

virtud vi da 

shepherds. To the physicians of the city. The la- 
bourers of the country. 

From a wife to a husband. The physicians of a 
king. Some cities of the kingdom. Some books of the 
physicians. A door of the chamber. The doors of a 
chamber. Some children of the king. Some windows 
of the chamber. The children of the shepherds. To 
the physicians of an emperor. 

ADJECTIVE. 

An adjective is a word added to a noun to express its 
quality. 

The adjective, like the noun, admits the variations of 
gender, number, and case, and it generally follows the 
substantive with which it agrees : El xefe valoroso, the 
valiant chief; las mugeres virtuosas, the virtuous women. 

The plural of adjectives is formed like that of nouns; 
as santo, santos, holy; holgazan, holgazanes, idle. 

The feminine of adjectives is thus formed : When 
the masculine ends in o, that o is in the feminine 
changed into a ; as bueno, buena, good ; sabio, sabia, 
wise; hennoso, hermosa, beautiful. When the mascu- 
line ends in an or on, the feminine is formed by adding 
a; holgazan, holgazana ; hampon, hampona, bold. 
And the adjectives derived from names of countries, &c. 
form their feminine In the same manner : Ingles, 
Inglesa, English; Frances, Francesa, French; Ara- 
gones, Aragonesa, Arragcnese ; Andahiz, Andaluza, 
Andalusian, &c. But masculine adjectives of this de- 
scription ending in a, have no change for the feminine; 
ZsPersa, Persian; Muscovila, Russian. 

Adjectives with other terminations than o, an, or on, 
do not admit any changefor the feminine; as elhombre 
ruin, la muger ruin ; el hombre alegre } la mnger alegre; 
el hombre jeliz } la mngerfdiz, &c. 



ETYMOLOGY. 27 



Comparison of Adjectives. 

Adjectives may qualify nouns either absolutely, that 
is, voitliout relation to other objects ; or relatively, that 
is, with relation to them. Hence arise the degrees of 
comparison. 

There are two degrees of comparison, the comparative 
and the superlative. The unchanged form of the adjec- 
tive is called the positive state. 

The comparative degree increases or lessens the 
quality of one object when compared with another. 
The increase is formed by mas before the adjective, and 
que after it ; the decrease by menos and que, and some- 
times negatively by tan and como : El sol es mas bril- 
lante que la tuna ; the sun is brighter than the moon : 
La luna es menos hrillante que el sol; the moon is less 
bright than the sun : La lima no es tan hrillante como 
el sol ; the moon is not so bright as the sun. 

The superlative increases or lessens the quality of any 
object to the highest or lowest degree : it is formed by 
prefixing the definite article to the comparative : El 
mas sabio de los reyes ; the wisest of the kings: El 
menos sabio de todos ; the least wise of all men. 

The article is omitted before the comparative if it be 
already expressed before the noun ; La muger mas in-. 
grata, the most ungrateful woman. But if a verb inter-< 
vene, the adjective admits the article : El hombre es el 
mas noble de todos los animales, man is the noblest of all 
animals. 

Yvhen the highest or the lowest degree of the quality 
is intended without immediate reference to any other 
object, the adverb may, very, precedes the adjective. 
Paris es una ciuclad muy hermosa^ Paris is a very beau- 
tiful city. 

Many adjectives, like those of the Latin, assume a 
superlative termination, and consequently reject the 
particle muy: Paris es una ciuclad hermosisima. Here 
hermosisima has the same meaning as muy hermosa. 
But as the learner may often be at a loss to know what 
adjectives admit the termination isimo, his surest way 

c 2 



28 ETYMOLOGY. 

will be to use mug with the positive, especially as the 
latter mode is much more general. 

If the adjectives which assume isimo end in a vowel, 
that vowel is omitted : corto, short ; cortisimo, very 
short : triste, sad ; tristisimp, very sad. Some change 
their final termination before they admit isimo : 

Positive. Superlative. 

ri-co, ri-qi&simo. 
larg-o 9 larg-uisimo. 

qfab-le, afab-ilisimo. 

Jeli-z, feli-cisimo. 

The following form their superlative irregularly: 

Positive. Superlative. 

hueno, . honlsimo. 

faerie, Jbrtisimo, 

nuevo, novisimo. 

sabio, sapientisimo. 

sacro, sacratisimo. 

Jiel, Jidelisim o . 

The following form both their comparatives and 

superlatives irregularly : 



Positive. 


Comparative. 


Superlative. 


hueno, 


me for-) 


optimo. 


malo 9 


peor, 


pesimo. 


grande, 


major, 


maxima. 


pequeno, 


men or, 


minim o. 


alto, 


superior, 


supremo. 


bajo 9 


inferior, 


injimo. 



All these admit another superlative in isimo, and 
they are also found compared with mas, menos, or muy. 
The superlative indeed of all these irregular adjectives 
is more frequently formed by muy and the positive than 
in any other way, especially in colloquial and episto- 
larv intercourse. The superlative termination isimo 
will probably be sometime obsolete, — at least in con- 
versation. 



ETYMOLOGY. 29 

Comparatives joined to Nouns, Verbs, and Adverbs, 

The comparative of increase before nouns and 
adverbs, and after verbs, is rendered by mas — que. He 
has more prudence than you ; tiene mas prudencia que 
vm.* We have more enemies than you; tenemos mas 
enemigos que vm. I esteem thee more than Maria; 
te estimo mas que a Maria, We act more prudently 
than they; obramos mas prudentemente que ellos. 

The comparative of decrease, with respect, to 
nouns, may be rendered by menos- — que. . He has less 

wisdom than ; tiene menos sabiduria que -. 

We have fewer friends than ; tenemos menos amigos 

que . 

Not so much as, not so many as, must be rendered 
negatively with ianto — como, and tanio must agree in 
gender and number with the noun to which it is 
joined. I have not so much money as you ; no tengo 
tanto diner o como vm. Peter has not so much ambi- 
tion as John; Pedro no tiene tanta ambicion como Juan. 
I have not so many books as——; no tengo tantos 
libros como — . 

With respect to verbs. — Less than is expressed by 
raenos — que; not so much as, by tanto and quanto or como t 
You study less than we ; vm estudia menos quenosotros. 
I do not love him so much as I esteem him ; no le 
quiero tanto quanto (or tanto como) le estimo. 

With respect to adverbs. — Less than is expressed by 
menos — que, and so — as hy tan — como. They act less 
prudently than you; obran menos jjrudeniemenie que 
vm. They do not so prudently as you; no obran tan 
prudentemente como vm. 

The comparative of equality is rendered like 
that of decrease, except the change of one or two par- 
ticles. 

As much as, as many as, before nouns, is expressed by 
tanto (declined) and como. She has as much sweetness 
as her sister ; ella tiene tanta dulzura como su hermana* 

* See the Personal Pronouns. 



30 ETYMOLOGY. 

We have as many friends as ■ ; tenemos tantos 

amigos como . 

With respect to verbs. — As much as, tanio quant o or 
como : I punish him as much as he deserves ; le castigo 
tanto quanto (or tanto como) merece. 

Not less than must be rendered negatively with 
raenos que. You do not eat less than his brother ; vm 
no come menos que su hermano. 

With respect to adverbs.— As — as, tan — como: He 

sings as well as ; canta tan bien como . Not 

Jess than, no — menos — que: I do not write less cor- 
rectly than you ; no escribo menos correctamente que 
vm. 

Some other Modes of Comparison. 

The most, when joined to a verb, is expressed by 
mas ; the least, by menos. He is the man whom I love 
the most ; Es el hombre que mas quiero. That is the 
woman whom I the least esteem ; esta es la mager que 
menos estitno. 

When the more is expressed in two corresponding 
members of a sentence, and the latter is a consequence 
of the former, the one is rendered by quanto mas, the 
other by tanto mas : The more virtuous a man is, the 
more happy he is; quanto mas virtuoso es el hombre, 
tanto es masjeliz. 

The more — the less, quanto mas, tanto menos : The 
more he applies to study, the less he increases his for- 
tune ; quanto mas se dedico at esiudio, tanto menos 
aumenta sufortuna . 

So much the more than, tanto mas que. So much the 
less than, tanto menos que. He was so much the more 
to blame, as he had so much the less reason to be angry 
than you ; turn tanta mas sinrazon, que tenia tanta menos 
razon de eivfadarse, que vm. 



ETYMOLOGY. 31 

Exercise on the Feminine and the Plural of Adjectives* 

The climate is hot. The house is high. The 
clima es caliente casa alta 

houses are high. The woman is good. The women 

son muger bueno 

are good. The English woman is beautiful. The 

her mo so 
English women are beautiful. The soul is precious. 

alma precioso 
Souls are precious. The virtues are amiable. Idleness 

virtad amable La pereza, 

is contemptible. The girl is pretty. The thing is dear. 

despreciable moca Undo cosa caro 

The things are dear. The man is brave. The men are 

bravo 
brave. The man is happy. The woman is happy. The 

feliz 
men are happy. The women are happy. The mistress 

am a 
is rich. The mistresses are rich. The maid is idle. 

rico criada holgazan 

The maids are idle. The objection is artful. The 

objeccion artificioso 
objections are artful. The king is brave. The kings 

rey 
are 5rai;£. The law is good. The laws are good. The 

fey 
doubt is ridiculous. The doubts are ridiculous. The 
cfoafo ridiculo 

damsel is rich. The damsels are rich. The cause is 
donzella causa 

noble. The causes are noble. The passion is tvorthy. The 
?zo6fe pasion digno 

* IiL the present, and in all following exercises, the learner should 
be careful to make the adjective of the same gender and number as 
the noun to which it is joined : The house is high ; la casa es alta, 
not alto, because casa is a feminine noun. The houses are high : las 
casas son alias, not alta, because casas is plural. — For the place cf 
adjectives, see the Syntax of this part of speech. 



32 ETYMOLOGY. 

passions are worthy. The word is sacred. The words are 

palabra sagrado 
sacred. The reply is noble. The replies are noble. 

respuesto 
The body is hot. The bodies are hot. The science 
cuerpo ciencia 

is necessary. The sciences are necessary. The heart 

necesario corazon 

is nicked. The hearts are wicked. The productions of 

walo prodaccion 

the earth are precious and inexhaustible. The works of 

tierra y inagotable cbra 

nature are great. The boy is diligent. The boys 
naturaleza grande nino diligente 

are diligent. The prosperity of the wicked is short, 
prosper idad malo corto 

The girl is thoughtless. The girls are thoughtless. 

nina descuidado 
The son is obedient. The sons are obedient. The 

hijo obediente 

daughter is humble. The daughters are humble. A 
hija humilde 

friend is scarce. Friends are scarce. The woman is 
ami go raro muger 

forsaken. The women are forsaken. A Spaniard is 
abandonado Espahol 

grave. The Spaniards are grave. The Frenchman is 
serio Frances 

lively. The Frenchmen are lively. The sister is 
alegre La hermana es 

charitable. The sisters are charitable. The wine is 
car it at iv a vino 

good. The country is rich. The countries are rich, 
hueno pais 

The house is well ornamented. The houses are well 

bien or n ado 
ornamented. The door is closed. The doors are 

puerta cerrado 
closed. Prudence is a precious virtue. The maid 
La prudencia precioso virtud criada 



ETYMOLOGY. 33 

is English. The maids are English. Emulation is 

Ingles La emulation 

worthy of a noble soul. The city is populous. The 
digno de noble alma ciudad poblado 

cities are populous. 

Exercise on the Degrees of Comparison. 

Peter is wiser than John. He is more prudent than 
Pedro es sabio Juan prudenie 

the sister. The city of London is more populous 

hermana ciudad de Londres poblado 

than that of Paris. The streets of London are wider 

la calle audio 

than those of Madrid. Ke is more idle than I. 

las El perezoso yo 

Augustus was not perhaps greater than Anthony, but 
August o no fue qiiiza Antonio pero 

he was more fortunate. His sister is very amiable, but 

feliz amable 

mine is more affable. The greatest pleasure of life 
la mia c fable placer la -del a 

is love, t\\e greatest blessing is health, and the best 

el amor gozo la salud y 

consolation a true friend. The Loire is greater 

consolacion verdadero ami go Loir a 

than the Seine, but it is less rapid than the Rhone. 

Sena rapido Rhodano 

Maria is as amiable as her sister. We are as poor as 
Maria su somos pobre 

they. He was more pious and zealous than his 
ellos piadosa y zeloso ' su 

brother. We saw innocence less sheltered, and 

vimos la innocencia aw par a do 

crime more protected. King Alphonso put an end 
el crimen protegido El rey Alfonso dio fin 

to one of the happiest and longest reigns that Spain" 

uno dichoso largo rey rt ado que la Espana 

had seen. Self-love is more artful than the 

habia visio El amcr-proprio artifcioso 

c 5 



34? ETYxMOLOGY. 

most artful of men. Wisdom is the most precious 

h ombre La sabiduria precioso 

of all gifts. Cicero was the most eloquent of all the 

todo don — ' fue eloquente 

Iloman orators. The streets of Bourdeaux are less 

Romano orador calle Burdeos 

'wide than those of Madrid. (Your house) is not so 

ancho las « La casa de vm no es 

high as mine. He is the most zealous friend that I have, 
alto -la mia zeloso amigo que tengo 

and the least interested man that I know. He is as 

interesado conozco 

learned as his elder brother. They are as rich as 
docto mayor hermano Ellos rico 

(your father). My brother is more learned than I. 
el padre de vm* Mi 
My cousin is less learned than I. The simplicity of 

prima simplicidad 

nature is more lovely than all the embellishment 

la naturaleza amable aseo 

of art. Slander is the most pernicious of all crimes. 
el arte La column ia pernicioso crimen 

Alexander conquered the most considerable provinces, 
Alexandro conquisto provencia 

and overturned the most powerful empires. Charity 

arruino poderoso imperio La caridad 

is the greatest virtue of a Christian. The style of 

virtud Christ iano estilo 

Fenelon is very rich, and very pleasing, but it is 

rico agradable, pero 

sometimes prolix : that of Bossuet is very lofty, but 

algunas veces prolijo cl ■ alto 

it is sometimes harsh. The men are very attentive. 

aspero atento 

The women are very attentive. I have as many 

tengo 
friends as he. Thou hast as many books as I. Thy 
amigo el tienes libro yo Tu 

brother has more children than I. We have more 
tiene nino te nemos 



ETYMOLOGY. 35 

diversions than labours. They have more than ten 
diversion trabajo tienen diez 

guineas. I have written more than ten letters to-day. 
guinea he escrito carta hoy 

Thou hast less pride than they. Thou art not so tall 
orgullo ellos no sois alto 

as I. Peter is not less old than his friend. He eats 
Pedro mejo sic No come. 

no less meat than bread. He drinks less water than 

mande pan bebe agua 

wine. This little room is more pleasant than mine. 
mno Este pequeno quarto agradable el mio 

This apple is better than the others. I have less 
Est a manzana otro 

money than you, but I have as much honour as you. 
diner o vm pero honor 

The Biscayans, the Andalusians, and the Catalonians, 

Biscayno Andaluz Catalan 

are excellent soldiers: they pass for the best, the most 

excellent e sol dado pasanpor 

courageous, and the most faithful of the kingdom. The 
valeroso leal reyno 

Spanish mountaineers are very strong, and almost all 
Espanol montanes puerte cast todo 

very tall. Lying is the lowest of all vices. The 

La mentira bajo vicio 

dog is a very faithful animal, and perhaps the most 

perro feel (irr.) ■ quizd 

faithful of all animals. Your sister is very amiable, 

vuestra amable 

and a very good woman. 
muger 



The man whom I esteem the most* The woman 
que estimo- 

whom I respect the least. The more rich a man is, the 

respeto rico 

more he wishes to be so. The shorter time is, the more 
desea serlo breve el tiempo 



36 ETYMOLOGY. 

precious it is. The more rare a thing is, the more dear 
precioso raro cosa caro 

it is. The more just and beneficent a prince is, the 

junto henefxo principe 

more faithful are his subjects ; and the more faithful 

leal vasal! o 

the subject is, the more constant and secure is the 

const ante seguro 

happiness of the kingdom. The more populous a 
die ha rei/no p>°bl a d° 

country is, the more rich and powerful it is. The more 
pais rico poderoso 

Alexander conquered, the more he wished to conquer. 
conquistaba, queria conquistar. 

The more you cultivate the sciences, the more learned 

vm cultivard ciencia docto 

ycu will become. The less he labours, the more he 

se hard trauaja 

wishes to gain. 
quiere ganar. 

THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 



uno, una 


one 


dos 


tvoo 


tres 


three 


quatro 


four 


cinco 


jive 


seis 


six 


siete 


seven 


ocho 


eiglit 


nueve 


nine 


diez 


ten 


once 


eleven 


doce 


tzvelve 


trece 


thirteen 


catorce 


fourteen 


quince 


fifteen 


diez y seis 


sixteen 


diez y siete 


seventeen 


diez y ocho,, 


eighteen 



ETYMOLOGY, 

diez y nueve 

veinte 

veinte y uno, una 

veinte y dos 

veinte y tres 

veinte y quatro 

veinte y cinco 

veinte y seis 

veinte y siete 

veinte y ocho 

veinte y nueve 

treinta 

treinta y uno, una 

quarenta 

quarenta y uno, una 

cincuenta 

cincuenta y uno, una 

sesenta 

sesenta y uno, una 

setenta 

setenta y uno, una 

ochenta 

ochenta y uno, una 

noventa 

noventa y uno, una 

ciento 

ciento y uno, una 

docientos, docientas 

trecientos, trecientas 



nineteen 
twenty 
twenty-one 
twenty-two 

twenty -three 
twenty four 
twenty-five 
twenty-six 
twenty-seven 
twenty-eight 
twenty-nine 
thirty 

thirty-one, fyc. 
forty 
forty-one, fyc. 

ffty-one, %d. 
sixty 

sixty-one, Sec. 
seventy 

seventy -one, SfC. 
eighty 

eighty-one, fyc. 
ninety 

ninety-one, Sfc, 
a hundred 
a hundred and one 
two hundred, 
three hundred 



quatrocientos,quatrocientas t /bz£r hundred 

quinfientos, quin^ientas 

seiscientos, seiscientas 

setecientos, setecientas 

cchocientos, ochocientas 

novecientos, novecientas 

mil 

mil y ciento 

mil y docientos, docientas 

dos mil 

veinte mil 

cien mil 



Jive hundred 
six hundred 
seven hundred 
eight hundred 
nine hundred 
a thousand 
eleven hundred 
twelve hundred 
two thousand 
twenty thousand 
a hundred thousand 



ETYMOLOGY. 

docientos, docientas mil two hundred thousand 
mil] on, or cuento a million 



THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. 



Primero — a 
segundo — a 
tercero — a 
quatro — a 
quinto — a 
sexto — a 
septimo — a 
octavo — a 

nono — a, or noveno — a 
decimo — a 
undecimo — a 
duodecimo — a 
decimo — a tercio — a 
decimo — a quarto — a 
decimo — a quinto — a 
decimo — a sexto — a 
decimo— a septimo — a 
decimo— a octavo — a 
decimo — a nono — a 
vigesimo — a 
vigesimo — a primo — a 
vigesimo — a segundo — a 
vigesimo — a tercio — a 
trigesimo — a 
quadragesimo — a 
quinquagesimo — a 
sexagesimo — a 
septuagesimo — a 
octogesimo — a 
nonogesimo — a 
centesimo — a 
docentesimo — a 
trecentesimo — a 
quadragentesimo — a 
quingentesimo — a 
sexentesimo — a 



first 

second 

third 
fourth 

tfth 

sixth 
seventh 
eighth 
ninth 
tenth 
eleventh 
twelfth 
thirteenth 
fourteenth 
fifteenth 
sixteenth 
seventeenth 
eighteenth 
nineteenth 
twentieth 
twenty first 
twenty -second 
twenty-third, fyc. 
thirtieth 
fortieth 
fiftieth 
sixtieth 
seventieth 
eightieth 
ninetieth 
hundredth 
two hundredth 
three hundredth 
four hundredth 
five hundredth 
six hundredth 



ETYMOLOGY. 39 

septengentesimo — a seven hundredth 

octogentesimo— a eight hundredth 

nonogentesimo — a nine hundredth 

milesimo — a thousandth 



Adjectives "which vchen joined to Substantives lose one or 
more Letters. 

Uno, one, primero, first, tercero, third, postrero, last, 
alguno, some, ninguno, none, bueno, good, and malo, 
bad, lose the last vowel when they are followed by a 
substantive of the masculine gender, and singular num- 
ber : Un honibre, el primer hombre, &;c. But tercero 
does not always lose it ; for el tercero dia is as general 
as el tercer dia, and both forms of speaking are sanc- 
tioned by the Academy. 

Ciento, a hundred, loses its last syllable before nouns 
whether masculine or feminine : Cien hombres, cien 
mugeres. 

Grande, great, loses the last syllable before a sub- 
stantive beginning with a consonant, whenever it signi- 
fies great in merit or in quality; but if it signifies great 
in extent or dimension only, or if the following noun 
begins with a vowel, it does not in general lose any of 
those letters. Una gran muger* un gran caballero* 
imply therefore a considerable portion of merit in 
the woman and tfee-^agafes* on the other hand una 
grande casa, implies greatness in dimension; but un 
grande amigo, un grande almirante signify greatness in 
the former sense. 

Santo, holy, loses also the last syllable before a 
proper name : San Pedro, San Francisco. Santo Do- 
mingo, Santo Tomas, Santo Torribio, and Santo Tome, 
are exceptions to the rule. 

If the substantive to which any one of the preceding 
adjectives belongs, be not expressed, but understood, 
that adjective does not lose its final syllable : Uno 6 
dos hombres i uno de esos senores. 



40 ETYMOLOGY. 

PRONOUN. 

A pronoun supplies the place, and consequently 
prevents the repetition, of a noun. 

Pronouns may be divided into three classes, Personal, 
Relative, and Adjective. 

THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS 

Stand only for persons, or for things personified. 
Personal pronouns admit of person, number, gender, 
and case. 

There are three persons in each number : 

yo, I, is the first person ] 

tu, thou, is the second person > singular. 

el, he ; ella, she, is the third person J 

nosotros, tve, is the first person ~\ 

vosotros you, is the second person > plural, 

ellos, ellas, they, is the third person J 

The other accidents of pronouns, number, gender, 
and case, are like those of nouns. 

Personal Pronouns are thus declined: 





First Person. 






Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. 
Ace. 
Obj. 
Voc. 


yo, / 

me, a mi, me 

me, a mi, to me 


Nom. 
Ace. 
Obj. 
Voc. 


nosotros 4 ive 

nos, a nosotros, us 

nos, a nosotros, tons 



Second Person. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. vosotros, you 

Ace. os, a vosotros, you 

Obj. os, a vosotros, to you 

Voc. vosotros, O you 

* Nosotros and vosotros are masculine. When feminine nouns are 
referred to, the last syllable os is changed into as; as nosotras, voso- 
tras. 



Nom. 


tu, 


thou 


Ace. 


te, 


a ti, thee 


Obj. 


te, 


a ti, to thee 


Voc. 


tu, 


thou 



ETYMOLOGY. 



« 



Third Person Masculine, 



Nom. 

Ace. 
Obj. 
Voc. 



Singular. 

el * he 

le, a el, him 

le, a el, to him 



Plural. 

Nom. ellos, they 

Ace. los, a ellos, them 

Obj. los 5 a ellos, to them 

Voc. 



Third Person Feminine. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nom. ell a, she 
Ace. la, a ell a, for 
Obj. le, a ella^ fo /br 
Voc. — 



Nom. el las, £Aey 
Ace. las, a ellas, £A#« 
Obj. les, a ellas, fo Mew? 
Voc. 



Third Person Neuter. 

Singular only. 

Nom. ello, it 
Ace. lo, it 
Obj. a ello, ifo z'£. 
Voc. 

There is another pronoun of the third person which 
refers to the nominative of the sentence, and is generally 
termed reciprocal; it has two cases, the accusative and 
the objective : 

Singular and Plural. 

Ace. se^ a si, himself, herself, itself themselves. 
Obj. se, a si, to himself, herself, itself, themselves, 

* Anciently when the preposition de preceded the pronouns tl, ella 
ello, the e was omitted, and the el joined to the pronoun ; as del 
della, dello ; but this contraction is rejected by the Academy, and 
approved only before the article. — Query : Is not what the 
Academy calls an article, often a true pronoun ? In the chapter on 
demonstrative pronouns, that body when speaking of aquel observes : 
Aquel es la (cosa, &c.) que esta remota del que hahla, y del 
que escucha. 



42 ETYMOLOGY. 

Observations on the Personal Pronouns. 

When the adjective mismo, self, is joined to the pro- 
noun se, it agrees in gender and number with the noun 
to which it refers ; Hablan de si mismos ; they (mas) 
speak of themselves : Se condemnan a si mismas ; they 
[fern.) condemn themselves. 

The pronouns mi, ti, si, preceded by the preposition 
con, with, are changed into mi go, tigo, sigo, which unite 
with the preposition : Conmigo } with me ; contigo, with 
thee ; consigo, with him. 

Nosotros and vosotros are compounded of the pro- 
nouns nos, vos, and the plural adjective otros. Vos in 
the accusative has lost the v. Os (not vos) castigare, 
I will punish you. 

Nos and vos are no longer used in the nominative for 
nosotros and vosotros, except in some particular in- 
stances. In royal ordinances, ecclesiastical mandates, 
&c. 710s is joined to singular nouns. Tu and vos are 
often used as terms of familiarity between husband and 
wife, parents and children, and sometimes between 
intimate friends. They are also used in addresses to 
the Deity, &c. But in good society, tu, vos, vosotros, 
are never employed. Tu especially would be con- 
sidered insulting, as it is the term employed in speaking 
to servants, slaves, and dogs.* 

As then the second person is so seldom used, the 
Spaniards have been obliged to call in the aid of the 
third in addressing one another. They use listed for 
the singular, and ustedes for the plural, of both sexes, 
and make the following verb agree in the third person 
w r ith one or other of these words, listed is an abbre- 
viation of vuestra merced, — a term nearly equivalent to 
your worship, listed is not used in writing ; but vm 
for the singular, and vms, or vmds, for the plural. 
When this abbreviation is followed by an adjective, that 
adjective must always be of the same gender and 
number as the person, or persons, to whom we speak ; 
g Senor, estd vm bueno ? Are you well, sir ? Senora, 

* Tu is generally used when kings address a subject, however 
high in rank that subject may be. 



ETYMOLOGY. 43 

me han dicho que vm est a buena ; Madam, I have been 
informed that you are well, g Senores, estan vms buenos ? 
gentlemen, are you well I $ Senoras, estan vms buenos? 
Ladies; are you well ? 

As the accusative and the objective case of personal 
pronouns are for the most part alike in both numbers, 
they are often confounded with each other even by lite- 
rary Spaniards. The student will, however, find little 
difficulty in distinguishing the one from the other, 
if he consider that whenever the translation of the 
governed pronoun requires, or admits, the preposition 
to, that pronoun is in the objective case : Eljuez le 
not if 6 la seniencia ; the judge communicated to him the 
sentence. Here le is in the objective, because it 
admits the preposition to when translated into English. 
But in Jthe sentence, el juez le castigo, the judge 
punished him, le will not admit the preposition, and it 
h therefore in the accusative. 

In nouns, the objective case is always governed 
by a preposition preceding it, but the first form of the 
objective case of personal pronouns is never governed 
by one. Like the accusative, it is governed by the 
verb. The distinction, however, which has in the 
preceding paragraph been drawn between the two 
cases, will be sufficiently intelligible, and will prevent 
the learner from confounding them. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS 

Are such as relate in general to some word or phrase 
going before, which is thence called the antecedent. 
They are quien 3 cual. que, and cuyo. Cual generally re- 
quires the definite article before it ; que seldom ; quien 
and cuyo never. 

Quien relates to persons only ; cual and que to both 
persons and things. 

The Relative Pronouns are thus declined : 

Singular. 
Nom. quien. who. 
Ace. a quien, whom. 
Obj. de quien, of or from whom. 
Yoc. — 



44 ETYMOLOGY. 



Plural, 



Norn, quienes, whom. 

Ace. a quienes, whom. 

Obj. de quienes, of or from whom. 

Voc. 

Masculine. 

Singular. 

Nom. el cual, tuAo, which. 
. J al cual, whom. 
\ el cual, which. 
Obj. del cual, of or from whom or which. 
Voc, 

Nom. los cuales, tc^o, which. 
a f los cuales, which. 

' X a los cuales, whom. 
Obj. de los cuales, of or from whom or "which. 
Voc. 

Feminine. 

Singular. 

Nom. la cual, tt^o, which. 
» f la cual, which. 

\ a la cual, whom. 
Obj. a la cual, Zo tuAo^ or which. 
Voc. 

Pfurhl. 

Nom. I9S cuales, to/jo, which. 
. c rl^s cuales, which. 

\ a los cuales, whom. 
Obj. a los cuales, £0 ivAom or which. 
Voc. 

(JW, who, which, that, has no distinction of genders 
and numbers. L 7 ^ m/ que ; a king who ; Zos hombres 



ETYMOLOGY. 45 

que, the men who ; la espada que tenia, the sword which 
he had ; las mugeres que Jiiei'on, the women who 
went. 

Lo que, that which,, or what, refers to something in- 
definite and singular : Qitando no podenics lograr lo que 
deseamos, debemos contentarnos con lo que tenemos ; when 
we cannot obtain tvhat we want, we should be satisfied 
with tvhat we have. 

Cuyo, cuya, cuyos, cuyas, whose, of which, agrees in 
gender and number with the noun to which it is joined: 
g Cuyo es este libro ? whose is this book ? g Cut/as son 
estas plumas ? whose are these pens ? This pronoun 
evidently partakes the nature of an adjective. 

Qicien is sometimes used for quienes. Thus Cervan- 
tes : " Los prirneros con quien topamos, eran los Gim- 
nosofistas" — " Instrumentos por quien seforman las fan- 
tasias." But neither the authority of Cervantes, nor 
that of the whole Spanish Academy, can justify so ma- 
nifest a violation of concord, especially as it is opposed 
to the general practice of the best Castilian writers. 

When Relative Pronouns are used in asking questions, 
they are termed Interrogatives : g Quien viene? who 
comes ? In the latter case, however, they do not all 
preserve the same meaning. 

Que as a relative signifies tvho, which, that; as an in- 
terrogative, what ; gQue tenemos? what have we? Que 
is also used before a noun, and with the same meaning : 
gQue hora es ? what o'clock is it ? gQueJrutos comprard 
vm ? what fruits will you purchase ? 

But when tvhat is separated by the verb to he from 
the noun to which it belongs, it is rendered by cual 
without the article when it relates to things, and by 
quien when it relates to persons : ^;Cual es el merito de 
aquel hombre? what is the merit of that man ? gCuales 
son sus conocimientos ? what are his acquirements ? 
g Quienes son aquellos hombres ? what are those men I 
It also signifies who are those men I 

Whose may be rendered by cuyo or de quien : Whose 
are the books? g cuyos son los libros? whose is the 
house ? g de quien es la casa ? 



46 ETYMOLOGY. 

ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS 

Are of a mixed nature : they have the properties both 
of pronouns and of adjectives. 

Adjective pronouns may be subdivided into three 
classes, the Possessive, the Demonstrative, and the IE- 
definite. 

1. The Possessive 

Are those which relate to possession or property. Of 
this class there are two kinds : 

The Conjunctive, which are always joined to nouns; 
as mi Uber, my book. 

The Disjunctive which are never joined to the nouns, 
and are preceded by the definite article ; as, tu casa y 
la mia, thy house and mine. 





Conjunctive. 




Singular. 


MAS. 


FEM. 


mio, 
tuyo, 
suyo, 
nuestro, 


mia, my* 

tuya, thy. 

suya, his, her> its, their. 

nuestra, our. 


vuestro, 


vuestra, your. 




Plural. 


MAS. 


PEM. 


mios, 
tuyos, 
suyos, 
nuestros, 


mias, my. 

tuyas, thy. 

suyas, his 9 her, its, their 

nuestras, our. 


vuestros, 


vuestras, your. 



Mio, tuyo, suyo, with their ferninines mia, tuya, suya 9 
lose the final syllable before a noun, and preserve it 
when the noun precedes them : mi libro, mi madre : 
hijo mio, madre mia. And so also in the plural : mis 
lihros, tus cartas, sus casas. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



47 



MAS. 

el mio, 
el tuyo, 
el suyo, 
el nuestro, 
el vuestroj, 



MAS. 

los mios, 
los tuyos, 
los suyos, 
los nuestros, 
los vuestros, 



Disjunctive. 
Singular. 

FEM. 

la mi a, mine. 

la tuya, thine. 

la suya, his, hers, its, theirs* 

la nuestra, ours. 

la vuestra, yours. 

Plural 

FEM. 

las mias, mine. 

las tuyas, thine* 

las suyas, his, hers, its, theirs. 

las nuestras, ours. 

las vuestras, yoursi 



These pronouns are declined like nouns : 

Singular. 

Nora, el mio, mine. 
Ace. el, or al mio, mine. 
Obj. del mio, of or from mine. 
Yoc. — . 



Norn, 
Ace. 
Obj. 
Voc. 



Plural 

los mios, mine, 

los, or a los mios, mine. 

de los mios, of or from mine. 



When these pronouns refer to something indeter- 
minate and neuter, they are joined to the neuter article : 
Lo mio no es tuyo ; mine is not thine. 

As tu, vos, and vosotros, are not used in good society. 
neither are tuyo and vuestro. Instead of these we em- 
ploy do vm in speaking to one person, and de vms, or 
mias* in speaking to more than one, prefixing either 
the definite article, or suyo to the noun, with which it is 



4§ ETYMOLOGY. 

made to agree. Thus for vuestro hijo, your son, we 
should say el hijo de vm, or de vms, the son of your 
worship, &c. For Senores, vuestras camas estan pron- 
tas, we should say, Senores, las (or sus) cant as de vms 
estan prontas. In familiar conversation de vm, &c. may 
be either omitted or expressed, if the noun be preceded 
by su or sus : How is your father ? gcomo esta su padre 
de vm? ; or ^como esta su padre? Without this fami- 
liarity, the omission of vm would be considered im- 
polite. 

When the pronoun is disjunctive, the expression is 
similar : Gentlemen, my coach and yours are at the 
door ; senores, mi coche, y el de vms, estan a la puerta. 

If we speak of a third person also, for whom we wish 
to testify considerable respect, we use su merced, (sus 
merc-edes plural) instead of su : I have seen the corregi- 
dor, and I hope to obtain his protection ; he visto al 
senor corregidor, y espero merecer la proteccion de su 
merced. 

In elevated style, and when we address the powers of 
heaven, or persons high in dignity, vuestro may be used : 
Dios, imploro vuestro amparo ; O God, I implore trry 
assistance : Inutil sera, senor, todo vuestro poder ; all 
3 r our power, sire, will be useless. 

2. The Demonstrative 

Precisely point out the persons or things to which they 
relate. 

Of this class there are only three : 

• 

Mas. Fern. Neat. 
Sing, este, esta, esto, this. 
Plur. estos, estas, these. 

Sing, ese, esa, eso, that. 
Plur. esos, esas, , those. 

Sing, aquel, aquella, aquello, that. 
Plur. aquelios, aquellas, those. 

When the demonstratives este and ese precede the ad- 
jective otro, other, they coalesce with it so as to form 



ETYMOLOGY. 4# 

one word, but they previously drop the final vowel : 
Estotro, estotra, estotro, this other ; estotros, estotras, 
these others : Esotro, esoira, esotro, that other ; esotros, 
esotras, those others. It is not so when aquel precedes 
the same adjective : in that case both words remain un- 
changed : Aquel otrOy a quell a oira, aquello otro y that 
other. 

The proper application of ese and aquel requires 
some attention. Both words signify that, but with some 
difference of meaning. Ese points out an object at a 
moderate distance from the speaker ; aquel, one that is 
more remote, Esie points out an object here, or ik 
this place; ese, there, or in that place; and 
aquel, yonder.* 

. The relative use of these pronouns is the same when 
applied to time as to space. Este denotes time present ; 
ese, time not long past; and aquel, time considerably 
removed from the present. 

3. The Indefinite 

Are so called because they express their subjects in an 
indefinite or general manner. 

Many of this class are declined like adjectives; but as 
they do not express qualities, they cannot properly be 
ranked under that head. 

The following have no plural : 

Alguien, some one, any one. 
Kadie, no one, nobody. 
Algo, something, any thing. 
Nad a, nothing, not any thing. 

* The definition given above differs in one respect from that of the 
Academy : " Este sefiala y demuestra la persona 6 cosa, tanto ma* 
terial cumo incprporea, qu,e esta cerca del que habla, 6 que el mismo 
tiene asida : Ese la que ebta mas cerca de aquel a quien se habla, que 
del que habla ; Aquel la que esta remota del que habia, y del que 
escucha."— With ail deference to the authority of that learned body, 
the use assigned to ese, however clear, is not sufficiently accurate* 
The speaker, and the person spoken to, may be both together, and 
vet ese would be the word used to point out an object at a moderate 
distance from the former, and consequently from the latter. 

D 



SO ETYMOLOGY. 

Cada, each, ever?/ (always joined to a noun), 
Quienquiera, whoever, whosoever, &c. 
QuaJquier cosa, whatever, whatsoever. 

The following have no singular : 

Ambos, ambas, both. 

Varios, varias, several. 

Entrambos, entrambas, both together. 

The two following have the same termination for both 
genders : 

Sing. Plur. 

Tal, tales, such, 

Qualquiera, qualesquiera, whoever, whichever, fyc. 

The following have the distinctions of gender and number t 

Fern. 



Mas. 
Sing, uno, 
Plur. unos, 

Sing. alguno, 
Plur. algunos, 

Sing, ninguno, 
Plur. ningunos, 

Sing, mucho, 
Plur. much os, 

Sing, to do, 
Plur. todos, 

Sing, otro, 
Plur. otros, 

Sing, uno y otro, 
Plur. unos y otros, 

Sing, ni uno ni otro, 
plur. ni unos ni otros, 

Sing, uno otro, 
Plur. unos otros* 



una, one. 
unas, some. 

alguna, some one. 
algunas, some, any. 

ninguna, no one. 
ningunas, none, not any. 

mucha, much. 
muchas, many. \ 

tod a, ") 7, 
A i \all. 
todas, J 

otra, other. 
otras, others. 

una y otra, j^ 
unas y otras, J 

m una ni otra, 1 ..? 

. 4 > neither* 
ni unas ni otras, J 

una otra, each other. 
unas otras, one another. 



ETYMOLOGY, 51 

EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUNS* 

1. Personal* 

I love Miss Julia, but she is not fond 

quiero a la Seuorita — pero no es prendado 

of me. Thov. wouldst do better to attend to thyself] 

harias mejor atendar a 

and not to thy friends. / have told often 
y no in ami go. he dicho muchas 

thee that thou wilt always find me disposed 
veces que hatlaras siempre dhpuesto 

to serve thee. You have seen my father., and yon 
servir Vm ha visto a mi padre, y vm 

have spoken to him of me. They say much good 
ha hablado de dicen mvcho bieti 

of you, but you speak ill of them. Virtue 

ha bla mala merit e La virtual 

contains within itself all that can make it 

tiene en qudnio puede hacer 

lovely. (Idle men) are tiresome to 

amable. Los hombres perezosos ra.testo a 

themselves. The more / see Miss C the more 

veo 
amiable /find her. I have received letters ft om her p 

hallo he recibido cartas de 

and / shall write to her by the first post. If you 

escribire par correi. 

wish to come with me, I will give you a seat 
qui ere a venir conmigo dare asiento 

in my carriage. God sees us, calls us, and will 
en mi cache. Dins ve t llama 

judge us. All the affections which rule us are criminal. 
juzgara Todos a feet o que figen _. ' culpable. 

These w r ords comforted me much. I diverted 
Esta palabra me conscluron mucho* * diver ii 

* Though the pronouns yo, i*^ el, &c, are seldom expressed be- 
fore the verb to wh'ch iljey are ii;uniri: r ;5 ves, the learner would do well 
not to omit them until In* is famijiaiised with them. Yuu should be 
Tendered, by vm, singular, zms plural, with the verb in ihe iinrd persun» 
For the place of the persona) pronouns, see Syntax. 

» 2 



52 ETYMOLOGY. 

them with a relation of my last adventure. If God 

con relation mi ultimo a-ceniura Si 
is for us, zve are enough to go against them. He 
es para somos bastanies para ir contra 
could not 3ive without her. Hercules confessed to me 

podia vivir sin confeso 

that this part of his life had tarnished his virtue, 

est a parte su vida habia empanado su 
God has granted him a happy and long reign of fifty 

ha dado dichoso largo repiado 

years. These wicked men. would have killed 
anos Estos malvado h ombre le hubieran muerto 
him. The presence of this friend comforted her. 

p/esencia amigo consolo 

Prosperity procures us friends, and adversity 

La prosperidad prccura la adversidad 

tries them. (Your brothers) are good : 
prueba Los hermanos de vm bueno 

they have given me money. Your sisters are 

me kan dado diner o hermana 

better : they have given me good advice. Moses 
mejor comejo (pi.) Moyses 

touched with his rod the water of the river, and 
toco con su vara el agua rio, y 

changed it into blood. You are spies, and tve 
convertio en sangre. sois espia, y 

will punish you. Generosity unites many vir- 
castigaremos. La generosidad junta mucha vir- 

tues, and gives them an heroic energy. 
tud y da heroico energia. 

2. Relative* 

The house ivhich you have bought is better than 
casa ha comprado vale mas 

* In the above exercise, who raajr be rendered by que, if it imme- 
diate! v Follow its r;rjteuedent, and if it be in the same case; as, A king, 
who governs well, i* beloved; vn rev, que gobierna bien, es querido. In 
other cases who is often rendered by quien or qual. Whom is gene- 
rally translated quien, preceded by the preposition d; but que with- 
out a preposition is also used, especially if it immediately follow 
the antecedent. 



ETYMOLOGY. 53 

that in which I dwell. The men twain I have seen, 
aquella en vivo a he visio 

The women whom I esteem. The book which we have 

muger a esiimo libra hemos 

read is new. He is a man to whom I have often 
leido est a nuevo es he 

spoken. The (young man) of whom I have spoken to 
hablado joven 

you,, deserves to be encouraged. The place which he 

es digno de ser alentado puesto 

has obtained. The flowers which thou seest, are flow- 
ha logrado ves son 

ers whose odor is pleasing. He is a man whose mo- 
odor suave mo- 

desty is admirable. Those are oaks whose trunk is 
destia Esias en c in a tronco 

strong, and whose branches are shady. This is a vice 
fuerte tamo jTrondoso Este vicio 

which is the source of many others. The company 
origen muchos otros compania 

which had founded the city. He who despises virtue 

hahiafandado ciudad desprecia 

deserves no confidence. Cicero was one of those 
no merece confianza Cicero ji fue aquellos 

who were sacrificed to the vengeance of the trium- 

Jueron sacrificadoi d venganza trium- 

virs. They who had despised the prediction of 
vivos habian despreciado prediccion 

Mentor, lost their slaves and flocks. They who 

perdieron sns esclavo y ganado 
oppress the poor, shall be punished ; but they who 
oprimen a pobre seran casiigados 
love the poor, shall be rewarded. Whose is this 
qui^ren a recompensados este 

book ? Whose is this house? Whose are these books? 
libro est a casa son 

Whose are these houses ? A. virgin shall conceive and 

virgen concibivd 

bear a son, whose name shall be Jesus, (Let us hear) 
parird htjo nombre sera Oygamos 



51? ETYMOLOGY. 

the apostle, tvhose words are mysteries: (let us obey) 
d aposiolo palabra misteria obedezcamos 

the church, tvhose precepts are salutary. Who knocks 

iglesia precepto saludable llama 

at the door ? God, ivho is invisible, created the world 

a puerta Dios — crio mundo 

zvhich is visible. Who goes there? 
— va all a 



3. Adjective. 

My father is there. Thy sister is virtuous. His 
padre esid hermana es virtuoso 

Cousin (has had the care) of my subsistence. Thy 
primo ha cuidado de mantenimiento 

carelessness is the only cause of thy disgrace. Our 
descuido unico causa desgracia 

house is very large. My books are numerous. Her 

grande numeroso 

virtue is worthy (of imitation). Your children are 

digno de ser imilada hi jo 

more obedient than ours. My story is long, hers is 

obediente historia largo 

short. Mine and thine are the source of many con- 
corto origen mucho con* 

tendons. Our friends have as much credit as yours, 
iienda tienen credito 

Their reasons are bad, and I (will not admit) their 

razon malo no admit ire 

excuses. My opinion is conformable to yours. These 
disculpa — - — — cGii forme a Estos 

books are theirs. His wife and mine are there. Your 

muger est an alia 

reasons are good ; but theirs are very bad. (Let us hear) 

Oygamos 
your opinion: theirs has already been given. Our 

ha dejd si do dada 
carriages are at the door, and yours is in the street. 
cocke est an a puerta est It en ealle 



ETYMOLOGY, 55 

Your labours have been great. It seems that the 

trabajo han silo gr ancle parece que 
first men (lost sight of) the laws of nature : 
primer o perdierou de xista ley la naturalism 

hence sprang our errors, our crimes, our enemies, 
de aqui nacieron error crimen enemigo 

our wars. I have paid my expences : (let them pay) 

guerra he pagado gasto que paguen 

theirs. Their manners differ from ours. 

cosiumbre diferencian de 
(Look at) those trees.* This man and that woman 
Mir a arbor 

are guilty. These men and those women are innocent. 
culpa Lie innocente 

Virtue and vice are contrary : this causes the 
La virtue! y el vicio contrario causa 

misery of men ; that makes them happy. That is 
mi serin de I as hace jYliz 

admirable: that is fine. These things are very dear : 

hello cos a ca>'0 

those are not dear. This man is my brother: that 

her ma no 
woman is my sister. These virtues are precious : those 

kermana precioso 

are inestimable. 

Some one has inquired for me. No one lias been 
ha pre gun l ado por ha si do 

called. I have not seen any friend. All complain of 
ilamado No he visio amigo quejau 

his memory, but no one of his judgment. No one is 

memoria pero juicio 

free from calumny. He is a man whom no one pleases, 
libre calumnia a agrada 

and who pleases no one. The world is a stage in 

mundo teatro sobre 

which every one plays his part. One sows the 

represent a papel siembra 

* For that, nnd its plural those, the student may employ either 
eso or atfuel. — When this and that refer to two preceding nouns, this 
is rendered by este, and thai by aquel. 



56 ETYMOLOGY. 

seed, another gathers the fruit. Among authors there 

semilla coge fruto Entre autor 

are some who copy literally from one another, 

hai/ - coptan lit.eralme.7ite 

(Have you met with) your sister and cousin ? I 

Ha top ado vm con hermcina prima 

have met with neither. All love virtue. Interest, 

am an la El inter es 

which blinds some, enlightens others. No one deserves 

ciega a aclara a merece 

to be praised for his goodness if he has not strength 
& ser alahado por bondad si no iiene Jlierza 
to be wicked. JVkatsoever you undertake, you are 
de ser malo vm emprenda es 

sure of success. I have seen many fields, but none 
cierto de acertar he visto campo pero 

so fruitful as this. Many deceive themselves, 

Jertil se enganan a si mismos 

wishing to deceive others. The belligerent powers 
qneriendo enganar beligerante potencia 

are 7na?iy, and if any one of them should propose con- 
si propnsiere con- 

ditions, all will be lost. The enemy will demand 
dicion sera per dido enemigo pedird 

something as an equivalent, but, nothing (shall we grant) 

equiva lenie con cederem os 

to hirn, because whatever we might yield to him 

cedieramos 
(would not satisfy) his ambition. Whosoever (shall 

no content aria ambicion f&A 

persevere) unto the end, shall be saved. 
severare hasta Jin sera salvado. 



VERB. 

A verb signifies to be, to do, or to suffer. 

Spanish verbs are of four kinds, Active, Passive, 
Neuter, and Reflected. They may also be divided into 
liegular, Irregular, and Defective. 



ETYMOLOGY. 57 

A Verb Active expresses action, and necessarily re* 
quires an agent and an object acted upon, which 
object is in the accusative case ; as Amo la virtue!, I 
love virtue. 

To find whether the verb be active or neuter, ask the 
question whom or what with the verb, and if the answer 
makes good sense, that verb must be active: Amo, I 
love what ? la virtue!, virtue. 

A Verb Passive denotes the, receiving or the enduring 
of an action. It always consists of more than one word, 
and is followed by one of these propositions de or par : 
El hombre virtuoso es querido de todos ; the virtuous 
man is loved by all. 

The verb passive reverses the situation of the agent 
and the object when associated with the active : in 
other repects the affirmation is the same. El hombre 
virtuoso es querido de todos has the same meaning as 
Todos quieren al hombre virtuoso. 

A Verb Neuter expresses neither action nor the en- 
during of one. It has the same form as the active; 
but, unlike the latter, it does not require an object after 
it. Thus dormir, to sleep, is neuter, because it cannot 
be made to govern a following noun. 

In common language a verb may properly be termed 
active, which in a grammatical sense is neuter. Thus 
correr, to run. is active in the former sense, but not in 
the latter, because it does not admit after it a noun in 
the accusative. The clearest distinction, perhaps, 
which can be drawn between active and neuter verbs 
is this : the former do not of themselves make a com- 
plete sense : they must have some noun expressed or 
understood in which their influence terminates ; but 
the latter contain a perfect meaning within themselves, 
and are not necessarily connected with any other noun 
than the subject which produces them. 

A Verb Reflected is active, but its action is generally 
reflected back on the agent which produces it : El 
hombre se matd, the man slew himself It is also fre- 
quently used in a passive sense. 

Verbs are called Regular when they have the same 
radical letters, and the same terminations, as (hose 

d 5 



SS ETYMOLOGY. 

which will be given for a model. Those, on the con- 
trary, are Irregular which deviate, in conjugation, from 
the models alluded to. And those are Defective which 
want certain tenses or persons. 

Two verbs, haber, to have, and ser, to be, are also 
called Auxiliary, because they help to conjugate the 
others. 

To verbs belong Mood, Tense, Number, and 
Fehson. 

moods. 

Mood, or mode, is the manner in which the verb is 
employed. 

Spanish verbs have four moods, which are four dif- 
ferent manners of expressing being, doing, and suffer- 
ing. They are the Indicative, the Imperative, the 
Subjunctive, and the Infinitive. 

The Indicative either declares a thing absolutely, as, 
Yo amo 9 I love ; or it asks a question, as, Que quiere 
vm f What do you wish? 

The Imperative commands, exhorts, entreats, &c« 
Dame ese libra, Give me that book. 

The Subjunctive performs the offices of both the 
Potential and Subjunctive in English. In the former 
case it is generally dependent on another v erb fallowing ; 
in the latter, on a verb and conjunction preceding. 
The sentence, quisiera que vmie*e, exemplifies both 
parts of the subject; quisiera (Pot.) I could wish, que 
viniese (Sub.) that he might come.* 

The Infinitive expresses being, action, suffering, &c. 
in a general and an unlimited manner, without any dis- 
tinction of number and person $ as tenter, to fear. 

TENSES. 

Tense is the distinction of time. 
The three grand divisions of time are, Present, Past, 
and Future; but, for the sake of greater accuracy, six 

* The Subjunctive generally represents an action, &e. as depend- 
ing on same motive, wish, supposition, condition, &c. ; but when pre- 
ceded by certain exjunctions, it merely asserts or declares, like the 
-D&dicalive. See the Syntax fcf Conjunctions, 



ETYMOLOGY. 59 

tenses, or variations of time^ have been introduced into 
the conjugation of Spanish as well as of English verbs. 
Of these, three denote imperfect or unfinished action ; 
and three, that which is -perfect or finished. 

The three tenses which denote imperfect action, thai 
is, action begun, going on, and consequently not ended, 
are the Present, the Preterimperfect, and the Future- 
imperfect. The three which denote perfect action are, 
the Preterperfect, Preterpluperfect, and the Future- 
perfect. 

1. Tenses of the Indicative. 

The Present tense represents an action as now pass- 
ing, or a state as now existing; as, Yo escribo, I write, 
do write, or am writing • Yo soy, I am. 

Historians and poets, to give greater animation to 
their style, frequently relate past actions in this tense. 
General customs also, and truths which are ever the 
same, are commonly expressed in it. 

The Preterimperfect represents past unfinished ac- 
tion ; and it implies a reference to some other action or 
time co-existent with it : Yo escribia, I was writing— 
when ? caando mi hermano llego, when my brother 
arrived. 

This tense also denotes what was customary; the 
existence of good or bad qualities, &c. Yo iba a la 
comedia el ano ultimo dns veces cada semana ; last year 
I went to the play twice a week. Nero era un tirano ; 
Nero 9s&8 a tyrant. 

The Preterperfect has two forms, both which denote 
finished action. The former refers to something done 
at some time past, or at a time unconnected with the 
present: Yo vi al re?/, I saw the king. The latter, on 
the contrary, refers to something Lately done, or done 
at least at a time connected with the present : Yo he 
escrito, I have ivritten* 

The former division of this tense is that of historic 
narration, and some grammarians have termed it the 
historic preterit. It differs from the preterimperfect 
in more respect? than that of the action being finished 
or unfinished : Yo amaba, implies an extended^ yo ame, 
a limited portion of time. 



60 ETYMOLOGY. 

The latter division of this tense generally denotes 
that the action is of more recent occurrence than it 
would be if expressed in the former. He visto al rey 
implies therefore greater proximity to the present time 
than vi alreij-* But this is not always the case. The 
latter phrase may refer to an action which took place 
no longer since than yesterday: Ayer vi al rey ; and 
the former to one which took place fifty years ago. 
The distinction, however, which has been drawn is not 
even in this case destroyed. Vi al rey implies that no 
portion of the time in which the action passed, now 
remains unexpired ; but lie visto al rey, though it should 
refer to an event which happened many years ago, has 
still a relation to the present time. It may mean, I 
have seen the king some time in my life, and of that life 
some portion must necessarily remain. 

From the preceding observations then it follows, that 
when we use the first preterperfect, we relate an 
action which happened at a time completely past ; that 
when we use the second we relate one done at a time 
of which some portion still remains. 

The Preterpluperfect represents a past action as 
fully completed at or before the commencement of an- 
other past action, or the arrival of some past time : Yo 
habia cenado cuando entro, I had sapped when he en- 
tered. 

This tense admits two auxiliaries, habia and hube 9 
—the former the preterimperfect, the latter the preter- 
perfect of the auxiliary verb hater. The inquisitive 
student will naturally inquire whether there be any 
shade of difference between habia and huoewhen joined 
with the participle. The latter is seldom joined with 
one. It is sometimes used when the second action 
rapidly succeeds the one on which it depends : Cuando 
los hube a todos yido, no me 'admire de verlos juntos ; 
when I had heard them all, I was not surprised to see 
them together. It is always preceded by some adverb 

* " Dividese este tiempo(e! preleriio-perfecto) en preterito prcx* 
lino y remoto. Proximo cs el que dcnola mayor proximidad de Ja 
accion, que signifies ya pasada ; y remoto es el que la deno'ta menor, 
6 que ha mas tiempo que pas6 la. accion. Yo vi al rey denota que 
ha mas tiempo que ie vi que cuando se dice, Hevteiuulrey," — Gram* 
CasteL 



ETYMOLOGY. 61 

of time ; as cuando, despues que, iuego que, asi que, no 
bien, &c. In other cases habia is employed with the 
participle. 

The Future-imperfect is used when we mean to say 
that an action, or event, will hereafter he passing and 
consequently not ended ; as Querre siempre a Dios, 
I shall always love God. It is often used in conjunc- 
tion with another future action or time : Esteremos 
felices cuando vm llegue, we shall he happy when you 
arrive. 

This tense corresponds to the preterimperfect. Both 
denote progressive action, and hoth have the same 
relation, expressed or understood, to other actions, or 
periods of time. Cenabamos alas ocho ; we were supping 
at eight o'clock: Cenaremos a las ocho ; we shall be 
supping at eight o'clock. Cenabamos cuando vmllego ; 
we were supping when you arrived : Cenaremos cuando 
vm llegue ; we shall be supping when you arrive. 
Queriamos siempre a Dies; we always loved God: 
Querremos siempre & Dins ; we shall always love God. 

The Future-perfect intimates that the action or event 
will be fully accomplished at or before another future 
action or time: Habremos cenado cuando vm llegue / 
we shall have supped when you arrive. 

This tense bears a striking resemblance to the preter- 
pluperfeet : both denote the completion of action at or 
before a certain time, or the commencement of another 
action. Habiamos cenado a las ocho ; we had supped 
at eight. Habremos cenado a las ocho ; we shall have 
tupped at eight. Habiamos cenado cuando entr 6 $ we 
had supped when he entered. Habremos cenado cuando 
entra, we shall have supped when he enters. 

2. Imperative. 

Strictly speaking this mood has but one person sin- 
gular and plural. Every command, exhortation, en- 
treaty, &c. must be addressed to the second person, 
Grammarians, however, have admitted two persons in 
the singular, and three in the plural ; but the third per- 
son singular, and the first and third persons plural, are 
borrowed from the Present tense of the Subjunctive, 



62 ETYMOLOGY. 

Though the only tense assigned to the Imperative 
is that of the Present, yet it has often a relation to 
Future time: Ve ahora ; go now: Ve manana ; go 
to-morrow. 

The second person of this tense cannot be used with 
a verb preceded by a negative : the Present of the Sub- 
junctive is therefore used : No vayais ; do not go (ye 
may not go). 

3. Tenses of the Subjunctive. 

The Subjunctive has six tenses, but the time to which 
the first three refer can be ascertained only from the 
governing verb. Thus, when we use the Present tense, 
and say : Tiene vniy mal seiuhlaide ; iemo que este 
wialo ; esfe expresses present time; but in the sentence, 
Ha comido tanto que temo que este ma/o 9 the same verb 
evidently refers to the future. 

In the same manner the Preterimperfect of this 
mood represents contingent action as past, present, or 
future ; the Preterperfect contingent action which is 
alreidu pa>t, or which will he past at some specified 
future time, or at the commencement of some future 
action. But the Preterplupei feet and the two Future 
tenses preserve the same relation to time as they do in 
the Indicarive : the first always refers to time past ; the 
two last to time future. 

The names then which have been assigned to the 
Present, the Preterimperfect, and the Preterperfect of 
this mood, will be of little use towards ascertaining the 
time denoted by these tenses. That time must, as 
before observed, be determined from the governing 
verb. But if any one of these tenses be not preceded 
by a verb and a conjunction, it is in what English 
grammarians term the potential mood, and the time 
signified by it can be discovered only from the meaning 
of the sentence in which it is found. Where any 
doubt could exist as to the time implied in the verb, 
that verb is usually accompanied by an adverb of time ', 
which clearly determines the matter. I would go 
to-day: ina hoy. I would go to-morrcw : iria maniva* 
And here the student will perceive that the corres- 



ETYMOLOGY. 63 

ponding tenses in English are quite as indefinite as 
those in Spanish. Indeed the verbs of no language are 
80 complicated in their structure and use as our own. 

The two Future tenses of the Subjunctive represent 
contingent action as yet to take place, with the same 
relation to each other as the corresponding tenses of 
the Indicative ; that is, the Future imperfect represents 
the action as yet to happen either with or without re- 
pect to the precise time xsken ; and the Future-perfect, 
the completion of one action at or before the com- 
mencement of another. 

As the Future-imperfect represents a contingent 
action as going on at some future period, and as we 
have seen the Present often does the same, the latter 
may in many instances be used for the former. The same 
relation exists between the Preierperfect and the Future- 
perfect. But if the verb be preceded by the conjunc- 
tion m, neither the Present nor the Preterperfect can 
be substituted for the corresponding future. 

Of the Terminations ra, se, and ria. 

These terminations are found in the preterimperfect 
of the subjunctive, and in that tense compounded, the 
preterpluperfe-ct. The thorough comprehension and 
the proper application of these is beyond doubt the 
most difficult part of Spanish grammar: it is the 
stumbling block of foreigners, and not unfrequently 
of Spaniards themselves. And to an Englishman the 
difficulty is considerably increased by the complicated, 
and often indefinite nature of our corresponding auxi- 
liaries, — auxiliaries to which no English grammarian 
has ever yet done adequate justice, and which no 
foreignei ever yet understood. In whatever obscurity 
the subject of these subjunctive inflexions may appear 
enveloped to the student, he may be assured that they 
are much less obscure than the little words which he 
daily uses, and with the meaning of which he supposes 
himself to be well acquainted. When he considers this, 
he will not wonder that in the Spanish grammars 
hitherto published (nearly all of which have been com- 
posed by foreigners) a subject in itself of sufficient 



64 ETYMOLOGY. 

difficulty should he rendered still more so by the un- 
intelligible manner in which it has been treated. 

Of these terminations "se is more especially sub- 
junctive : it can never begin a sentence, and it is 
almost always governed by some preceding verb or 
conjunction. Kia is purely potential, and is never 
governed by any preceding word : it may therefore 
begin a sentence. It a is both subjunctive and potential, 
and is so extended in its application that it may often 
be substituted for either of the former. 

The English signs corresponding to these termina- 
tions are should, might, and would* But here the 
learner must be careful not to confound should when 
subjunctive or potential, with the same word signifying 
duty or obligation. You should go, meaning, you 
ought to go, is rendered by deber with the latter verb 
in the infinitive. And when would emphatically denotes 
inclination, it may be rendered by querer with an in- 
finitive. 

It must not be supposed that these terminations 
invariably require the corresponding signs in English. 
Verbs ending in ra or se, especially when they are 
preceded by the conjunction si, frequently admit no 
sign whatever when translated into our language. The 
following observations will explain the relation existing 
between these signs and those terminations ; and will 
enable the student both how and when to employ 
both. 

The two first terminations ra and se, each of which 
admits the auxiliaries should and might, are employed 
whenever the verb is preceded by any governing con- 
junction ; sino, si, antique, hieic que, dado que, &c. or 
by an interjection expressing desire.f Si yo amdra, 
(6 amuse) las riqueras ; if I loved riches. Oxald fuera 
(dfeese) cierto I would to heaven it were certain! . After 

* Sometimes also, but very seldom, could seems to be implied in 
the verb : Antes que otro respondiese ; before any other could reply. 

f " Cuandu la oracion del tieiiipo imperfecta de suhjunctivu em- 
picza por aUunaconjimcion condicional, si,siuo, aunque.bien que, dado 
que, etc. 6 por interjection quesigniiuiue aeseo, se puede usar de la 
primera 6 tcrcera tenuinacioii," (ra 6 se.)-- -Gram. Casts 



ETYMOLOGY. 65 

si and aunque, however, the termination ra is much 
more frequent than se; but after the other conjunctions 
tiE is more usual than ra, as will soon be shown. 

On the other hand ria, and ra when exercising the 
potential power of ria, are used when the verb is not 
governed by any preceding conjunction,* when the 
•auxiliary would, and sometimes should, is required : 
Leeria (6 leer a) todo el din si— I would read all the day 
if — Bueno Juera (6 seria) si — it vooidd be well if — El 
numero de los pobres no serian (pfueran) tan grande si— 
the number of poor would not he so great if— No me 
tuviera yo por Jamoso caballero si— I should not consider 
myself a famous cavalier if-— Ria generally requires 
would, and ra, should ; but should is used in the first 
person only of both numbers. Should in the second 
and third persons is not a sign corresponding to the 
Spanish subjunctive, unless it be preceded by some 
governing word : in these persons it implies duty or 
obligation, and must, as before observed, be rendered 
by deber. 

These subjunctive inflexions will be rendered clearer 
perhaps to the learner when he considers that many 
conditional propositions in English consist of two 
members, of which one is subjunctive, the other poten- 
tial ; the former when translated into Spanish requires 
the termination ra or se ; the latter in most instances 
BIA. Si fuer a diligente, seria reconrpensado ; if he 
were diligent, he would be rewarded. Here si fvera is 
the subjunctive, and seria the potential, in English, 
The order in which the sentence stands may be in- 
verted, but the distinction between the members will 
be the same ; and when the sentence consists of several 
members, the same relation is naintained between them. 
Seria recompensado, y todos le estimarian, si estudiera 
con mas attencion, y fuese mas amante de la verdad ; 
he would be rewarded, and all would esteem him, if he 
studied with more attention, and if he were a greater 
lover of truth. 

* U Cuando la oracion del tiempo iraperfecto de qne hablamos 
erapieza sin conjancion condicional, puede usarse de la primera 6 
segunda terminacion/' (ra 6 ria).— Ibid. 






66 ETYMOLOGY. 

But when the sentence does not admit this distinc- 
tion of moods, the subjunctive is still governed by some 
preceding verb or conjunction. When the governing 
verb signifies to wish, to command, to fear, &c. the 
termination se is more usual than ka : El rey mando 
que viniese ; the king commanded that he should come. 
When it happens, as in this, and in many other 
examples, that the governed verb is necessarily depend- 
ent on the one preceding, and is expressed in Eng- 
lish by the infinitive, se is generally used: El rey 
mando que viniese ; the king commanded him to come* 
Benalcio hacienda que Danteo cantase ; Benalcio engag- 
ing Danteo to sing (that Danteo should sing), Dijo 
que callasen ; he told them to he silent. Mi madre 
queria que le escribiese ; my mother wished me to write 
to her. 

W 7 hen the governing verb is decir, or any other of 
similar import, either se or kia may be used, but not 
in the same sense. El rey dijo que el embajador 
viniese, means that the ambassador had the king's per- 
mission, or even command, to come ; but el rey dijo que 
el embajador vendria (the king said that the ambassa- 
dor would come) is merely an assurance on the part of 
the former, implying at the same time inclination on 
the part of the latter. 

Se is oftener used than ka after cnando, antes que, 
donde, cuanto, el que, &c. when contingency is implied. 
Antes que el duque respondiese ; before the duke could 
answer. Querria que la Jbrtuna me qfrcciese presto 
alguna ocasion donde me hiciese emperador ; I wish for- 
tune might soon offer me an opportunity in which 
/ should be made an emperor. Le dije que tomase en 
mi huerta todo lo que (o quanta) quisie.se ; I told him to 
take in my garden all that he might xvish. Haria lo que 
quuiese ; I would do whatever 1 might wish. 

Ea is elegantly employed after interrogative pro- 
nouns, or other words denoting exclamation, surprise, 
&c. $ Quien lo crryera ? g quien lo imaginera ? who 
tvould believe it ? who would imagine it ? / Dichoso yo si 
el exceso de mi dolor me hithiera quitado la vida ! happy 
I if the excess of my grief had taken away my life! 



ETYMOLOGY. 67 

Of these terminations then ha, as the student must 
have observed, is the most extensively applicable. As 
we have before said, it may often be substituted for 
either of the others :* Si yo amnra (6 amase) las 
riqueras, procurara (6 procurctria) adquirarlas z if I 
loved riches, I should, or would endeavour to acquire 
them. But in cases where inclination is absolutely 
expressed, ra cannot be substituted for ria. 'i hus if 
in the sense of whether admits the latter only ; and 
when the verb by which the subjunctive is governed 
promises, assures, &c. the same termination is the only 
one that can be admitted. I asked him if (whether) 
his father would come : le preguntS si su padre veudria. 
He promised me that he would come : me promeiio que 
vendria. I assured thee that he ivould go out : te asse- 
gure que saldria.f 

But though se may be used for ra in many 
cases cf subjunctive construction, let the student 
bear in mind, that it can never be used for ria. We 
may properly say : si leyeras, 6 leyeses, buenos Ubros, 
(after si, as before observed, the former termination is 
more usual) serias, 6 fueras mas instruido ; but we can 
never say, si leerias buenos libros,Jlieses mas instruido* 

4p Tenses qf the Infinitive. 

The Present tense of this mood has also a relation to 
future and to past time ; that is, it represents an action 
as present now, or present at a certain rime past, or at 
a certain time to come. That time is to be ascertained 
from the governing verb : Le veo correr, I see him run ; 
le oi cantor, I heard him sing; le vere baylar, I shall 
see him dance. 

* n La primera terminacion ra se acnmoda facilmente a servir por 
alguna de las otras dus, ria y sf. Pues lo mismo es decir : El 
tiempo pudiera ser mejor, que, El tiempo pod ria ssr m^jor : y con igual 
propriedad se dice : yo hict que viniese, 6 yo hict que viniera." (But 
here the student will please to observe that viniese is mr.re usual than 
viniern.) " Pero las teriuinaciones srguuda y tercera (ria y sf.) son 
entre si tan opuestas, que no puede la una suhstitnir a la otra ; y asi 
en lugar de : yo querria ir a Sevilla, no se puede deeir : yo quisiese 
ir a Sevilla. "—Gram. Custel. 

t Though ra may be substituted for p.ia when equivalent to the 
English potential, yet the latter termination is more frequently 
used. 



6$ ETYMOLOGY. 

The Perfect, on the contrary, represents an action as 
past in relation to the verb which governs it, whether 
that governing verb denote present, past, or future 
time. Creo haberle visto, I believe I have seen him ; 
Creia haberle vkto, I believed I had seen him ; si me 
acordare haberle visto, if I should (hereafter) remem- 
ber to have seen him. 

The Present participle denotes time present in re- 
ference to the verb which accompanies it, or on which 
it is dependent. When joined to any tense of the verb 
est dry it renders the action, &c. more emphatic, and in 
this respect it exactly corresponds to our participle 
associated with the verb to be. Estd escribiendo, he is 
writing ; est aba escribiendo, he teas writing. 

The Perfect participle denotes finished action in 
relation to present,, past, or future time, according to 
the time implied in the verb with which it is associated : 
Habia escriio, I had written ; He escrito, I have written ; 
habre esc?'ito, I shall have written. La carta habia sido 
escrita, ha sido escrita, or habrd sido escrita ; the letter 
had been written, has been written, or will have been 
written.* 

The Compound Perfect participle denotes action 
finished at the time of another action present, past, or 
future: Habiendo escrito la carta, jmrtio ; having 
written the letter, he departed. 

NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 

Verbs, like nouns, have two Numbers, the singular 
and the plural. 

The verb is singular when it has but one individual 
person or thing for its nominative ; as yo, tu 9 el, &c. It 
is plural when its nominative consists of more than one 
person or thing; as nosoiros, vosotros, ellos, &c. 

Each number has three Persons : 

Sing. 1 . vo arao, / love. 

2. tu a mas, thou lovest. 

3. el am a, he loves. 

* See the Participle, and the observations immediately following. 



ETYMOLOGY. 69 

Plur. 1. nosotros atnamps, we love. 

2. vosotros amais, you love. 

3. ellos anian, they love. 

Conjugation is the change of a verb throughout Its 
Moods, Tenses, Numbers, and Persons. 

Conjugation of the auxiliary haber to have* 
Indicative Mood. 
Present Tense. 
Sing, yo he, I have. 

tii has, thou hast.. 
el ha, he has. 
Plur. nosotros nemos, we have. 
vosotros habeis, you have. 
ellos han, they have. 

Preterimperfect. 

Sing, yo habia, I had. 

tii habias, thou hadst. 

el habia, he had. 
Plur. nosotros habiamos, tve had. 

vosotros habiais, you had. 

ellos habian, they had. 

Preterperfect. 
Sing, yo hiibe, I had. 

tu hubiste, thou hadst, 

el hiibo, he had. 
Plur. nosotros hubimos, we had. 

vosotros hubisteis, you had. 

ellos hubieron, they had. 

Future imperfect, 

Sing, yo habre, I shall or will have. 

tii habras, thou shalt or wilt have. 

el habra, he shall or will have. 
Plur. nosotros habremos, we shall or will have* 

vosotros habreis, you shall or will have. 

ellos habran, they shall or will have. 

* In conjugating the following verbs the accent has been placed 
over every syllable on which a stress of the voice is required* This 
has been done to assist the learner in pronouncing them. 



70 ETYMOLOGY. 

Subjunctive Mood.* 

Present Tense. 

que, that, 
Sing, yo haya, / may have. 

tii hay as, thou mayst have. 

el haya, he may have. 
Plur. nosotros hayamos, we may have. 

vo.oa'os hayais, you may have. 

ellos hayan, they may have. 

First Preterimperfect. 

que, that 
Sing. ( hub! era, ^ 

yo-* or > I should or might have. 
(hubiese, J 
i hubieras,^) 
tu< or \thou shouldst or mighist have. 



{h ub i eras, ^| 
or > 
hubieses, J 
r hubiera, 1 
elJ or v 
L hubiese, j 



he should or misfit have. 



Plur. r hubieramos," 
nosocros< or >ive should or might have. 



I hub 



lesemos 



>we sh 



r hubierais, ^ 

vosotros^ or \you should or might have. 
I hubieseis, J 



< hubieran, \ 
ellos 1 or >th 
Lhubiesen, f 



ey should or might have. 



Second Preterimperfect* 

Sing, yo habria, / would or should have. 
tii habrias, thou xvouldst have. 
el habria, he would have. 

*The auxiliaries in English corresponding to the Spanish subjunc- 
tives are generally expressed, but they are frequently omitted : Que 
yo haya, ttn*t I have, a? well as, that I may have: Que yo kukiere or 
habits?, that. I had, as well as, that I should or might have. The posi- 
tive or contingent sense of the sentence will be the on)^' guide wrhicit 
the learner can follow in translating. 



ETYMOLOGY. 71 

Plur. nosotros habriamos, we would or should have. 
vosdtros habriais, you would have. 
elJos habrian, they would have. 

Future-imperfect. 

si, if 
Sing, yo hubiere, I should have. 

tu hubieres, thou shouldst have. 

el hubiere, he should have. 
Plur. nosotros lmbieremos, we should have. 

vosdtros hubiereis, you should have. 

ell os hubieren, they should have* 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present Tense. 
Haber, to have. 

Participle. 

Present. 
Habi en do, having. 



Conjugation of the verb tener, to have, or to possess. 
Indicative Mood. 

1. Present Tense. 

Sing, ten go, I have. 

tienes, thou hast. 

liene, he has. 
Plur. tenemos, we have. 

teneis, you have. 

tienen, they have. 

2. Preterimperfecl. 

Sing, tenia, I had. 

tenias, thou hadst. 

tenia, he had. 
Plur. teniamos, we had. 

teniais, you had. 

tenian, they had. 



n 



ETYMOLOGY. 



3. First Preterpcrfect. 

Sing, tuve, I had. 

tuviste, thou kadst. 

tiivo, he had. 
Plur. tuvimos, xve had. 

tuvisteis, you had. 

tuvieron, they had. 

4. Second Preterperfect. 

Sing, he tenido, I have had. 

has tenido, thou hast had. 

ha tenido, he has had. 
Plur. hem os tenido, we have had. 

habeis tenido, you have had. 

han tenido, they have had. 

5. Preterpluperfect, 

Si?2g. hiibe, or habia, tenido, / had had. 

hubiste, or habias, tenido, thou hadst had. 

hiibo, or hab-ia, tenido, he had had. 
Plur. hubimos, or habiamos, tenido, we had had. 

hubisteis, or habiais, tenido, you had had. 

hubieron, or habian, tenido, they had had. 

6. Future-imperfect. 

Sing* tend re, I shall or will have. 

tendras, thou shalt or wilt have. 

tendra, he shall or will have. 
Plur. tendremos, we shall or will have. 

tendreis, you shall or will have. 

tend ran, they shall or wilt have. 

7. Future-perfect. 

Sing, hat re tenido, / shall have had. 

habras tenido, thou wilt have had. 

liabra tenido, he will have had. 
Plur. habremos tenido, we shall have had. 

fiabreis tenido, you will have had. 

habran tenido, they will have had. 



ETYMOLOGY. 73 

8. Imperative Mood, 

Sing, ten, have thou. 

tenga, let him nave. 
Plur. tengamos, let us have. 

tened, have you. 

tengan, let them have. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

9. , Present Tense. 

que, that, 
Sing, tenga, I may have. 

tengas, ihou mayst have. 

tenga, he may have. 
Plur. tengamos, yoe may have. 

tengais, you may have. 

tengan, they may have. 

10. First Preterimperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, tuviera,^ 

or > I should or might have. 
tuviese, j 
tuvieras,! 

or > thou shouldst or might st have. 
tuvieses, j 
tuviera, \ 

or > he should or might have- 
tuviese, J 
Plur. tuvieramos,^ 

or > tee should or might have. 

tuviesemos, J 
tuvierais," 1 ! 

or > you should or might have. 
tuvieseis, J 
tuvieran,^ 

or > they should or might have. 
tuviesen, J 

11. Second Preterimperfect. 

Si?ig. tendria, I would or should have. 
tendrias, ihou tvouldst have. 
tendria, he vcould have. 

E 



V* ETYMOLOGY. 

Plur. tendriamos, we would or should have. 
tendriais, you would have. 
tendrian, they would have. 

12. Preterperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, haya tenido, I may have had. 

hayas tenido, thou mayst have had. 

haya tenido, he may have had. 
Plur. hayamos tenido, we may have had. 

hayais tenido, you may have had. 

hayan tenido, they may have had. 

IS. First Preterpluperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, hubiera,"^ 

or > tenido, I should or might have had. 
hubiese, J 
hubieras,"| 

or > tenido, thou shouldst or mightst have 
hubieses,J had. 

hubiera, ") 

or > tenido, he should or might have had. 
hubiese, J 
Plur. hubieramos, 1 

or > tenido, we should or might have 

huhiesemos, ) had. 

hubierais,^ 

or > tenido, you should or might have had. 
hubieseis, J 
hubieran, 1 

or > tenido, they should or might have had. 
. hubiesen, J 



14. Second Preterpluperfect. 

Sing* habria tenido, / would or should have had. 

habrias tenido, thou xvoiddst have had. 

habria tenido, he woidd have had, 
Plur. habriamos tenido, we would or should have had* 

hal>riais tenido, you would have had. 

habrian tenido, they would have had. 



ETYMOLOGY. 75 

15. Future Imperfect. 

si, jf, 
Sing, tuviere, I should have. 

tuvieres, thou shouldst have. 

tuviere, he should have. 
Plur. tuvieremos, we should have. 

tuviereis, you should have. 

tuvieren, they should have. 

16. Future Perfect. 

Sing, hubiere tenido, I should have had. 

hubiereis tenido, thou shouldst have had. 

hubiere tenido, he should have had. 
Plur. hubieremos tenido, we should have had. 

hubiereis tenido, you should have had. 

hubieren tenido, they should have had. 

17. Infinitive Mood. 

Present Tense. 
Tener, to have. 

Perfect. 
Haber tenido, to have had. 

participles. 

Present. 
Teniendo, having. 

Perfect, 

Tenido, had. 

Compound Perfect. 

Habiendo tenido, having had. 

Both haber and tener signify to have, but in different 
senses. The former is auxiliary, and is joined with the 
participles of verbs to form their compound tenses : the 
latter is active, and a principal verb signifying to have 
or to possess. 

e2 



76 ETYMOLOGY. 

Formerly, however, haber was often used as an active, 
and tener as an auxiliary verb. Tenemos escrito ; tene- 
mos ya dsterminado are found in very good writers. But 
this mode of construction is not to be imitated. 



Conjugation of the Verbs ser and estar. 
Indicative Mood. 

1. Present Tense. 

Sing. soy,orestoy, lam. 

eres, or estas, thou art. 

es, or est a, he is. 
Plur. sdmos, or estamos, we are. 

sois, or estais, you are. 

son, or estan, they are. 

2. Preterimperfect. 

Sing, era, or estaba, I was. 

eras, or estabas, thou wast. 

era, or estaba, he was. 
Plur. eramos, or estabamos, we were. 

erais, or estabais, you were. 

eran, or estaban, they were. 

3. First Preterperfect. 

Sing, ful, or estuve, / was. 

fuiste, or estuviste, thou wast. 

fue, or estuvo, he was. 
Plur. fuimos, or estuvimos, we were. 

fuisteis, or estuvisteis, you were. 

fueron, or estuvieron, they were. 

4. Second Preterperfect. 

Sing, he sido, or estado, I have been. 

has sido, or estado, thou hast been. 

ha sido, or estado, he has been. 
Plur. hemos sido, or estado, we have been. 

habeis sido, or estado, you have been. 

han sido, or estado, they have been. 



ETYMOLOGY. 77 

5. Preterpluperfect. 



ie, 1 

r >sido, 
)ia,J 

iste,^ 

r >sido. 

ias, J 

>sido, 

1, J 

Mmos, ""J 
or >sido, 

biamos,J 

eis,^| 

ysido, 

s, J 



Sing, hube, 

or J» sido, or estado, I had been. 
habia, _ 
hubiste, 

or ^sido. or estado, thou hadst been. 
habias, 
hubo, 

or ^sido, or estado, he had been. 
habia, 
Plur. hubimos, 

or estado, we had been. 
habiaraos, 
hubisteis,' 

or )*sido, or estado, you had been. 
habiais, 
hubieron,! 

or > sido, or estado, they had been. 
habian, J 

6. Future Imperfect. 

Sing, sere, or estare, I shall or will be. 

seras, or estaras, thou shalt or wilt be* 

sera, or estara, he shall or will be. 
Plur. seremos, or estaremos, we shall or will be* 

sereis, or estareis, you shall or will be. 

seran, of estaran, they shall or will be. 

7. Future Perfect. 

Sing, habre sido, or estado, / shall have been. 

habras sido, or estado, thou wilt have been. 

habra sido, or estado, he will have been. 
Plur. habremos sido, or estado, we shall have been. 

habreis sido, or estado, you will have been. 

habran sido, or estado, they will have been. 

8. Imperative Mood. 

Sing* se, or esta, be thou. 

sea, or este, let him be. 



78 ETYMOLOGY. 

Plur. seamos, or estemos, let us be. 
sed, or estad, be you. 
sean, or esten, let them be. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

9. Present Tense. 

que, that, 
Sing* sea, or este, I may be. 

seas, or estes, thou mayst be. 

sea, or este, he may be. 
Plur. seamos, or estemos, tve may be. 

seais, or esteis, you may be. 

sean, or esten, they may be. 

10. First Preterimperfect. 

que, that, 

Sing, fuera, estuviera,"* 

or or > I should or might be. % 

fuese, estuviese, J 

fueras, estuvieras, 1 

or or > thou shouldst or might st be. 

fueses, estuvieses, J 

fuera, estuviera, "j 

or or >he should or might be. 

fuese, estuviese, J 

Plur. fueramos, estuvieremos,^ 

or or >ive should or might be. 

fuesemos, estuviesemos, J 

fuerais, estuvierais, ^1 

or or \you shoidd or might be. 

fueseis, estuvieseis, J 

fueran, estuvieran, ^ 

or or (they should or might be. 

fuesen, estuviesen,J 



Also, that I ivere, and sometimes, like the indicative, that I was. 
See the Syntax of Conjunctions, 



ETYMOLOGY. 79 



11. Second Preterimperfect. 

Sing, seria, or estaria, / would or should be. 

serias, or estarias, thou wouldst be. 

seria, or estaria, he would be. 
Plur. seriamos, or estariamos, we would or should be. 

seriais, or estariais, you Would be. 

serian, or estarian, they would be. 

12. Preterperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, haya sido, or estado, I may have been. 

hayas sido, or estado, thou mayst have been. 

haya sido, or estado, he may have been. 
Plur. hayamos sido, or estado, we may have been. 

hayais sido, or estado, you may have been. 

hayan sido, or estado, they may have been. 

13. First Preterpluperfect. 



que, that, 
Sing, hubiera,'! 

or >sido, or estado, I should or might have 
hubiese,J been. 

hubieras, \ 

or Vsido, or estado, thou shouldst or mightst 
habieses, J have been. 

hubiera, \ 

or Vsido, or estado, he should or might 
hubiese, ) have been. 

Plur. hubieramos, ' 

or Vsido, or estado, we should or might 

hubiesemos, } have been. 

hubierais, 



ds, ) 

Vsido, 

3S.J 

Lerais, I 

or Vsido, or estado, you shoul 

ieseis, J have be 



or Vsido, or estado, you should or might 

hubieselsjj have been, 
hubieran,^ 

or >sido. or estado, they should or might 

hubiesen, J have been. 



30 ETYMOLOGY. 

14. Second Preterpluperfect. 

Sing, habria sido, or estado, / would or should have been. 

habrias sido, or estado, thou wouldst have been. 

habria sido, or estado, he would have been. 
Plur. habriamos sido, or estado, we woidd or should 

have been, 

habriais sido, or estado, you would have been. 

habrian sido, or estado. they would have been. 

15. Future Imperfect. 

Sing, fuere, or estuviere, / should be. 

fueres, or estuvieres, thou shouldst be. 

fuere, or estuviere, he should be. 
Plur. fueremos, or estuvieremos, we should be. 

fuereis, or estuviereis, you should be. 

fueren, or estuvieren, they should be. 

16. Future Perfect. 

si, if, 

Sing, hubiere sido, or estado, I should have been. 

hubieres sido, or estado, thou shouldst have been. 

hubiere sido, or estado, he should have been. 
Plur. hubieremos sido, or estado, we should have been. 

hubiereis sido, or estado, you should have been. 

hubieren sido, or estado, they should have been. 

17. Infinitive Mood. 

Present Tense. 
Ser, or estar, to be. 

Perfect. 
Haber sido, or estado, to have been. 

Participles. 

Present. 
Siendo, or estando, being. 



ETYMOLOGY. 81 

Perfect. 
Sido, or estado, been* 

Compound Perfect. 
Habiendo sido, or estado, hating been. 



Observations on the Verbs ser and estar. 

The verb to be is by no means to be translated into 
Spanish by ser and estar indifferently. The signifi- 
cation of these two verbs is often widely different. 

The most general observation that can be made to 
assist the students in their application is this : ser de- 
notes whatever is permanent, estar whatever is tern* 
porary in duration. 

Hence ser is employed when we speak of general 
and everlasting truths, and of the qualities of the mind ; 
estar when we speak of emotions, or of transitory 
states of feeling. Somos mortales, we are mortal : sois 
prudentes, you are prudent. Estas triste, thou art 
sad : esta' alegre, he is merry. 

The natural qualities of the body, its permanent 
beauties or defects, are expressed by ser ; its physical 
or accidental changes by estar. El hombre es alto ; 
the man is tall : la muger es hermosa, the woman is 
beautiful. El niiio esta' frio, the child is cold : Estu- 
vimos cojos la semana pasada, we were lame last week. 

The natural qualities of substances are expressed by 
ser; the chemical and mechanical changes of sub- 
stances by estar. El yelo es frio, ice is cold. El 
plomo esta" derretido, the lead is melted. 

Ser is used in speaking of the employments, dig- 
nities, and professions of men ; of the materials of which 
bodies are composed ; of the possession and destination 
of things, &e. Ser rey, general^ juez, zapatero, to be 
a king, general, judge, shoemaker: El vestido es de 
patio, the suit is of cloth : La corona es del rey, the 
crown is the king's. 

e5 



32 ETYMOLOGY. 

Ser is employed in the conjugation of passive verbs : 
Es querido, he is loved : Eramos instruidos, we were 
instructed. 

In general propositions ser connects the two terms, 
the major and the minor ; El temor de Dios es el prin- 
cipio de la sabiduria ; the fear of God is the beginning 
of* wisdom : Todo cuerpo es divisible, all matter is di- 
visible, 

Estar is used to express locality ; Esta' en casa, he 
is in the house : Estoy en Florencia, I am in Florence. 

Estar before adverbial phrases, &c. denotes tran- 
sitory modes of action, states of fashion, &c. Esta' de 
priesa, he is in haste : Esta' de modo 9 he is in the 
fashion. 
'' Lastly estar and not ser is employed in conjunc- 
tion with the present participles of verbs: Estoy 
escribiendo, I am writing. 

But in some instances ser and estar may be in- 
differently used. We may say with equal propriety; 
ser, 6 estar del mismo parecer ; to be of the same 
opinion : ser Corregidor, 6 estar de Corregidor en 
Madrid; to be Corregidor of Madrid.* But even in 
these instances estar could not properly be used if 
that opinion and this office were necessarily of long con- 
tinuance. Opinions are often transient, and Corre- 
gidors often changed. 

Some adjectives vary their meaning according as they 
are joined to ser or estar. Ser bueno is understood 
of the natural disposition, and signifies to be good ; 
estar bueno, to be in good health : ser malo, to be 
wicked ; estar malo, to be in bad health ; ser vivo, to 
be lively ; estar vivo, to be alive. 

Exercise on the Verbs haeer, tener, ser, and estar. 

.1. I have a book. Thou hast books. He has 
libro 

eloquence. We have friends. You have enemies. 

eloquencia. amigo enemigo. 

* In the second example the verb estar must be followed by de : 
estar Corregidor, estar Alcalde, &c. are not Spanish. 



ETYMOLOGY. 83 

They have pens. Death is inevitable. He is taller 

plutna La muerte — alto 

than I. Customs are not the same in all coun- 

Las costumbres mismo en tocfo re- 

tries. A poor singer is not a bishop. He is now in 
gion pobre cantor obispo ekora en 

France. The Turks are idle, but the English are 

Francia Turco holgazan pero Ingles 

industrious. She is the wife of an officer who is now 
industrioso " muger oficial 

with the army. When madmen are not raving, they 
con ejerciio Cnando los loco furioso 

are not objects of fear. 

objeto el temor 

2. I had money. Thou hast riches. The man had 

dinero riquezas 
fortitude. We had books. You had watches. They 

fortaleza relox 

had swords. He tjoas the most graceful of all men. I 

espadin ayroso 

tvas then sorrowful. He was always in good 

entonces triste siempre de bueno 

humour. The Lyceum at Athens tvas the public 

humor Liceo en Atenas publico 
school. We ivere the most numerous of those 

escuela numeroso los 
assembled in the place. 
juntados en lugar 

3. Thou wast greatly pleased with the poem. We 

macho contento de poema^ 

had fine weather yesterdav. Your cousin had a rich 
bueno tiempo aijer primo rico 

present. My mother had (considerable uneasiness) 
present e pesadumbre 

last week : she tvas very sorrowful : we had pity 
la semana pasada triste lastima 

on her, I tvas there last week. 
de alia 



84? ETYMOLOGY. 

4. I have seen the book. Thou hast suffered. He 

visto sufrido 

has loved. We have written. You have lived. They 

amado escrito vivido 

have heard. I have had considerable uneasiness. I 

oido 
have been very ill. Thou hast had three masters, and 

tres maestro 
hast been well instructed. They have had much money, 
bien instruido mucko diner o 

and they have been very lavish. My neighbour has 

prodigo vecino 

been very ill. Admiral Nelson and the brave Sidney 

El almirante y bravo 

Smith have been very active, and constantly victo* 
activo constantemente victo- 

rious in the last war. 
rioso en ultimo guerra 

5. I had had the reward of diligence, and thy 

premio de diligencia, y 
brother had received that of memory. The tutor had 
hermano recibido el memoria ayo 

observed the progress of the pupil. They had chastised 
vbservado progreso pnpilo castigado 

the boy. The judge had pronounced the sentence. 
d mozo juez pronunciado sentencia 

My master had been satisfied with me. I had been very 

contento 
diligent and attentive. Your brothers and sisters 
diligente atento hermano hermana 

had been studious : they had had many praises. We 

estudioso mucho elogio 

had been rash. They had been timid. We had had 

temerario timido 

good motives. 
motivo 

6. To-morrow I shall be busy. We shall always 
Mariana occupado siempre 



ETYMOLOGY. 85 

be diligent. You will have friends. He will be punctual. 

dilige?itcs amigo puntual 

The English will always he good sailors. The French 
Ingles mariner o Frances 

MoiU never perhaps he so powerful as we. He will always 

jamas quiza poderoso 

be idle, but she mil always be industrious. We shall 

holgazan industrioso 

always have the poor. The soldiers will have great 

pobre. soldado grande 

booty. He will be there at one o'clock. 
lot in, alia a la una 

7. I shall have had friends. Thou unit have been happy, 

feliz 
He will have had the letters. The enemies will not have 

carta enemigo 

been victorious. He will have been loved. The 

victorioso am ado 

sailors will have been conquered. We shall have had 
marinero vencido 

many misfortunes. Their lives will have been long and 

desdicha vida largo 

useful. The war will have been bloody. 
util guerra sangrienio 

8. Have patience, my friend. Be always courteous, 

paciencia amigo Cortes 

my son. Hate the reward, my brethren. Let us be 

hijo premio hermano 

ready at eight o'clock. Let us always be ready. Let 
front os a las ocho siempre 

us have courage. Let him be merciful. Let him have 

cor age misericordioso 

the things. Let him be there at the time. Be always 

cos a a tiempo 

generous, my sisters. Be civil, my daughters, when 

hermana civil hija cuando 

you arrive at the house. Let them have patience. Let 

llegais a casa 

them be more prudent. 

prudenie 



86 ETYMOLOGY. 

9. That I may have riches. That he may be generous. 
Que generoso 

That we may not he ambitious. Although we may not 

ambicioso Aunque 
be avaricious. That he may have servants. That our 

avaro criado 

enemies may have no partisans, and that we may be 
enemigo no partidario 

victorious. Although our troops have excellent officers. 
victorioso tropa excellent e qficial 

That we may all be friends of our king, and of our 

amigo rey 

country. That we may be cheerful to-morrow. Provided 
patria alegre manana Contalque 

the English be faithful to the laws. 
Ingles jiel ley. 

10. That I might be always generous. That thou 
mightest have friends. That he should be there at the 

alia d 
hour. Although the count were lavish. That their 
Jiora conde prodigo 

children might be virtuous. That we should have 
nino mrtuoso 

money. Although they voere dissolute. That we shoidd 
dinero dissoluto 

lem. London to-morrow. That the women should be 

en Londres manana muger 

charitable. That the kingdom should not be in danger. 
caritativo reyno no en peligro 

If I should have the book. If we should be there at 
Si libro d 

four o'clock. If we should have riches. If they should 
las cuatro riquezas 

be seen. That the traitors might be arrested. That the 

vistos traidor arrest ados 

thing might be observed. 
cosa observada 

11. I should have friends, If I were (10) virtuous. 

amigo virtuoso 



ETYMOLOGY. 87 

Thou wouldst be great if . We should have lost 

grande per dido 

the battle if the general (had not been) prudent. 

batalla no hubiera est ado prudente 

If we had (10) ten thousand men, not one soldier of the 

sold ado 
enemy woidd be alive to-morrow. You would have 
enemigo manana 

more scholars if you were (10) more instructed. Their 

discipulo instruido 

father would be more happy, if he were (10) less 
padre Jeliz 

avaricious. The man would be more happy, if he 
avaro 
were (10) less ambitious. You would not be sick, if you 

ambieioso malo 

were (10) more prudent. Who would have believed 

creido 
that the war would have continued ten years ? Your 

guerra durado 

children would not be so ignorant, if they were (10) more 
nino ignorante 

studious. They woidd be more active if they were (10) 
studioso activo 

younger. 
joven 

12. Though I may have had. Your sister is very 
Aunque 
cheerful, though she has been so long ill. The 
alegre tanto tiempo malo 

number of the wise and the good is little, though 

sabio virtuoso reducido 

they have always been esteemed. Though we have had 

siempre estimados 
so much money, we are poor. Though they have had 

dinero pobre 

so many books, they are ignorant. Though you have 

libro 
been long ignorant, you will not be diligent. 

diligente 



88 ETYMOLOGY. 

12. If the sun had not been so scorching. If they 
sol ardiente 

had been more religious. If we had had more wisdom. 
religioso sabiduria 

If we had been more artful. Though they had had 

artificioso 
so many friends. Though the bishop had always been 

obispo 
loyal. 
leal. 



14. The works of Voltaire would have been more 

obra 

admired, if they had (10) contained a philosophy 
admiradas contenido filosojia 

more enlightened and religious. The works of Rousseau 

sabio ■ 

Would have been less dangerous, and they would not 

peligroso 
have caused so much mischief, if they had been (13) 

causado mal 

more moral. If your husband were (10) less violent 
moral marido violento 

and jealous, you would be (11) more happy ; and if he 

zeloso 
had always been (13) virtuous, he would have been 
esteemed by all. The effects of the revolution would 
estimado de efecto revolucion 

not have been so great in France, if the depravity of 
grande en Francia depravacion de 

manners had not been (13) so shameful, if li- 

las costumbres vergonzoso la li- 

centiousness had been (13) less favoured, and if 
cencia favorecido 

irreligion had been (13) less general. Who would 

ever have believed that a man so cruel as Robespierre 

jamas creido que ■ * ■ ■ 

could have existed ? 
exist ido 



ETYMOLOGY. 89 

15. If I should have money. If thou shoiddst have 
patience. He will be rewarded, if he shoidd have 
paciencia recompensado 

merit. If England should be conquered. If the 
merito la Inglaterra conquistada 

enemy should have the imprudence. If we should have 
enemigo imprudencia 

supped (at eight o'clock). If they shoidd he there at 
cenado a las ocho alia 

the hour appointed. 
hora destinada 

16. If I should have been there. If thou shoiddst 
have had the reward. If we should have been loved. 

premio amados 

If they should have had the letters. If all the men 

carta todos hombre 

should have been idle. If the daughters of the king 

holgazan hija rey 

should have been in the city. If their virtues should 

en ciudad viriud 

have been rewarded. When time and the world 
premiadas Cuando el tiempo mundo 

shall have been. 

17. To have money. To be tall, little, fat, lean. 

alto pequeno gordo flaco 
To be sorrowful, cheerful, sick. To have been indis- 

triste alegre malo 

posed. To have been always occupied. Being then 

siempre ocupado 
fearful. Having many things. Having had sons 
temeroso cosa hijo 

virtuous and well instructed. Having been alwavs in 
virtuoso bien instruido en 

London. 
Londres 



90 ETYMOLOGY. 



CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS ACTIVE.* 

Spanish verbs have three conjugations, which may 
be known from the termination of the Infinitive Mood. 
The first conjugation ends in ar> as amar, to love. 
The second ends in er, as temer, to fear. 

The third ends in ir, as partir, to divide. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 

Amar, to love. 

Indicative Mood. 

1. Present Tense. 

Sing, amo, I love, am loving, or do love* 

amas, thou lovest, &c. 

ama, he loves. 
Plur. amamos, tve love. 

amais, you love. 

aman, they love. 

2. Preterimperfect. 

Sing, amaba, / loved, or was loving. 

amabas, thou tvast loving* 

amaba, he was loving. 
Plur. amabamos, tve xvere loving. 

amabais, you were loving. 

amaban, they were loving. 

3. First Preterperfect. 

Sing, ame, / loved. 

amaste, thou lovedst. 

amo, he loved. 
Plur. amamos, tve loved. 

amasteis, you loved. 

amaron, they loved. 

* Verbs Neuter are similarly conjugated ; but they do not admit 
a passive voice like Actives. 



ETYMOLOGY. 91 

4% Second Preterperfect. 

Sing, he amado, / have loved. 

has amado, thou hast loved. 

ha amado, he has loved. 
Plur. hemos amado, we have loved. 

habeis amado, you have loved. 

han amado, they have loved. 

5. Preterpluperfect. 

Sing, hube, or habia, amado, I had loved. 

hubiste, or habias, amado, thou hadst loved, 

hubo, or habia, amado, he had loved. 
Plur. hubimos, or habiamos, amado, we had loved. 

hubisteis, or habiais, amado, you had loved. 

hubieron, or habian, amado, they had loved. 

6. Future-imperfect. 

Sing, amare, I shall or mil love. 

amaras, thou shalt or wilt love. 

amara, he shall or will love. 
Plur. amaremos, we shall or mil love. 

amareis, you shall or will love. 

amaran, they shall or xvill love. 

7. Future-perfect. 

Sing, habre amado, / shall have loved. 

habras amado, thou wilt have loved. 

habra amado, he will have loved. 
Plur. habremos amado, we shall have loved. 

habreis amado, you will have loved. 

habran amado, they will have loved. 

8. Imperative Mood. 

Sing, ama, love thou. 

ame, let him love. 
Plur. amemos, let us love. 

amad, love you. 

amen, let them love* 



92 



ETYMOLOGY 



Subjunctive Mood. 

9. Present Tense. 

que, that, 
Sing, ame, / may love, or I love. 

ames, thou mayst love. 

ame, he may love. 
Plur. amemos, we may love. 

ameis, you may love. 

amen, they may love. 

10. First Preterimperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, amara, or amase, I should or might love, or I loved* 

amaras, or amases, thou shouldst or mightst love. 

amara, or amase, he should or might love. 
Plur* amaramos, or amasemos, tve should or might love* 

amarais, or amaseis, you should or might love. 

amaran, or amasen, they should or might love. 

11. Second Preterimperfect. 

Sing, amaria, / would or shoidd love. 

amarias, thou wouldst love. 

am aria, he would love. 
Plur. amarlamos, voe would or should love. 

amarlais, you would love. 

amarian, they would love. 

12. Preterperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, haya amado, / have loved, or may have loved. 

hayas amado, thou mayst have loved. 

haya amado, he may have loved. 
Plur. hayamos amado, we may have loved. 

hayais amado, you may have loved. 

hayan amado, they may have loved. 



ETYMOLOGY. 93 



13. First Preterpluperfect. 

que, that, 
Sinn, hubiera/ 



era,"l 

r > amado, / should or might have loved, or, 

ese, J / Aaa? Zoverf. 



)iera,^ 

>r > amado, fte should or might have loved. 

Diese, J 



or 
hubi 
hubieras,"* 

or > amado, thou shouldst or mightst have 
hubieses, J loved. 

hubiera,^ 

or 
hubi 
Plur. hubieramos,*\ 

or > amado, xve should or might have 

hubiesemos, J loved. 

hubierais, "^ 

or > amado, you should or might have 
hubieseis, J loved. 

hubieran,! 

or > am ado, they should or might have 
hubiesen, J loved. 

14<. Second Preterpluperfect. 

Sing, habrla amado, I /would or should have loved. 

habrlas amado, thou wouldst have loved. 

habrla amado, he would have loved. 
Plur. habriamos amado, we would or should have loved. 

habriais amado, you would have loved. 

habrlan amado, they would have loved. 

15. Future Imperfect. 

si, ^ if, 
Sing, amare, I shoidd love. 

amares, thou shouldst love* 

amare, he should love* 
Plur. amaremos, we should lore. 

amareis, you should love. 

amaren, they should love. 



94 ETYMOLOGY. 

16. Future Perfect. 

Si?ig. hubiere amado, I should have loved. 

hubieres amado, thou shouldst have hied. 

hubiere amado, he should have loved. 
Plur. hubiere mos amado, we shoidd have loved. 

hubiereis amado, you should have loved. 

hubieren amado, they should have loved. 

17. Infinitive Mood. 
Present Tense. 

amar, to love. 

Perfect, 
haber amado, to have loved. 

Participles. 

Present, 
amandoj loving. 

Perfect. 
amado, loved. 

Compound Perfect, 
habiendo amado, having loved. 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Temer, to fear. 

Indicative Mood. 
1. Present Tense. 

Sing, temo, I fear, do fear, or am fearing. 

t ernes, thou fear est. 

teme, he fears. 
Plur. tememos, we fear. 

temeis, you fear. 

tern en, they fear. 



ETYMOLOGY. 95 



2. Preterlmperfect. 

Sing, temia, I feared, did fear, or was fearing. 

temias, thou wast fearing* 

temia., he was fearing. 
Plur. temiamos, we were fearing. 

temiais, you were fearing. 

temian, they were fearing. 

S. First Preterperfect. 

Sing, temi, I feared. 

temiste, thou fear edst. 

temid, he feared. 
Plur. temimos, we feared. 

temisteis, you feared. 

temieran, they feared. 

4. Second Preterperfect, 

Sing, he temido, I have feared. 

has temido, thou hast feared. 

ha temido, he has feared. 
Plur. hemos temido, we have feared. 

habeis temido, you have feared. 

han temido, they have feared. 



Sing, hube, \ 
or > 
habia, j 



5. Preterpluperfect. 
temido, I had feared. 



hubiste,^ 

or > temido, thou hadst feared. 
habias, J 
hubo, 1 

or > temido, he had feared. 
habia, J 



96 ETYMOLOGY. 

Plur. hubimos, \ 



or > temido, we had feared*. 
habiamos, ) 
hubisteis,"^ 

or > temido, you had feared. 
habiais, J 
hubieron,*^ 

or > temido, they had feared. 
habian. J 



6. Future Imperfect. 

Sing, temere, I shall or will fear. 

temeras, thou shalt or wilt fear. 

temera, he shall or will fear, 
Plur. temeremos, we shall or will fear. 

temereis, you shall or will fear. 

temeran, they shall or will fear. 

7. Future Perfect. 

Sing, habre temido, I shall have feared. 

habras temido, thou wilt have feared. 

habra temido, he will have feared. 
Plur. habremos temido, we shall have feared. 

habreis temido, you will have feared. 

habran temido, they will have feared. 

8. Imperative Mood. 

Sing, teme, fear thou. 

tema, let him fear. 
Plur. temamos, let us fear. 

temed, fear you. 

teman, let them fear. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

9. Present Tense. 

que, that, 
Sing, tema., / may fear, or I fear. 

temas, thou may st fear. 

tema, he may fear. 
Plur. temamos, we may fear. 

temais, you may fear. 

tcrnan, they may fear. 



ETYMOLOGY. 97 

10. First Preterimperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, temiera, 1 

or > I should or might fear 3 or I feared. 
temiese, J 
temieras, ^ 

or ftJioit shouldst or might st fear. 
tenodeses, j 
temiera, ^| 

or }-he should or might fear. 
temiese, J 
Plur. temieramos,! 

or >we should or might fear. 

temiesemos, J 
temieraisj ^ 

or \y ou should or might fear. 

temieseis, J 
temieraiijS 

or \ihey should or might fear. 
temiesen, J 

11. Second Pretei perfect. 

Sing, temeria, I would or should fear. 

temerias, thou wouldstfear. 

temeria, he would fear. 
Plur. temeriamos, we would or should fear. 

temeriais, you would, fear. 

temerian, they would fear. 

12. Preterperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, haya temido, I may have, feared, or have feared. 

hayas temido, thou mayst have feared. 

haya temido he may have feared. 
Plur. hayamos temido, we may have feared. 

hayais temido, you may have feared. 

hayan temido, they may have feared. 
v 



98 



ETYMOLOGY. 



13. First Preterpluperfect 
que, that, 
Sing, hubiera, 



iera \ 

7 I temido, / should or might havejeared, 

hubiesej or had feared. 

3 



hubieras,^ . ,, j7 
7 I temido, th 

hubi&esj 



v temido, thou shoulcht or misjitst 
or > 7 ^ 7 & 



hubiera,"* 

or > temido, he should or might have feared. 
hubiese, J 
Plur. hubieramos, 1 

or >• temido, ive should or might have 

hubiesemos, J feared. 

hubierais, ) 

or > temido, you should or might have 
hubieseis, f feared. 

hubieran,"") 

or > temido. they should or might have 
hubiesen, J feared. 

14*. Second Preterpluperfect. 

Sing, habria temido, I would or shoidd have feared. 

habrias temido, thou voouldst have feared. 

habria temido, he would have feared. 
Plur. habriamos temido, we would or should have feared, 

habriais temido, you would have feared. 

habrian temido, they would have feared. 

15. Future Imperfect. 

si, if 
Sing, temiere, I shoidd fear* 

temiereSj, thou shoiddslfear. ■ 

temiere, he should fear. 
Plur. temieremos, we should fear. 

temiereis, you shoidd fear. 

temieren, they should fear. 

16. Future Perfect. 

si, if 
Sing, hubiere temido, I shoidd have feared. 

hubieres temido, thou slioiddst have feared, 
hubiere temido ? he shoidd have feared* 



ETYMOLOGY. 99 

Plur. hubieremos temido, we should have feared. 
hubiereis temido, you should havejeared. 
hubieren temido, they should have feared. 

17. Infinitive MoccL 
Present Tense. 
Temer, to fear. 

Perfect. 
Haber temido,, to have feared. 

Participles. 

Present. 

Temiendoj, fearing. 

Perfect. 

Temido, feared. 

Compound Perfect. 
Habiendo temido, having feared. 



THIRD CONJUGATION 

Partir, to divide. 
Indicative Mood. 

1. Present Tense. 

Sing, par to, / divide* do divide, am dividing, 

partes, thou dividest. 

parte* he divides. 
Plur. partimos, we divide. 

partis, you divide. 

par ten, they divide. 

2. Preterimperfect. 

Sing, partia, / divided, did divide, or was dividing, 

partias, thou wast dividing. 

partia, he was dividing. 
Plur. partiamos, we were dividing. 

partiais, you ivere dividing. 

partian, they were dividing. 
■f2 



100 ETYMOLOGY. 

S. First Preterperfect. 

Sing, parti, I divided 

partiste, thou dividest. 

partio, he divided. 
Plur. partimos, tve divided. 

partisteis, you divided. 

partieron, they divided. 

4. Second Preterfect. 

Sing, he partido, / have divided. 

has partido, thou hast divided. 

ha partido, he lias divided. 
Plur. hemos partido, tve have divided. 

habeis partido, you have divided, 

han partido, they have divided. 

5. Preterpluperfect. 
Sing, hiihe, *| 

or > partido, / had divided. 
habia, J 
hubiste, ) 

or > partido, thou hadsi divided. 
habias, J 
hiibo, "^ 

or > partido, he had divided. 
habia, J 
Plur. hubimos, \ 

or > partido, tve had divided 
habiamos, ) 
hubisteisn 

or > partido, you had divided. 



habiais, 
habieran, 

or 
habian, 



pad o, they had divided. 



6. Future Imperfect. 

Sing, partire, I shall or will divide. 

partiras, thou shalt or wilt divide, 

partira, he shall or will divide. 
Plur. partiremos, tve shall or will divide. 

partireis, you shall or will divide. 

partiran, they shall or will divide 



ETYMOLOGY. 101 

7. Future Perfect. 

Sing. Iiabre partido, / shall have divided. 

habras partido, thou wilt have divided. 

habra partido, he will have divided. 
Plur. habreruos partido, we shall have divided. 

habreis partido, you will have divided. 

habran partido, they will have divided. 

8. Imperative Mood. 

Sing, parte, divide thou. 

parta, let him divide. 
Plur. partamos, let us divide. 

partid, divide you. 

par tan ? let them divide. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

9. Present Tense. 

que, that, 
Sing, parta, I may divide, or I divide. 

partas, thou mayst divide, 

parta, he may divide. 
Plur. partamos, we may divide. 

partais, you may divide. 

partan, they may divide. 

10. First Preterimperfect 

que, that, 
Sing, partiera, 

or ^ I should or might divide, or I divided, 
partiese, 
partieras, 



} 

rtieras, "| 

or >thou should, 
irtieses, J 



st or mightsi divide*. 
partieses, J 
partiera, "i 

or >he should or might divide. 
partiese, J 
Plur. partieramos s ^ 

or ywe should or might divide. 

partiesemos ? J 
. partieraisA 

or Vyou should or might divide* 

partieseis,J 



102 ETYMOLOGY. 

par tieran, "^ 

or (they should or might divide. 
partiesen, J 

11. Second Preterimperfect. 

Sing, partiria, / tvould or should divide. 

parti rias, thou wouldst divide. 

partiria, he tvould divide. 
Plur. partiriamos, ive would or should divide* 

partiriais, you tvould divide. 

partirian, they would divide. 

12. Preterperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing* haya partido, I may have divided, or have divided. 

hay as partido, thou mayst have divided* 
■ haya partido, he may have divided. 
Plur. hayamos partido, tve may have divided. 

hayais partido, you may have divided. 

hayan partido, they may have divided. 

IS. First Preterpluperfect. 

que, that) 

Sins, hubiera,! ^ -, T 7 77 • 7 , L -t- 

6 ? I partido, I should or might have di~ 



or 
huhies 



\ 1 partido, I should or might h 

j vided. or I divided. 

ese, J 

9 V Partido, thou shouldst or might st have 

9 J 



. ., f divided. 

hubieses, 



hubiera,"j 

or > partido, he should or might have divided. 

hubiese, J 

Plur. hubieramos, ^ * A -, J7 • ij.7„.„ 

9 I partido, tve should or might have 

i , ., [ divided. 

nuoiesemos, J 

9 \ partido, you should or might have 

, , <■, . [ divided. 

hubieseis, J 

9 V partido, they should or might have 

)iesen, J 



divided. 
hubiesen, 



ETYMOLOGY. 103 

14?. Second Preterpluperfect. 

Sing, habria partido, I would or should have divided. 

habrias partido, thou tvouldst have divided. 

habria partido, he would have divided. 
Plur. habriaaaos partido, we would or should have 

divided. 

habriais partido, you would have divided. 

habrian partido, they would have divided. 

15. Future Imperfect, 

si, if, 
Sing, partiere, I should divide. 

partieres, thou shouldst divide. 

partiere, he should divide. 
Plur. partieremos, we should divide. 

partiereis, you should divide. 

partieren ? they should divide. 

16. Future Perfect. 

si, if, 

Sing, hubiere partido, I should have divided. 

hubieres partido, thou shouldst have divided, 

hubiere partido^ he should have divided. 
Plur. hubieremos partido, we should have divided. 

hubiereis partido, you should have divided. 

hubieren partido, they should have divided. 

17. Infinitive Mood. 
Present Tense. 

Partir, to divide. 

Perfect. 

Haber partido, to have divided. 

Participles. 

Present. 

Partiendo, dividing. 



104- ETYMOLOGY. 

Perfect. 
Partido, divided. 

Compound Perfect. 
Habiendo partido, having divided. 



Exercises on Regular Verbs Active. 

First Conjugation. 

(1.) I love. Thou adorest. Pie accuses. We 

amar adorar accusar 

finish. You speak. They call. (2.) I was fasting. 

acabar hablar llamar ayanar 

Thou didst sup. He deceived. We did increase. 

cenar enganar aumentar 

You were praising. Thej^ forget always. (3.) (I did 

alabar olvidar siempre 

not know.) Thou enquiredst. Pie sent. We 

ignorar preguntar enviar 

consulted. You refused. They succoured.—- (4.) 
consultar rehusar amparar 

I have attained. Thou hast studied. He has bought* 
lograr esiudiar comprar 

We have spent. You have assured. They have 
gastar assegurar 

moderated, (5.) I had related. Thou hatlst 

moderar contar 

blamed. Pie had deserted. We had warned. You 

wit up era r desert ar avisar 

had taken. They had robbed. (6.) I shall command. 

tomar robar mandar 

Thou wilt slay. He will call. Yv r e will borrow. You 
matar amprar 

shall appeal. They will drag. (7.) I shall have 

apelar arrasirar 

left. Thou wilt have affronted. He will have 
dejqr ctfrentar 



ETYMOLOGY 105 

ventured. We shall have frightened. You will have 
cvcenturar amedrentar 

prepared. They will have tied. (8.) Whip thou. 

preparar atar azotar 

Let him accuse. Let us assist. Dance you. Let 
accusar ayudar hailar 

them sup. (9.) That may dance. That thou 

danzar 
mayst cure. That he may accommodate. That we 
curar acomodar 

may disarm. That you may reconcile, That they 

des a m i a r rec one ilia r 

may (take away). — —(10.) That I might love. Though 

guitar antique 

thou shouldst imagine. If he might dine. If we 
imaginar si yantar 

might (carry off). That they should pierce. (11.) 

llevar horadar 

I would (pour in). Thou wouldst confirm. He would 

echar con fir mar. 

throw. We should (pull down). You would insist. 
arrojar derribar porfiar 

They would call. (12.) That I may have frightened. 

llamar espantar 

That thou mayst have condemned. That he may have 

condenar 
sung. That we may have procured. That you may 
cantar procurar 

have sheared. That they may have studied. (13.) 

esquilar 
That I might have advised. That thou shouldst have 

aconsejar 
spoken. Though he should have tormented. If we 
liablar atormentar 

might have loved. That you should have desired, 

desear 
Though they should have refused. :14.) I should 

have respected. Thou wouldst have painted. He 
respetar piniar 

f5 



106 ETYMOLOGY. 

would have used. We should have esteemed. You 

asar estimar 

would have treated. They would have implored.——- 

tratar implorar 

(15.) If I should love. If thou shouldst speak. If he should 
afford. If we should threaten. If you should speak. 
prestar amenazar 

If they should pardon. (16.) If I should have 

perdonar 
hoped. If thou shouldst have revealed. If he should 
esperar revel ar 

have continued. If we should have inspired. If you 

continuar inspirar 

should have regulated. If they should have founded. 
reglar Jiindar 

■ (17.) To have observed. Governing. Proclaimed* 

observat dominar proclamar 
Having entered. 
entrar 



Second Conjugation. 

(1.) I sell. Thou attackest. He drinks. We sweep. 

vender acometer beber barrer 

You correspond. They eat.— — (2.) I did accede. 

corresponder comer acceder 

Thou wast daring. The king was breaking. We were 

at r ever rey romper 

yielding. You did drink. The soldiers surprised. 

ceder soldado sorprehender 

(3.) I promised. Thou soldest. The queen did run. 
prometer reyne correr 

We hid. You owed. The things proceeded. 

esconder debet procedet 

(4s) I have reproved. Thou hast burned. The 

rep reh ender a rdet 

prince hast succeeded. We have woven. You have 
principe suceder iejet 



ETYMOLOGY. 107 

answered. They have swallowed. (5.) I had pros- 

responder sorbet pros- 

trated. Thou hadst offended The princess had sold. 
tenter qfender primesa 

We had undertaken. You had feared. They had 

enprender temer 

assaulted. — —(6.) I shall sow. Thou wilt intercede 
arremeter coser intercede 

He will eat. He shall destroy. You will corrupt. 
percler corromper 

They will offend.* (7.) I shall have destroyed. 

Thou wilt have attacked. He will have drunk. We 
shall have proceeded. You will have reproved. They 

will have succeeded.- (8.) Break thou. Let him 

dare. -Let us correspond. Sweep you. Let 

them fear. (9.) That I may owe. That thou 

mayst pretend. That he may interfere. That we may 

pretender meter 

depend. That you may owe. That they may burn. 
depend er 

(10.) That I might weave. Though thou shouldst 

offend. If he might fear. That we might undertake. 
That you might ran. Though they should break. ' 
(11.) I would approach. Thou wouldst hide. He 
would swallow. We should reprove. You would suc- 
ceed. They would owe. (12.) That I may have 

dared. Though thou hast eaten. If he has under- 
taken. Provided we have sold. Though you have 
con ted que 

promised. That they have woven. {13.) That I 

should have approached. That thou mighst have 
surprised. That he might have burned. Though we 
should have answered. If you had reproved. If they 

had succeeded.* (14.) I should have served. Thou 

wouldst have feared. The general would have as- 
saulted. We should have proceeded. You would 

have broken. They would have burned. (15.) If I 

should cough. If thou shouldst offend. If he should 

toser 
succeed. If we should commit. If you should grant. 
cometer conceder 



108 ETYMOLOGY. 

If they should drink. (16.) If I should have 

merited. If thou shouldst have eaten. If he should 

merecer 

have hid. If we should have swept. If you should 

haveowed. If they should have granted. 17. To have 

destroyed. To have run. Answering. Undertaken. 
Having obeyed. Having subdued. 
obedecer someter 



Third Conjugation. 

(1.) I beat down. Thou openest. He adds. We 
abatir abrir anadir 

stun. You fight. The waters boil. (2.) I did 

aturdir combatir agua bullir 

compress. Thou wast confounding. He consumed. 

comprimir coiifundir consumir 

We eluded. You beat down. They were adding. 

eludir 

(3.) I erected. Thou didst consume. He wrote. 

eregir escribir* 

We dropped. You opened. They stunned.— (4.) 

escurrir 
I have fenced. Thou hast fought. The king has 

esgrlmir reij 

exhibited. We have confounded. You have expressed. 
exhibir exprimir 

The men have feigned. (5.) I had eluded. Thou 

fingir 
hadst melted. The dog had yelped. We had felled. 
fundir perro gahir penchir 

You had fought. The waters had boiled. (6.) I shall 

print. Thou wilt sink. The thief will elude. We shall 
imprimir hundir ladron 

(pour in). You shall write. The women shall 
injundir muger 

(bring forth). (7.) I shall have written. Thou wilt 

parir 

* Escribir has an irregular participle, escriio. And so also have 
verbs in brir. Seethe Irregular Verbs, 



ETYMOLOGY. 109 

have nourished. He will have feigned. We shall have 
uutrir 

departed. You will have dropped. The prince will 
partir pfincipe 

have united. (8.) Permit thou. Let him compress. 

unir pemdtir 

Let us presume. Fence you. Let the wicked suffer. 
presumir malo siifrir 

(9.) That I may write. Though thou mayst erect. 

aunque 

Though the soldier may fight. That we may exhibit. 

sold a do 
Provided you print. Though the armies may depart. 
con tal que ejercito 

(10.) That I might prohibit. Though thou 

prohibit 
shouldst suffer. If he might presume. That we should 

si 
polish. If you wrote. If love should presume, and 
pulir el amor 

the laws should prohibit. (11.) I should restrain. 

ley restrifiir 

Thou wouldst write. The lion would roar. We would 

I eon rugir 

feign. You would require. The emperors would 

exigir empetadot 

prohibit. — — (12.) Though I have directed. Though 

dirigir 
thou hast omitted. That he may have lived. That 

omitir vivir 

we have suffered. Though the allies may have fought. 

alia do 

(13.) That I might have applied. Though thou 

acuclir 
shouldst have feigned. Though the hog had grunted, 

puerco grunir 
If we had required. Though you might have departed. 
That they should have omitted.— — (14.) I should have 
written. Thou wouldst have polished. The noise 

ruido 
would have stunned. We should have sunk. You 



110 ETYMOLOGY. 

would have erected. They would have oraitted. 1 

(15.) If I should ascend. If thou shouldst discover. 
subir descubrir 

If he should cover. If we should apply. If you 
cubrir 

should require. If they should fence. (16.) If I 

should have cousumed. If thou shouldst have omitted. 
If he should have presumed. If we have supplied. If 

suplir 
you have concurred. If the authors should have re- 
concurrir re~ 

sided. (17.) To have printed.* To have subsisted. 

sidir subsist it 

Warping. Dividing. Divided. Having subdived. 
urdir dividir subdividir. 



Changes in certain Regular Verbs, 

Some verbs are susceptible of slight variations both 
in their radical letters, and in their terminations; but 
as these variations are made for no other purpose than 
of preserving in other tenses the pronunciation of the 
infinitive, the Academy does not consider them as 
irregular. Thus, 

Verbs ending in car change c into qu when that c 
would be followed by e. This happens in the first 
person singular of the First Preterperfect Indicative, in 
the third person singular and plural and the first person 
plural of the Imperative^ and in all the persons of the 
Subjunctive Present: Buscar, to seek; busque, I sought ; 
busque, let him seek ; busquen, let them seek, &c. 

Verbs in gar take a u after g when that g would be 
followed by <?, and this happens in the same persons as 
the substitution of qu fore: Pagar, to pay ; pagne, I 
paid, &c. 

Verbs in ceretnd. cir change the c into z before a and 
o.f This happens in the first person singular of the 
Indicative Present, in the third person singular and 

* See impvimir in the Irregular Verbs, 

t Delinquir changes qu into c in the same cases. 



ETYMOLOGY. Ill 

plural and the first person plural of the Imperative, and 
in all the persons of the Subjunctive Present: Veneer, 
to conquer; venzo, I conquer; venza, let him conquer; 
venzan, let them conquer, &c. Resarcir, to repair ; 
resarzo, I repair, &c. 

Verbs inger change g into j before a and o 9 and this 
happens in the same persons and tenses as the pre- 
ceding : Escoger, to choose ; escojo, I choose, &q. ■ 

Verbs in eer change i into y in the third person sin- 
gular and plural of the First Preterperfect Indicative, 
in the First and Second Preterimperfect Subjunctive, 
in the Future Imperfect of the same mood, and in the 
Present Participle: Creer, to believe; crei, T believed; 
creijo, he believed ; creyeron, they believed, &c. 

Verbs in uir 9 when the u and i are not in the same 
syllable, change i into y in the same tenses as those in 
eer> and also in the three persons singular, and the 
third person plural of the Indicative Present, in the 
two persons singular, and the first and third persons 
plural of the Imperative, and in all the persons of the 
Subjunctive Present : Atriouir, to attribute ; atribuyo, 
I attribute ; atribuyes, thou attributes!; atribuye-, he 
attributes, &c. 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS PASSIVE. 

A Verb Passive is conjugated by adding the perfect 
participle to the auxiliary ser through all the changes of 
Mood, Tense, Number, and Person, in the following 
manner : 

Ser amado, to he loved. 

Indicative Mood* 

1. Present Tense. 

Sing* soy amaclo, I am loved, 

eres amado, thou art loved. 

es amado, he is loved. 
Plur. somos am ados, tee are loved. 

sois am ad os, you are loved. 

son amados, they are loved. 



112 ETYMOLOGY. 

2. Preterimperfect. 

Sing, era amado, I was loved. 

eras amado, thou toast loved. 

era amado, he was loved. 
Plur. eramos amados, we tvere loved. 

erais amados, you were loved. 

eran amados, they were loved. 

3. First Preterperfect. 

Sing, fui amado, I was loved. 

fuiste amado, thou wast loved. 

fue amado, he ivas loved. 
Plur. fuimos amados, we were loved. 

fuistes amados, you were loved. 

fueron amados, they were loved. 

4. Second Preterperfect. 

Sing, he sido amado, / have been loved. 

has sido amado,, thou hast been loved. 

ha sido amado, he has been loved. 
Plur. hemos sido amados, we have been loved. 

habeis sido amados, you have been loved. 

ban sido amados, they have been loved. 

5. Preterpluperfect. 

Sing, hube, ~\ 

or >sido amado, / had been loved. 
habia, J 
hubiste, 1 

or >sido amado, thou hadst been loved. 
habias, J 
hubo, "j 

or f sido amado, he had been loved. 
habia, . 
Plur. hubimos, 

or J^sido amados, we had been loved. 
habiamos, 



j- 



ETYMOLOGY. 113 

hubisteis,^ 

or Ssido amados, you had been loved, 

habiais, J 
hubieron,^j 

or > siclo amados, they had been loved. 

habian, J 

6. Future Imperfect, 

Sing, sere amado, I shall or will be loved. 

seras amado, thou shall or wilt be loved. 

sera amado. he shall or will be loved. 
~Plur. seremos amados, toe shall or will be loved. 

sereis amados, you shall or will be loved. 

seran amados, they shall or ivill be loved. 

7. Future Perfect. 

Sing, habre sido amado, / shall have been loved. 

habras sido amado, thou wilt have been loved* 

habra sido amado, he ivill have been loved, 
Plar. habremos sido amados, we shall have been loved, 

habreis sido amados, you ivill have been loved. 

habran sido amados^ they ivill have been loved, 

8. Imperative Mood, 

Sing, se amado, he thou loved. 

sea amado, let him be loved. 
Plur, seamos amados, let us le loved, 

sed amados, be you loved, 

sean amados, let them be loved. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

9. Present Tense. 

que, that, 
Sing, sea amado, I may be loved, or am loved. 

seas amado, thou mayst be loved. 

sea amado, he may be loved. 
Plur. seamos amados, we may be loved. 

seals amados , you may be loved. 

sean amados, they may be loved. 



114 ETYMOLOGY. 



10. First Preterlmperfect. 

que, that. 
Sing, fuera, 
or 
fuese, 
fueras, 

or 
fueses 



era,! 

?r > amado, / should or might: be loved.* 

ese, J 

eras, 1 

or Vamado, thou sliouldst or mightst be loved, 

eses, J 



fuera, \ 



or V amado, he should or might be loved, 
fuese, J 
Plur. fueramos,^ 

or > amados, we should or might be loved. 
fuesemos,J 
fuerais,! 

or > amados, you should or might be loved, 
fueseis, ) 
fueran,S 

or > amados, they should or might be loved, 
fuesen, J 

11. Second Preterimperfect. 

Sing, seria am ado, / would or shoidd be loved, 

serias amado, thou wouldst be loved. 

seria amado, he would be loved, 
Plur, seriamos amados, we would or should beloved. 

seriais amados, you would be loved. 

serian amados, they would be loved, 

12. Preterperfect. 
que, that. 
Sing, haya sido amado, I may have been loved, or I have 

been loved, 
hayas sido amado, thou mayst have been loved, 
haya sido amado, he may have been loved, 
Plur. hay am os sido amados, we may have been loved. 
hayais sido amados, you may have been loved. 
hayan sido amados, they may have been loved, 

* Also that I were loved, and sometimes that I was loved See 

Syntax of Conjunctions. 



ETYMOLOGY. 113 

13. First Preterpluperfect. 

que, that, 
Sing, hubiera, "J 

or Vsido amado., / should or might have been 
hubiese, ) loved, or I had been loved. 

hubieras, "| 

or >sido amado, thou shouldst or mightst 

hubieses, J have been loved. 

hubiera, ~) 

or > sido amado, he should or might have been 
hubiese, J loved. 

Plur. hubieramos,^ 

or >sido amados, me should or might 

hubiesemos, J have been loved* 

hubierais,^ 

or >sido amados, you should or might have 
hubieseis, J been loved. 

hubieran, "\ 

or V sido amados, they should or might have 

hubiesen, J been loved. 

14. Second Preterpluperfect. 

Sing, liabria sido amado, / mould or should have been 

loved. 
habrias sido amado, thou mouldst have been loved: 
habria sido amado, he mould have been loved. 
Plur. habria mos sido amados, we mould or should have 

been loved. 
habriais sido amados, you mould have been loved. 
habrian sido amados, they moidd have been loved. 

15. Future Imperfect. 

si, if 
Sing, fuere amado, I should be loved. 

fueres amado, thou shouldst be loved. 

fuere amado, he should be loved. 
Plur. fueremos amados, we should be loved. 

fuereis amados, you shoidd be loved. 

fueren amados, they should be loved. 



116 ETYMOLOGY. 

16. Future Perfect, 

si, if. 
Sing, hubiere sido amado, / should have been loved. 

hubieres sido amado, thou shouldst have been loved. 

hubiere sido amado, he shoidd have been loved. 
Plur. hubieremos sido amados, ive should have been 

loved. 

hubiereis sido amados, you should have been loved. 

hubieren sido amados, they should have been loved, 

17, Infinitive Mood. 

Present Tense. 
Ser amado, to be loved. 

Perfect, 
Haber sido amado, to have been loved. 

Participles. 
Present. 
Siendo amado^ being loved. 

Perfect. 
Amado, loved. 

Compound Perfect. 
Hahiendo sido amado, having been loved.* 

* The Spanish language has two verbs corresponding to our verb, 
to love. These are amar and querer : the former is generally used 
when we speak of things, the latter, of persons. But this distinction 
is often disregarded. 



ETYMOLOGY. 11* 



Exercise on Passive Verbs* 

(1.) I am accused. Thou art finished. God is 
acusar acabar 

adored. We are called. You are deceived. The 
adorar llamar enganar 

men are deceived. (2 and 3.) I was deceived. 

h ombre 

Thou wast praised. The king was forgotten. We 

alabar reij olvidar 

were increased. You were loved. They were accused, 
aumentar amar 

(4%) I have been asked. Thou hast been sent. 
preguntar enviar 

The physician has been consulted. We have been 

medico consultar 

refused. You have been succoured. Those sciences 
rehusar amparar ciencia 

have been studied (5.) I had been assured. Thou 

estudiar assegurar 

hadst been moderated. The woman had been blamed. 
moderar muger vituperar 

We had been deserted. You had been taken. The 
desertar tomar 

houses had been robbed. (6.) 1 shall be slain. 

casa robar matar 

Thou wilt be asked. The army will be commanded. 

ejerciio mandar 

We will be called. You shall be dragged. The things 

arrastrar cosa 

will be borrowed. (7.) 1 shall have been left. Thou 

amprar dejar 

wilt have been affronted. The palace will have been 

qfrentar palacio 

* The participle is to be declined like an adjective, and to agree- 
in gender and number with the noun or pronoun to which it belongs : 
The man is loved ; el hembre es querido : The woman is loved; la 
muger es querida : The men are loved ; los hombres son queridos: The 
women are loved j las mv.geres son queridas. 



118 ETYMOLOGY. 

bought. We shall have been frightened. You will 
comprar amedrentar 

have been prepared. The things will have been bought. 
preparar 
(8.) Be thou tied. Let him be accused. Let us 
atar 
be assisted, Let them be sent.—- — (9.) That I may be 

ayndar 
succoured. Though thou mayst be left. Though the 

aim que 
princess be warned. That we may be cured. Though 
2)rincesa avisar curar 

yon be accommodated. That the soldiers may be 
acomodar soldado 

disarmed. (10.) That I might be reconciled. 

desarmar reconcilia r. 

Though thou wert imagined. If life were taken 

imaginar si la vicla guitar 

away. That we should be sold. That you should be 

vender 
attacked. Though the queen and her daughters w T ere 
a comet er reyna y hija 

attacked. — — (11.) I should have been answered. 

responder 
Thou wouldst have been surprised. The house would 

sorprehender casa 

have been sold. We should have been feared. You 

temer 
would have been assaulted. The cities would have 
arremeter ciudad 

been burned. (12.) That I may have been con- 

arder ven- 

quered. Though thou hast been concealed. Though 
cer esconder 

the woman has been protected. If we have been 

proteger 
stunned. If you have been nourished. Though the 
aiurdir nutrir 

letters may have been consumed. That the books may 
carta consuruir libro 

have been burned.- (13/) Though I should have been 



ETYMOLOGY. 119 

permitted. If thou hadst been exhibited. Provided the 
permit ir exhibir con tal que 

church had been erected. That we might have been 
iglesia erigir 

sunk. Though you should have been added. If the 
hundir anadir 

women had been prohibited. — —(14.) I would have 

prokibir 
been called. Thou wouldst have been called. The 

llaraar 
man and the woman would have been united. We 

unir 
should have been taken. You would have been 

tomar 
suffered. They would have been rewarded. — — (15.) 

premiar 
If I should be doubted. If thou shouldst be treated. 

dudar tratar 

If she should be offended. If we should be sent. If 

qfender 
you should be required. If the husbands should be 
exiger mar i do 

restrained. If the wives should be directed. {16,) 

restrinir dirigir 

If I should have been corrupted. If thou shouldst have 

corrcmper 
been loved. If she should have been forgotten. If we 
should have been rewarded. If you should have been 
permitted. If the queens should have been feared. 

(17.) To be conquered. To be abandoned. To 

abandonar 
have been admired. To have been united. Being 

admirar 
rewarded. Restrained. Having been required. Hav- 
ing been directed. 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS REFLECTED. 

Verbs reflected are conjugated by prefixing to the 
active verb the accusative cases of the personal pro- 
nouns. They admit haber only as an auxiliary in the 
formation of their compound tenses. 



120 ETYMOLOGY. 



Indicative Mood. 



Present Tense. 

Sing* me alabo, I praise myself. 

te alabas, thou praisest thyself. 

se alaba, he praises himself. 
Plur. nos alabamos, tve praise ourselves. 

os alabais, you praise yourselves. 

se alaban, they praise themselves. 

Preteriaiperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

me alababa. nos alababamos. 

te alababas. os alababais. 

se alababa. se alababam 

First Preterperfect. 

me alabe. nos alabamos. 

te alabaste. os alabasteis. 

se alabo. se alabaron. 

Second Preterperfect. 

me he alabado. nos hemos alabado, 

te has alabado. os habeis alabado. 

se ha alabado. se han alabado. 

Preterpluperfect. 

rhube, "^ fhubimos, 1 

me< or >alabado. nos^ or >alabado* 

Lhabia,J thabiamos, J 

c hubiste,"^ C hubisteis, 1 

te I or >alabado. os^ or >alabado. 

Lhabias, J Lhabiais, J 

C hubo, "\ C hubieron, "* 

se< or >alabado, se<^ or >alabado. 

V.habia ; J Lhabian, J 



ETYMOLOGY. 121 

Future Imperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

me alabare. nos alabaremos. 

te alabaras. os alabareis. 

se alabara. se alabaran. 

Future Perfect. 

me habre alabado. nos habremos alabado. 

te habras alabado. os habreis alabado. 

se habra alabado. se habran alabado. 



1 


mpei 


-ativ 


e Mood. 


alabate. 
alabase. 






alabemonos. 

alabaos. 

alabense. 


£ 


kibju 


nctii 


:e Mood. 




Present Tense. 


me alabe. 
te alabes. 
se alabe. 






nos alabemos. 
os alabeis. 
se alaben. 


First Pi 


:etei 


•imperfect. 


que 
( alabara, 
ae< or 
( alabase. 
( alabaras, 






que 
f alabaramos, 






nos < or 

(.alabasemos. 
r alabarais, 


e < or 
( alabases. 
( alabara, 

;e-< or 
{ alabase. 






os < or 
Lalabaseis. 
r alabaran, 






se 2 or 

Lai abas en. 


Second Preterimperfect. 


me alabaria. 
te alabarias. 
se alabaria. 






nos alabariamos 
os alabariais. 
se alabarian. 



122 ETYMOLOGY. 

Preterperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

que que 

me haya alabado. nos hayamos alabado, 

te hayas alabado, os hayais alabado. 

se haya alabado. se hayan alabado. 

First Preterpluperfect. 

que que 

rhubiera, \ rhubieramos, 1 

me< or > alabado. nos-^ or > alabado. 

Lhubiese, J Ihubiesemos, j 

r hubieras, "j r hubierais, "^ 

< or > alabado. os*/ or f alabado. 

t hubieses, J I hubieseis, J 

rhubiera,"^ rhubieran,"^ 

2 or > alabado. sel or > alabado. 

vjwbiese, J Lhubiesen, J 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

me habria alabado. nos habriamos alabado. 
te habrias alabado. os habriais alabado. 
se habria aiabado. se habrian alabado. 



Future Imperfect. 

si si 

me alabare. nos alabaremos. 

te alabares. os alabareis. 

se alabare. se alabaren. 



Future Perfect. 

si si 

me hubiere alabado. nos hubieremos alabado. 

te hubieres alabado. os hubiereis alabado, 

se hubiere alabado. se hubieren alabado. 



te 



se 



ETYMOLOGY. 123 

Infinitive Mood. 

Present Tense. 
Alabarse. 

Perfect. 
Haberse alabado. 

Participles. 

Present. 
Alabandose. 

Perfect. 
Alabado. 

Compound Perfect* 
Habiendose alabado. 



ALL THE IRREGULAR VERBS 

Alphabetically arranged) and, when requisite conjugated 
in the Tenses and Persons in ivhich their Irregularity 
is visible, 

A. 

Aba stecer, to furnish provisions. 

The irregularity of this verb, and of all those 
ending in ecer, ocer, and acer, consists in ad* 
d mitting xbefore c in the first person singular of the 
Indicative present^ in the third person singular, and 
the first and third persons plural of the Imperative, 
and in all the persons of the Subjunctive present, 
But to this ride cocer, hacer, torcer, and thei? 
compounds, are exceptions, which icill be found con- 
jugated in their proper places. 
g 2 



124 ETYMOLOGY. 



Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. abastezco. 

Imperative Mood. 

1. abastezcamos. 
3. abastezca. 3. abastezcan. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

1. abastezca. 1. abastezcamos. 

2. abastezcas. 2. abastezcais. 

3. abastezca. 3. abastezcan. 

All the other tenses and persons of this Verb are 
regularly conjugated, — that is, like Temer. 

Aborrecer, to hate. See Abastecer. 

Abrir, to open, is irregular in its perfect participle only, 

abierto. 
Absolver, to absolve. 

This verb changes the radical o into ue in the fol- 
lowing tenses and jwsons ; 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Sino nla r. Plural. 

1. absueivo, 

2. absue]ves» 

3. absuelve. 3. absuelven. 

Imperative Mood. 

2. absuelve. 

3. absuelva* 3. absuelvan. 



ETYMOLOGY. 12/> 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. absuelva. 

2. absuelvas. 

3. absuelva. 3. absuelvan. 

The other tenses and persons are regular, ex- 
cept the perfect participle absuelto. 

Abstraer, to abstract. See Traer. 
Aeaecer, to happen. See Abastecer, 

AcERTAR, to guess. 

This verb admits i before the radical e but in the 
following tenses and persons only. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. acierto. 

2. aciertas. 

3. aeierta. 3. aciertan. 

Imperative Mood. 

2. aeierta. 

3. acierte. 3. acierten. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

1. acierte. 

2. acierfces. 

3. acierte. 3. acierten 

The other tenses^ S$c. are regular. 

Acordar, to agree. 

This verb changes the radical o into ue in the 
same tenses and persons as the preceding verb 
Acertar. 



126 ETYMOLOGY. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural 

1. acuerdo. 

2. acuerdas. 

3. acuerda. 3. acuerdan. 

Imperative Mood* 
% acuerda. 
3. acuerde. 3. acuerden. 

Subjunctive Mood* 

Present. 

1. acuerde. 

2. acuerdes. 

3. acuerde. 3. acuerden. 

27*£ other tenses, fyc. are regular* 

Acordarse, to remember. 1 a \ j 
Acostarse, to lie^ down, j See Acordar ' 
Aorecentar, /o increase. 1 q a 

Adestrar, fo rew^r dexterous. J ^ Acertar. 
Adherir, fo adhere. 

This verb in certain persons admits an i before the 
radical e, and in some other persons that e is changed 
into i. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Singidar. Plural. 

1. adhiero. 

2. adhieres. 

3. adhiere. 3. adhieren. 

* Acordar has the same irregularity as Absolver ; but as these two 
verbs are of different conjugations, and as the latter has an irregular 
perfect participle, it has been judged expedient to conjugate both. 
Were this not the case, the learner might inconsiderately suppose 
that all verbs susceptible of the same radical change are conjugated 
in the same manner, and he might consequently assign to ail the 
same terminations. 



ETYMOLOGY. 12T 

First Preterperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

3. adhirio. 3. adhirieron. 

Imperative Mood. 

1. adhiramos, 

2. adhiere. 

3. adhiera. 3. adhieran. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

1. adhiera. 1. adhiramos. 

2. adhieras. 2. adhirais. 

3. adhiera. 3. adhieran. 

First Preterimperfect. 

Singular. 

1. adhiriera, or adhiriese. 

2. adhirieras, or adhirieses. 

3. adhiriera, or adhiriese. 

Plural. 

1. adhirierarnos, or adhiriesemos. 

2. adhirierais, or adhirieseis. 

3. adhirieran, or adhiriesen. 

Future Imperfect. 

1. adhiriere. 1. adhirieremos. 

2. adhirieres. 2. adhiriereis. 

3. adhiriere. 3. adhirieren. 

The other tenses, fyc, are regular. 

Adolecer, to sicken. \ « ., 

Adormecer, to become drowsy. 5 b6e Abastecer * 
Adquerir, to acquire. 1 A , t . 
Advevtlr, to advert. } &* Adhenr. 



Alentar,,f ^o«m^. ( ^ Acertar 



128 ETYMOLOGY. 

f Agorar, to augur. See Acordar. 
Agradecer, to thank. See Abastecer. 
A hi tar, to overload the stomach. 

This verb has an irregular participle^ ahito, but 
ah it ado is also used. 

Alentarse, to breathe, f ' 
Almorzar, to breakfast. See Acordar. 
Amanecer* to dawn. See Defective Verbs. 
Amentar, to throve a dart. See Acertar. 
Amolar, to tvhet. See Acordar. 
Amortecerse, to faint. See Abastecer. 
Andak, to go. 

This verb is irregular in thejirst Preterperfcct of 

the Indicative, in the first Preterimperfect, and the 

Future Imperfect of the Subjunctive, 

Indicative Mood. 
First Preterperfect. 



Singular. 




Plural. 


1. anduve. 


]. 


an du vim os. 


2. anduviste. 


2. 


anduvisteis. 


3. anduvo. 


3. 


anduvieron, 



Subjunctive Mood. 

First Preterimperfect. 

Singular. 

1. anduviera, or anduviese. 

2. anduvieraSj or anduvieses. 

3. anduviera, or anduviese. 

Plural. 

!. anduvieramos, or anduviescmos. 

2. anduvierais, or anduvieseis. 

3. anduvieran, or anduviesen. 

t Verbs mth this mark are seldom used. 



ETYMOLOGY. 129 

Future Imperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. arduviere. 1. anduvieremos. 

2. anduvieres. 2. anduviereis. 
S. anduviere. 3. anduvieren. 

In the other tenses this verb is conjugated like Amar. 

Anochecer, to grow dark. See the Defective Verbs. 

Anteponer, to prefer. See Poner. 

Antever, to foresee. See Ver. 

Apacentar, to feed (cattle). See Acertar.- 

Aparecer, to appear. See Abastecer. 

Apercibir, to provide. See Pedir. 

Apetecer, to long for. See Abastecer. 

Aporcar, to cover "with earthy 

Aportar, to arrive in port. > See Acordar. 

Apostar, to lay a wager. J 

Apretar, to tighten. See Acer tar. 

Aprobar, to approve. See Acordar. 

Arbolecer, to grow up to a tree. See Abastecer. 

Arrecirse, to grow numb with cold. See Pedir. 

Arrendar, to hire. See Acer tar. 

Arrepentirse, to repent. See Adherir. 

Asentar, to sit down. See Acertar. 

Asentir, to assent. See Adherir. 

Asserrar, to saw. 1 A 
A . :. , 7 • > See Acertar. 
Asestar, to take aim. J 

fAsnt, to take root. 

This verb is irregular only in the first person sin- 
gular of the Indicative present, in the third person 
singular, and the first and third persons plural of the 
Imperative, and in all the persons of the Subjunctive 
present. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Singular. 
] . asgo. 

G 5 



130 ETYMOLOGY. 

Imperative Mood. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. asgamos. 

3. asga. 3. asgan, 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

1. asga. I. asgamos. 

2. asgas. 2. asgais. 

3. asga. 3. asgan. 

In the other tenses and persons it is conjugated 
like Partir. 

Asolar, to raze. ^ 

Asoldar^ to keep troops in pay. >See Acordar. 

Asonar, to harmonise sounds. J 

Atendei% to attend. See Tender. 

Atenerse, to stand to. See the conjugation of Tenet. 

Atentar, to attempt. See Acertar. 

t Aterecerse, to grove stiff \viih cold. See Abastecer. 

Aterrar, to cast dotvn to the earth. \ c . 

Atestar,* to fill. S bee Acertar ' 

Atormecerse, to grow stupid. See Abastecer. 

Atraer, to attract. See Traer. 

Atravesar, to cross. See Acertar. 

f Atronar, to thunder, (def.) See Acordar. 

Avenir, to happen. l SeeVen ^ 

Avemrse, to agree. J 

Aventar, to fan. I Sft , Acertar . 

Aventarse, to be ajraid. f 

Avergonzar, to shame. 7 A d 

Avergonzarse, to oe ashamed. J 

* Atestar, to attest, is regular. 



Bendecir, to bless. 



ETYMOLOGY. 131 

B. 



Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Singula r. Plura L 

2. bendigo. 

2. bendices. 

3. bendice. 3 bendicen. 

First Preterperfect. 

1. bendije, (bendixe) 1. bendijimos. 

2. bendijiste. 2. bendijisteis. 

3. bendijo. 3. bendijeron, 

Imp era five Mood. 

1. bendigamos. 

2. bendice. 

3. bendiga. 3. bendigan. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

1. bendiga. * 1. bendigamos. 

2. bendigas. 2. bendigais. 

3. bendiga. 3. bendigan. 

First Preterimperfect. 

Sing. 1. bendijera, or bendijese, 

2. bendijeras ? or bendijeses. 

3. bendijera, or bendiyese. 
Plur. 1. bendijeramos, or bendijiesemos. 

2. bendijerais, or bendijeseis. 

3. bendijeran, or bendijesen. 

Future Imperfect. 

1. bendijere. 1. bendijeremos. 

2. bendijeres. 2. bendijereis. 

3. bendijere. 3. bendijeren, 



132 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Perfect Participle. , 

Bendecido, or bendito. 

The other tenses are regular. 

Bregar, to contend. See Acertar. 



C. 



Caber, to contain. 







Indicative Mood. 




Singular. 


Present. 

Plural. 


1. 


quepo. 


Pirst Preterperfect. 


1; 

3. 


cupe. 

cupiste. 

cupo. 


1. cupimos. 

2. cupisteis. 

3. cupieron. 

Future Imperfect. 


1. 
2. 
3. 


eabre. 

cabras. 

cabra. 


1. cabremos. 

2. cabreis. 

3. cabran. 

hnperative Mood. 

1. quepamos 


3. 


quepa. 


3. quepan* 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present* 


1. 
2. 

3. 


quepa. 

quepas. 

quepa. 


1. quepamos 
2 quepais. 
3. quepan. 



ETYMOLOGY. 133 

First Preterimperfect. 

Sing, 1. cupiera, or cupiese. 

2. cupieras, or cupieses. 

3. cupiera, or cupiese. 
Plur. 1. cupieramos, or cupiesemos. 

2. cupierais, or cupieseis. 

3. cupieran, or cupiesen. 

Second Preterimperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

1- cabria, 1. cabriamos. 

2. cabrias. 2. cabriais. 

3. cabria. 3. cabrian. 

Future Imperfect. 

1. cupiere. 1. cupieremos. 

2. cupieres. 2. cupiereis. 
S. cupiere. 3. cupieren. 

The other parts of the verb are regular. 



Caer, to fall 
1. caigo. 



Indicative Mood. 
Present. 



Imperative Mood. 

1. caigamos. 

3. caiga. 3. caigan. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

1. caiga. 1. caigamos. 

2. caigas. 2. caigais. 

3. caiga. 3. caigan. 

This verb is regular in the other parts* 



134 ETYMOLOGY, 

Calentar, to 'warm. See Acertar. 

Canecer, to grotv grey, 1 Abastecer 

Carecer, to want. J * ee ADastecei - 

Cegar, to blind. See Acertar. 

Cefiir, to gird. 1 T . ,. 

Cenirse, to be girt. J See Pedin 

Cerner, to sift See Tender. 

Cerrar, to shut. 1 c a 

Cimentar, to lay foundations. J bee Acertar - 

Cocer, to cook. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 



1. 

2. 

3. 


cuezo.* 
cueces. 
cuece. 


3. cuecen 


2, 
3. 


cuece. 
cueza. 


Imperative Mood. 

S. cuezan. 
Subjunctive Mood. 


i. 

2. 
3, 


cueza. 

cuezas. 

cueza. 


Present. 

3. cuezan. 



This verb has the same irregularity as Absolver, and 
is therefore conjugated in the same manner ; but as the z 
is substituted for the c before a and o final, and as the 
o radical is changed into ue in the preceding tenses and 
persons^ the conjugation of these might have presented 
some difficulty to the inexperienced learner. Some other 
verbs similarly formed will, for the same reason^ be re* 
ferred, not to Absolver, but to the one before us. 

* The 2 before a and o constitutes no irregularity : its insertion 
has been accounted for. See " Changes in Certain Regular Verbs" 



ETYxMOLOGY. 135 

Colar, to strain. See Acordar. 
Colegir, to collect. See Pedir. 

N. B. It changes g into j before a and o. See 
u Changes in Certain Regular Verbs." 
Colgar, to hang up. See Acordar. 
fComedir, to refect. 1 ^ p ^ 

Comedirse, to grow moderate.} 
Comenzar, to commence. See Acertar. 
Compadecerse to pity. 1 Abastecei , 

Comparecer, to appear, J 
Competir, to contend. See Pedir. 
Compeler, to compel, is irregular only in its perfect 

participle, compulse Compelido is also 

used, but less frequently. 
Complacer, to please. See Abastecer. 
Componer, to compose. See Poner. 
Comprobar, to corroborate. See Acordar. 
Concebir, to conceive. See Pedir. 
Concertar, to agree. See Acertar. 
Concluir, to conclude, is irregular only in its perfect 

participle, concluso : it has also concluido. 
Concordar, to agree. 

Condescended to condescend. See Tender. 
Condoler, to condole. See Absolver. 
Conducir, to conduce: 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Singular, Plural. 

1. conduzco. 

First Preterimperfect. 

1. conduje, (conduxe). 1. condujimos. 

2. condujiste. 2. condujisteis. 

3. condujo. 3. condujeron. 

Imperative Mood. 

I. conduzcamos. 

3. conduzca. 3. conduzcan. 



136 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Singular. 

1. conduzca. 

2. conduzcas. 

3. conduzca. 



C 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

Plural. 

1. conduzcamos. 

2. conduzcais. 

3. conduzcan. 

First Preterimperfect. 



condujera, 

l.-l or 

condujese. 

rcondujeras, 

%l or 

Lcondujeses, 

{condujera, 
or 
condujese. 



rcondujeramos, 
].< or 

Lcondujesemos. 
C condujerais, 

2 J or 

Lcondujeseis. 
rcondujeran, 

3 J or 

Lcondujesen. 



Future Imperfect. 

1. condujere. 1. condujeremos. 

2. condujeres. 2. condujereis. 
2. condujere. 3. condujeren. 

All the other tenses, fyc. are regular, 

Conferir, to confer. See Adherir. 

Confesar, to confess. See Acertar. 

Confundir, to confound, is irregular only in its perfect 

participle confuso : it has also one regit' 
larly formed, confundido. 
Conmover, to rouse. See Absolver. 
Conocer, to knoxv. See Abastecer. 
Conseguir, to obtain. See Pedir, and Seguir. 
Consentir, to consent. See Adherir. 
Consolar, to console. See Acordar. 
Consonar, to agree in tone. See Acordar. 
Constrenir, to constrain. See Pedir. 
Contar, to relate. See Acordar. 
Contender, to contend. See Tender. 
Contener, to contain. See Tener after Haber the 

auxiliary. 



ETYMOLOGY. 137 

Contradecir, to contradict. See Decir. But it varies 
from Decir in the second person singular 
of the Imperative. We say contradice, 
contradict thou, not con trad i. 
Contrahacer, to counterfeit. See Hacer. 
Contraer, to contract. See Traer. 
Contravenir, to oppose. See Venir. 
Controverter, to controvert. See Adherir. 
Convalecer, to be recovering. See Abastecer. 
Convencer, to convince, is irregular only in its perfect 
participle, convicto. It has also con- 
vencido. 
Con venir, to agree. See Venir. 

Convertir, to convert. See Adherir. It has also two 
perfect participles, converso and conver- 
tido. 
Corregir, to correct. See Pedir. 
Costar, to cost. See Acordar. 
Crecer, to grotv. See Abastecer. 
Cubrir, to cover, is irregular only in its participle 
perfect, cubierto. 

D. 
Dar, to give. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Singular. Plural. 

It doy. 

First Preterperfect. 

1. di. 1. dimos. 

2. diste. 2. disteis. 

3. did. 3. dieron. . 

Subjunctive Mood. 
First Preterimperfect. 

1. diera, or diese. 1. dieramos, or diesamos. 

2. dieras, or dieses. 2. dierais, or dieseis. 

3. diera, or diese. 3. dieran, or diesen. 



138 ETYMOLOGY. 

Future Imperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. diere. 1. dieremos. 

2. dieres. 2. diereis. 

3. diere. 3. dieren. 

Decaer, to decay. See Caer. 

Decentar, to begin a repast. See Acertar. 

Decir, to say. 





Indicative Mood. 




Present. 


1. digo. 

2. dices. 




3, dice. 


3. dicen. 




First Preterperfect. 


1. dije, (dixe). L dijimos. 

2. dijiste. 2. dijisteis. 

3. dijo. 3. dijeron. 




Future Imperfect. 


1. dire. 


1. diremos. 


2. diras. 


2. direis. 


3. dira. 


3. diran. 




Imperative Mood. 


2. di. 


1. digamos. 


3. diga. 


3. digan. 




Subjunctive Mood. 




Present. 


1. diga. 

2. digas. 

3. diga. 


1. digamos 

2. digais. 

3. digan. 



ETYMOLOGY. 139 

First Preterimperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. dijera, or dijese. 1. dijeramos, or dijesemos. 

2. dijeras, or dijeses. 2. dijerais, or dijeseis, 

3. dijera, or dijese. 3. dijeran, or dijesen. 

Second Preterimperfect. 



1. 


diria. 


1. diriamos. 


2. 


dirias. 


1. diriais. 


8. 


diria. 


3. dirian. 
Future Imperfect. 


1. 


dijere. 


1. dijerernos 


2, 


dijeres. 


2, dijereis. 


3. 


dijere. 


3, dijeren. 

Participles, 
Present. 
Dicie do. 



Perfect. 

Dicho. 

The other parts of this verb are regular. 

Deducir, to deduce. See Conducir. 

Defender, to defend. See Tender. 

Deferir, to defer. See Adherir. 

Degollar, to behead. See Acordar. 

Demoler, to demolish. See Absolver. 

Demostrar, to demonstrate. See Acordar. 

Denegar, to refuse. See Acertar. 

Denostar, to revile. See Acordar. 

Deponer, to depose. See Poner. 

Derrengar, to break the bach. See Acertar. 

Derretir, to melt. See Pedir. 

Desabastecer, to cut off provisions. See Abastecer. 

Desacertar, to mistake. See Acertar. 

Desacordar, to be discordant. See Acordar. 

Desadormecer, to awake. See Abastecer. 

Desalentar, to discourage. See Acertar. 

Desaparecer, to disappear. See Abastecer. 



140 ETYxMOLOGY. 

Desapretar, to loosen. See Acertar. 

Desaprobar, to disapprove. See Acordar. 

Desasosegar, to disquiet. See Acertar. 

Desatender, to neglect. See Tender. 

Desatentar, to perplex. See Acertar. 

Besatravesar, to remove obstacles. See Acertar. 

Desavenir, to disagree. See Venir. 

Descaecer, to droop. See Abastecer. 

Descender, to descend. See Tender. 

Descenir, to ungird. See Pedir. 

jDesimentar., to sap the foundation. See Acertar. 

Descolgar, to take down. \ q \ j 

Descollar, to be taller. J 

Descomedirse, to become rude. See Pedir. 

Descomponer, to discompose. See Poner. 

jDesconcertar, to disconcert. See Acertar. 

Desconsentir, to dissent. See Adherir. 

Desconocer, to disown. See Abastecer. 

Desconsolar, to afflict. \ c A , 

Descontar, to discount. J bee Acordar - 

Descubrir, to discover, is irregidar only in its perfect 

participle, descubierto. 
Desdecir, to retract. See Decir. But the second 
person singular of the Imperative is 
desdice, not desdi. 
Desempedrar, to unpave. \ ~ . 
Desencerrar, to release. J ee ° 
Desengrosar, to diminish. See Acordar. 
Desentender, to feign ignorance. See Tender. 
Desenterrar, to take up a corpse. See Acertar. 
Desentorpecer, to rouse. See Abastecer. 
Desenvolver, to unroll. See Absolver. 
Deservir, to disoblige. See Pedir. 

es a ec^r, i f( . - ne g ee Abastecer. 
Desnaqttecerse, J i 
Desfiocar, to ravel out. See Acordar. 
Desfogarse, to give vent to passion. Idem. 
Desguarnecer, to untrim. See Abastecer. 
Deshacer, to undo. See Hacer. 
Deshelar, to thaw. See Acertar. 
Desherrar, to unshoe horses. Idem. 



ETYMOLOGY. 141 

Desleir, to dilute. See. Pedir. 

Deslucir, to tarnish. See Abastecer.* 

Desmembrar, to dismember. See Acertar. 

Desmentir, to give the lie. See Adhfcrir. 

Desobedecer, to disobey. See Abastecer. 

Desolar, to desolate. ~\ 

Desollar, to play. >See Acordar. 

Desovar, to spawn. J 

Despedir, to dismiss. ~> ~ p ,., 

Despedirse, to take leave, j 

Despedrar, to unpave. 1 

Despernar, to cut off legs. > See Acertar. 

Despertar, to awake, j 

The last of these has two perfect participles. 

despierto and despertado. 

Desplacer^ to displease. See Abastecer. 

Desplegar to unfold. See Acertar. 

Despoblar, to depopulate. See Acordar. 

Destenir, to discolour. See Pedir. 

Desterrar, to exile. See Acertar. 

Destorcer, to untwist. See Cocer. 

Destrocar, to re-exchange. See Acordar. 

Desvanecerse, to vanish away. See Abastecer. 

Desvergonzarse ? to become impudent. See Acordar. 

Detener, to detain. See Tener. 

f Detraer, to detract. See Traer. 

Devolver, to restore. See Absolver. 

Dezmai% to tithe. See Acertar. 

Diferir, to differ. ~\ X A „ 

w . J . . W . ■ > See Adherir. 

Digenr, to digest, j 

Discordar, to disagree. See Acordar. 

Disolver, to dissolve. See Absolver. 

Disponer, to dispose. See Poner. 

Distraer, to distract. See Traer. 

Divertir, to divert. See Adherir. 

* Here the learner will observe that though Abastecer and Deslucir 
agree in the irregularity of admitting s before c in certain tenses and 
persons, .yet they are of different conjugations, and consequently re- 
quire a corresponding difference of termination. The same must be 
observed with respect to other verbs of the third conjugation which 
will be referred to Abastecer ) as Enlucir, &c t 



14:2 ETYMOLOGY. 

Doler, to ache. See Absolver. 
DoRxMiR, to sleep. 

This verb changes the radical o into ue and 
sometimes into u. 







Indicative Mood. 






Present. 




Singula* 


Plural. 


1. 


duermo. 




2. 


duermes. 




3. 


duerme. 


3. duermen. 
First Preterperfect. 


3. 


durmid. 


3. durmieron. 

Imperative Mood. 

1. durmamos. 


2, 


duerme. 




3. 


duenna. 


3. duerman. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present, 


I. 


duerma. 


1. durmamos. 


2. 


duermas. 


2. durmais. 


3. 


duerma. 


3. duerman. 




First Preterimperfect. 




f durmiera, 


f durmieramos, 


i.< 


\ or 


iJ or 




Ldurmiese. 


L durmiesemos. 




r durmieras 


, fdurmierais, 


2.< 


I or 


2 J or 




I durmieses 


Ldurmiesen. 




r durmiera, 


rdurmieran, 


3.< 


■ or 


3 J or 




tdurraiese. 


Ldurmiesen. 



ETYxMOLOGY. 143 

Future Imperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. durmiere. 1. durmieremos. 

2. durmieres. 2. durmiereis. 

3. durmiere. 3. durmieren. 

Participle. 

Present, 
durmiendo. 

The other te?ises, &x. are regular. 

E. 

Elegir, to choose. See Pedir. 

The learner mil observe that before a and o the 
radical g is changed into j, to preserve the pronun- 
ciation of the Infinitive; but this is no irregularity* 
See " Changes in Certain Regular Verbs." Elegir 
has two perfect participles, electo and elegido. 

Embestir, to assail. See Pedir. 

Embravecerse, to become furious.') « », , 

Embrutecerse,, to become brutal. J - 

Emendar, to amend. "\ 

Empedrar , to pave. U A 

Empegar, to patch, f 

Empezar, to begin. J 

Emnlumecer, to become fledged. \ c A , . 

ts i_ j '7 s~ u€C xioastecer. 

Emprobecer, to impoverish. j 

Emporcar, to soil. See Acordar. 

-f Encaballecer, to become hairy. ~) 

Eneallecer, to grove callous. 

Encalvecer, to groiu bald. }»See Abasteeer. 

Encanecer, to become gray vciih age. J 

Encarecer, to become dearer. — 

Encender, to light. See Tender. 

Encensar, to cense. 1 

Encerrar, to shut up. > See Acertar, 

Encomendar, to recommend* J 



114 ETYMOLOGY, 

Encontrar, to find. 1 a A , 
Encordar, to string.! See Acord * r - 
Encrudecerse, to become raw. 1 A , 
Encmelecer, to render cruel. S See Abastecer - 
Encubertar, to cover with a cloth. See Acertar. 
Encubrir, to conceal, is irregular only in its perfect par- 
ticiple* encubierto. 
Endentecer, to cut the teeth. ~) 
Endurecer, to harden. 

Enflaquecer, to grow lean. ySee Abastecer. 

Enfurecerse, to become furious. 
Engrandecer, to aggrandise. 
Engreirse, to grow vain. See Pedir. 
Engrosar, to engross. See Acordar. 
Enloquecer, to become mad. 
Enlucir,* to whiten. 
•^Enraocecer, to grow young, 
Enmohecerse, to grow mouldy. 

Enmudecer, to become dumb. 

t? , 7 7 7 \See Abastecer. 

Ennegrecer^ to blacken. 

Ennoblecer, to ennoble. 

fEnnudecer, to grow knotty. 

Enrarecer, to become scarce. 

Enriquecer, to enrich. 

Enrodar, to break on the wheel. See Acordar, 

Ensangrentar, to stain with blood. See Acertar. 

Ensoberbecerse, to grow haughty. \ Q A] 

Entallecer, to sprout. ^ J bee ADastecer - 

Entender, to understand. See Tender. 

Enternecer, to soften. See Abastecer. 

Enterrar, to bury. See Acertar. 

Entomecer, to swell ) 

Entontecerse, to become foolish. >See Abastecer. 

Entorpecerse, to become idle. J 

jEntrelucir, to shine faintly. See Abastecer, and the 

note to Deslucir. 

Entreoir, to hear indistinctly. See Oir. 

Entretener, to entertain. See Tener. 

Entristecer, to sadden. See Abastecer. 

* See the note to Deslucir. 



ETYMOLOGY. 147 

Errar, to err. See Acertar. 

The irregular persons of this verb commence 
sometimes ivith h, as hierro, I err ; and sometimes 
ivith y, as yerro. Perhaps the latter is the prefer- 
able form ; but in that case the rule falls to the 
ground ; for the verb does not admit i before the 
radical e. Y has been substituted for hi. from the 
simularity of sound. 
t Escalentar, to heat, j ^ Acertar _ 
Escarmentar, to reform. J 
Escarncer, to scoff \ See Abastecei , 

fEselarecer, to entigkten. j 
Escocer, to smart. See Cocer. 

Escribir, to write, is irregular only in the perfect parti- 
ciple escrito. 
Esforzar, to enforce. See Acordar. 
Establecer, to establish. See Abastecer. 
Estar, to be. See its Conjugation. 
Estregai% to scour. See Acer car. 
Estremecerse, to shudder. See Abastecer. 
Estrenir, to bind. See Peclir. 

Excluir, to exclude, is irregular only in its perfect parti- 
ciple excluso : it has also excluido. 
Expedir, to expedite. See Pedir. 

Expel ir, to expel, is irregular only in its -perfect parti- 
ciple expulso : it has also expelido. 
Exponer, to expose. See Poner. 
Expresar. to express, has an irregular participle expreso; 

and a regular one, expresado. 
Extender, to extend. See Tender. 
Extinguir, to extinguish, has two participle*. — the one 
regular, extinguido ; the other irregular, 
extinct o. 
Extraer, to extract. See Traer. 

F. 

Fallecer, to die. "% 

Favorecer, to favour. > See Abastecer. 
Fenecer, to terminate. J 

Fijai\ to fix, has two participles; — regular, fijado; 
irregular, fijo. 

K 2 



1&8 ETYMOLOGY. 

Fortalecer, to fortify. See Abastecer. 
Forzar, to force. See Acordar. 
Fregar, to scrub. See Acertar. 
Freir, to fry. See Pedir. 

This verb has also an irregular perfect participle ', 
frito. Freido is sometimes used. 



G. 

Gemir, to bewail. See Pedir. 
Gobernar, to govern. See Acertar. 
Guarnecer, to garnish. See Abastecer. 

H. 

Haber, to have. See its Conjugation. 
Hacer, to make, or to do. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. ha^o. 

a 

First Preterperfect. 

1. hiee. 1. hicimos. 

2. hiciste. 2. hicisteis. 

3. hizo. 3. hicieron. 

Future Imperfect. 

1. hare. 1. haremos. 

2. haras. 2. hareis. 

3. hara. 3. haran. 

Imperative Mood. 

1. hagamos. 

2. haz. 

3. haga. 3. hagan. 



>See Abastecer. 



ETYMOLOGY. 1 15 

Entristecerse, to become sad. 

Entullecer, to become crippled. 

Entumecer, \ to sxxldL 

Entumecerse, ) 

Envejecer, to grovo old. 

Enverdecer, to grow green. 

Envester, to invest. See Pedir. 

Envolver, to involve. See Absolve r. 

Enxugar, to dry, is irregular only in its perfect par- 
ticiple enxuto. It has also enxugado. 

Equivaler, to be equivalent. See Valer. 

Erguir, to raise. 

This verb has the same irregularity as pedir, but 
its orthography in the irregular tenses and persons 
varies so much that it requires a separate conjuga- 
tion* 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. hiergo, or yergo. 

2. hiergues, or yergues. 

3. hiergue, or yergue. 3. hierguen, or yerguen. 

First Preterperfect. 
3. hirguio, or irguio. 3. hirguieron, or irguieron. 

Imperative Mood. 

1 . hirgamos, or irgamos* 

2. hiergue, or yergue. 

3. hierga, or yerga. 3. hiergan, or yergan. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 

1. hierg'a, or yerga. 1. hirgamos, or irgamos. 

2. hiergas, or yergas. 2. hirgais, or Irgais. 

3. hierga, or yerga. 3. hiergan, or yergan. 

H 



146 ETYMOLOGY. 

First Preterimperfect. 

Singula?'. 

.. r hirguiera, or hirguiese. 

* t irguiera, or irquiese. 

9 f hirquieras, or hirguieses. 

* (Jrguieras, or irguieses. 
hirguiera, or hirguiese. 



■{! 



Plural. 



, j hirguieramos, or hirguiesemos. 

* ^ irguieramos, or irguiesemos. 
q f bifguieraisj or hirguieseis. 

J * \ irguierais, or irguieseis. 
« X hirguieran, or hirguiesen. 
C irguieran, or irguiesen. 

Future Imperfect. 

Singular. 

-1. hirguiere, or irguiere. 

2. hirguieres, or irguieres. 

3. hirguiere, or irguiere. 

Plural. 

1. hirguieremos, or irguieremos. 

2. hirguiereis, or irguiereis. 

3. hirguieren, or irguieren. 

Participle. 
Present. 
Hirguiendo, or irguiendo. 

The other icnses } 8jc. are regular. 





ETYMOLOGY. 




Judical iv e Mood. 


Singular* 


Present. 

Plural 


1. voy. 

2. vas. 

3. va. 


1. vamps. 

2. vais. 

3. van. 




Preterim perfect, 


1. iba. 

2. ibas. 

3. iba. 


1. ibamos. 

2. ibais. 

3. iban. 




First Preterperfeet. 


1. fui. 

2. fuiste. 

3. fue. 


1. faimos. 

2. fuisteis. 

3. fueron. 




Future Imperfect. 


1. ire. 

2. Iras. 

3. ira. 


1. iremos. 

2. ireis. 

3. iran. 




Imp era tiv e Mo o d. 


2. ve. 

3. vaya. 


1. vavamos. 

2. id.* 

3. vayan. 




Subjunctive Mood. 


1. vaya. 

2. vayas. 

3. vaya. 


Present. 

1. vayamos. 

2. vayais. 

3. vayan. 



151 



First Preterimperfect, 

1. fuere, or fuese. 1. fueramos, or fuesemos. 

2. fueras, or fueses, 2. fuerais, or fueseis. 

3. fuera, or fuese. 3. fueran. or fuesen. 



152 







ETYMOLOGY. 






Second Preterimperfect. 




Singula 


r. Plural. 


1. 
2. 

3. 


iria. 

irias. 

iria. 


1. iriamos. 

2. iriais. 

3. irian. 


3. 
2. 
3. 


fuere. 

fueres. 

fuere. 


Future Imperfect. 

L fueremos 

2. fuereis. 

3. fueren. 

Participles. 

Present. 
Yendo. 

Perfect. 
Ido. 



Jugar, to play. See Acordar. 

To preserve the sound of the Infinitive, this verb 
always admits u between the g and e ; as juegue, 
juegues, juegue, &c. But this constitutes no ir- 
regularity. See " Changes in Certain Regular 
Verbs." 
Jan tar, to join, has an irregular perfect participle 
junto, and a regular one, juntado. 

L. 

Lucir, to shine. See Abastecer, and the note to Desluciiv 

LL. 

Llover, to rain. See Defective Verbs. 

The perfect participle of this verb is regular 9 
Uovido. 



ETYMOLOGY. 149 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

1. haga. 1. hagamos. 

2. hagas. 2. hagais. 

3. haga. 3. hagan. 

First Preterimperfect. 

/hiciera, ( hicieramos, 

or l.< or 
Lhieiese. ( hiciesemos. 

rhicieras, l hicerais, 

2 J or 2.1 or 
Ijiicieses. C hicieseis. 

r hiciera, r hicieran, 

3.< or 3.^ or 
Lhieiese. Lhiciesen. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

1. haria. 1. hariamos. 

2. harias. 2. hariais. 

3. haria. 3. harian. 

Future Imperfect. 

1. hiciere. 1. hicieremos. 

2. hicieres. 2. hiciereis. 

3. hiciere. 3. hicieran. 

Participle. 

Perfect. 
Hecho. 

37*e other parts of this verb are regular. 

Hartar, to satiate, is regular except in its perfect partici- 
ple harto ; but hartado is also used. 
Heder, to stink. See Tender. 



150 • ETYMOLOGY. 

Helar, to freeze. See Acertar. 

Hender, to cleave. See Tender. 

Herir, to wound. See Adherir. 

Herrar, to shoe horses. See Acertar, 

Hervir, io boil. See Adherir. 

Holgar, to repose. ) ., » 3 
ti if \ ' i 7 VSee Acerdar. 

Hollar, to trample. J 

Humedecer, to moisten. See Abastecer. 



Im pedir, to impede. See Pedir. 

Imponer, to impose. See Poner. 

Imprimir, to print, is irregular in Us perfect participle 

only, impreso. 
Incluir, to include, has two participles, mcluso, irregular, 

and incluido, regular. 
Incurrir, to incur, has also two perfect participles, 

incurso, irregular, and incurrido ; regular. 
Indisponer, to indispose. See Poner. 
Inducir, to induce. See Conducir. 
Inferir, io infer. See Adherir. 
Infernar, to curse. See Acertar. 
Insertar, to insert, is irregular in its perfect participle 

only, inserto ; it has also insertado. 
Intervenir, to intervene. See Venir. 
Introducir, to introduce. See Conducir. 
Invernar, to winter. See Acertar. 
Invertir, to invert. See Adherir. 

This verb has also an irregular participle, in- 
verso ; and a regular one, invertido. 
Investir, to invest. See Pedir. 
Injerir, to graft. See Adherir. 

This verb has tivo participles perfect, injerido, 
regular ; and injerto, irregular. 
Ir, to go. 

This verb is one of the most irregular in the 
Spanish language. Its conjugation in the simple 
tenses will therefore be given entire* 



ETYMOLOGY. 155 

Pedir, to demands 

This verb changes the radical e into i in the fol- 
lowing tenses and persons : 







Indicative Mood. 






Present. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


1. 


pido. 




2. 


pides. 




3, 


pide. 


3. piden. 
First Preterperfect. 


a 


pidio. 


3. pidieron. 

Imperative Mood. 

1. pidamos. 


0, 


pide. 




3. 


pida. 


3. pidan. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 


1. 


pida. 


1. pidamos. 


2. 


pidas. 


2. pi dais. 


% 


pida. 


3. pidan. 




First Preterimperfect 




rpidiera, 


rpidieramos 


I. 


1 .°r 


l.< or 




Lpidiese. 


Lpidiesemos, 




f pidieras, 


f pidierais. 


2, 


< or 


% \ or 




Lpidieses. 


\ pidieseis. 




f pidiera, 


rpidieran, 


3, 


< or 


3. J or 




Lpidiese. 


Lpidiesen. 

Future Imperfect. 


i. 


pidiere. 


1. pidieremos. 


2. 


pi die res. 


2. pidiereis. 


3. 


pidiere. 


3. pidieren. 



156 ETYMOLOGY. 

Participle. 

Present. 
Pidiendo. 

All the oilier parts are regular. 

Pegar, to pitch. 1 g . . 

Pensar, CUiri. J *** Acertar ' 

Perder, /o lose. See Tender. 

Perecer, to perish. See Abastecer. 

Perfeccionar, to perfect, has two participles, perfect*) 

and perfeccionado. 
Perniquebrar, to break legs. See Acertar. 
Perseguir, to pursue. See Pedir and Seguir. 
Pertenecer, to pertain. See Abastecer. 
Perverter, to pervert. See Adherir. 
Plegar, to fold. See Acertar. 
Poblar, to people. See Acordar. 
Poder,* to be able : 



Singular. 



Indicative Mood. 
Present. 



1. puedo. 

2. puedes. 

3. puede. 3. pueden. 

First Preterperfect. 

1. pude. 1. pudimos, 

2. pudiste. 2. pudisteis. 

3. pudo. 3. pudieron. 

Future Imperfect. 

3. podre. 1. podremos. 

2. podras. 2. podreis. 

3. podra. 3. podran. 

* Poder cannot from its very nature admit an Imperative. 



ETYMOLOGY. 153 



M. 



f Magrecer, to pine. See Abastecer. 

Maldecir, to curse. See Bendecir. 

Manifestar, to manifest. See Acertar. 

Mantener, to maintain. See Tener. 

Marchitar, to fade, has two participles, marchito and 

marcliitado. 
Medir, to measure. See Pedir. 
Mentar, to mention. See Acertar, 
Mentir, to lie. See Adherir. 
Merecer, to merit. See Abastecer. 
Merendar, to take an afternoon's repast. See Acertar. 
Mohecerse, to grow mouldy. See Abastecer. ^ 

Moler, to grind. See Absolver. 

The perfect participle of this verb is regular, 
molido. 
Morder, to bite. See Absolver. 
Morir, to die, is conjugated like Dormir, except that its 

participle perfect is irregular, muertc 
Mostrar, to show. See Acordar. 
Mover, to move. See Absolver. 



N. 



Nacer, to be born. See Abastecer. 
Negar, to deny. See Acertar. 
Negrecer, to grow black. See Abastecer, 
Neyar, to snow. See Defective Verbs. 



O. 

Obedecer, to obeu. 1 n K , 

rvu™ ,™ \, * / 7 J- See Abastecer. 

Obscurecer, to darken, j 

Obtener, to obtain. See Tener. 

Ofrecer, to offer. See Abastecer. 

Oir, to hear. 

This verb admits g after i in the t following tenses 

and persons ; 

h 5 



154 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Indicative Mood. 



Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

It oigo. 

Imperative Mood. 

1. oigamos. 

3. oiga. S. oigan. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

!•' °iga. 1. oigamos. 

2. oigas. 2. oigais. 

3. oiga. 3. oigan. 

T%e other parts of this verb are regular.* 

Oler, fo smell. See Absolver. 

The irregular persons of this verb begin uoith h, as 
huelo, hueles, huele, &c. 
Omitir, to omit, is irregular in its perfect participle only, 

omiso : it has also omitido; 
Opener, to oppose. See Poner. 

Oprinair, to oppress, is irregular in its perfect participle 
only, opreso : it has also oprimido. 



Pacer, to graze. *\ 

Padecer, to suffer. [ c * , . 

t> 4 >See libastecer. 

Parecer, to seem. 

Parecerse, to resemble 



./ 



* The Participle present is written oisndo, or oyendo, but the latter 
form more frequently. And indeed many writers substitute y for i 
in all the tenses of oir ; as oygo, oygamos, &c. In the orthography 
of this and of all other verbs, we have fallowed the late decisions of 
the Academy. 



ETYMOLOGY. 159 

Second Preterimperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. pondria. 1. pondriamos. 

2. pondrias. 2. pondriais, 

3. pondria. 3. pondrian. 

Future Imperfect. 

1. pusiere. 1. pusieremos. 

2. pusieres. 2. pusiereis. 

3. pusiere. 3. pusieren. 

Participle. 

Perfect. 
Puesto. 

T%£ other persons, fyc. are regular. 

Predecir, to predict. See Decir. 

Preferir, to prefer. See Adherir. 

Prender, to seize, has tvco participles, preso, irregular, 
and prendido, regular. 

Prep oner, to place before. See Poner. 

Prescribir, to prescribe, is irregular in its perfect partici- 
ple only, prescrito : it has also prescribido. 

Presenth.% to perceive beforehand. See Adherir. 

Pre&uponer, to presuppose. See Poner. 

Prevalecer, to prevail. See Abastecer. 

Prevenir, to prevent. See Venir. 

Prever, to foresee. See Ver. 

Probar, to prove. See Acordar. 

Producir, to produce. See Conducir. 

Profer, to utter. See Adherir. 

Prornover, to move. See Absolver. 

Proponer, to propose. See Poner. 

Proscribir, to proscribe, is irregular in its perfect parti* 
ciple only, proscrito. 

Proseguir, to prosecute. See Pedir and Seguir. 



160 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Proveer, to provide, is irregular in its perfect parti- 
ciple only, provisto : it has also proveido, 
regular. 

Provenir, to originate. See Venir. 



Quebrar, to break. See Acer tar. 
Querer, to tvish or to love. 



Singular. 

1 quiero. 

2. quieres. 

3. quiere. 



Indicative Mood. 
Present 



Plural. 



3. quieren. 



First Preterperfect. 

1. quise. I. quisimos, 

2. quisiste. 2. quisisteis. 

3. quiso. 3. quisieron. 



Future Imperfect. 



1. querre. 

2. querras. 

3. querra. 



2. quiere. 

3. quiera. 



1. querremos. 

2. querreis. 

3. querran. 



Imperative Mood. 



3. quieran. 



1. quiera. 

2. qui eras. 

3. quiera- 



Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 



quierarr. 



ETYMOLOGY. 157 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. pueda. 

2. puedas. 

3. pueda. 3. puedan. 

First Preterimperfect. 

fpudiera, rpudieramos, 

I.< or 1.1 or 

Lpudiese. Lpudiesemos. 

fpudieras, rpudierais, 

2.1 or 2.1 or 

Lpudieses. tpudieseis. 

rpudiera, rpudieran, 

3 J or 3.1 or 

Lpudiese. Lpudiesen. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

1. podria. 1. podriamos. 

2. podrias. 2. podriais. 

3. podria. 3. podrian. 

Future Imperfect. 

1. pudiere. J. pudieremos. 

% pudieres. 2. pudiereis. 

3. pudiere. 3. pudiefen. 

Participle. 

Present. 
Pudiendo. 

The other parts are regular. 



$ 




ETYMOLOGY. 


>NEB 


i, to place. 


Indicative Mood. 


- 


Singular. 


Present. 

Plural. 


1. 


pongo. 


First Preterperfect. 


1. 

2. 
3. 


puse. 

pusiste. 

puso. 


1. pusimos. 

2. pusisteis. 

3. pusieron. 


1. 
2. 

3. 


pondre. 
pond r as. 
pondra. 


Future Imperfect. 

1. pondremos. 

2. pondreis. 

3. pondran. 

Imperative Mood. 


2. 
3. 


pon. 
ponga. 


1. pongamos. 
3. pongan. 






Subjunctive Mood. 


1. 

2. 
S. 


ponga. 

pongas. 

ponga. 


Present. / 

1. pongamos. 

2. pongais. 

3. pongan. 

First Preterimperfect. 




rpusiera, 


rpusieramos, 



IU or l.J or 

Lpusiese Lpusiesemos. 

r pusieras, r pusierais, 

2.< or 2.1 or 

Lpusieses. tpusieseis. 

rpusiera, f pusieran, 

3J 'or 3.4 or 

L pusiese. (, pusiesen. 



ETYMOLOGY. 163 

Reverdecer, to groiv again. See Abastecer. 

Reverter, to return. See Tender. 

Revestir, to re-invest. See Pedir. 

Re volar, to fly again. ") c A , 

5 j j b \. & ee Acordar. 

Kevolcarse, to tvauow. j 

Revolver, to revolve. See Absolver. 

Rodar, to roll. 1 K j 
t»„ . > See Acordar. 

Kogar, to pray. J 

Romper, to break, is irregular in its perfect participle 
only, roto : it has also rompido. 



Saber, to Jcnotv, 



S. 



Indicative Mood. 



Present. 

Singtdar. Plural. 



1. se. 



First Preterperfect. 
i« supe. 1. supimos. 

2. supiste. 2. supisteis. 

3. supo. 3. supieron. 

Future Imperfect. 
I- sabre. 1. sabremos. 

2. sabras. 2. sabreis. 

3. sabra. 3. sabran. 

Imperative Mood. 

1. sepamos. 

S. sepa. 3. S epan. 

S u bju nctive Mo o d. 

Present. 
*• se P&« 1. sepamos. 

2. sepas. 2. sepais. 

3* se P a - 3. sepan. 



162 ETYMOLOGY. 

Reforzar, to re-inforce. See Acordar. 

Regar, to mater. See Acertar. 

Regir, to rule. See Pedir. 

Regoldar, to belch. See Acordar. 

Rehacer, to do again. See Hacer. 

Reir, to laugh. See Pedir. 

Relucir, to shine. See Abastecer, and the note to 

Deslucir. 

Remanecer, to remain. See Abastecer. 

Remendar, to mend. See Acertar. 

Remorder, to bitefre quently. 1 c », j 

Remover, to remove. f 

Renacer, to be reproduced. See Abastecer. 

Rendir, to render. 7 c p r 

Rendirse, to surrender one's-self. § 

Renegar, to abjure. See Acertar. 

Renovar, to renetv. See Acordar. 

Renir, to quarrel. 1 c -n -,. 
D . • s . > See Pedir. 

Repetir, to repeat. J 

Replegar, to fall bach. See Acertar. 

Reponer, to replace. See Poner. 

Reprobar, to reprove. See Acordar. 

Reproducer, to reproduce. See Conducir. 

Requebrar, to cajole. See Acertar. 

Requerir, to require 1 g Mhev ^ 

Resentirse, to resent, j 

Rescontar, to balance accounts. 1 g Acordar 

Resollar, to breathe. 5 

Resolver, to resolve. See Absolver. 

Resonar, to resound. See Acordar. 

Restablecer, to re-establish. See Abastecer. 

Retemblar, to vibrate. See Acertar. 

Retenir, to retain. See Tenir. 

Re tent ar, to threaten a relapse. See Acertar. 

Retenir, to dye again. See Pedir. 

Retorcer, to twist. See Cocer. 

Retraer, to retract. "\ 

Retraerse, to take refuge. >See Traer. 

Retrotraer, to bring bach. J 

Reventar, to burst. See Acertar. 

Rever, to revievo. See Ver. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



167 



Imperative Mood. 
Singular. Plural. 





• 




1. traigamos, 




3. traiga, 




3. traigan. 






Subjunctive Mood. 








Present. 




1. traiga. 




1. traigamos, 




2. traigas. 




2. traigais. 




3. traiga. 




3. traigan. 






First 


Preterimperfect. 




r trajera, 




1 trajerarnos, 


1.1 


or 




1 . < or 




Ltrajese. 




{ trajesemos. 




r trajeras, 




f trajerais, 


2.< 


' or 




2 J or 




ttrajeses. 




Ltrajeseis. 


i 


r trajera, 




t trajeran, 


3. 


I or 


* 


3J or 




Ltrajese. 




Ltrajesen. 



Future Imperfect. 

1. trajere. 1. trajeremos. 

2. trajeres. 2. trajereis. 

3. trajere. 3. trajeren. 

The oilier parts of the verb are regidar, 

Transcender, to transcend. l~ T , 

Trascender, to discover. J bee m * aeT - 

Trascolar, to pierce. 1 c . 1 
rr 3 ± j? ± l^otfe Acordar. 

Trascordarse, to forget, j 

Trasegar, to decant. See Acertar. 

Trasonar, to dream. See Acordar. 

Trasponer, to transpose. See Poner. 

Trocar, to barter. See Acordar. 

This verb changes c into qu before e, but this is 

no irregularity, See " Changes in Certain Regular 

Verbs." 



168 etymology^ 

Tronar, to thunder. See Defective Verbs, 
Tropezar, to stumble. See Acertar. 

V. 

Valer, to be worth. See Salir/ 

Here the learner tvill again observe that though 
salir, and valer, have the same irregularities, they 
are of different conjugations, and consequently re~ 
quire a corresponding difference of inflexion. The 
second person singular of the Imperative of valer, 
is vale, but o/'salir, sal. 

Venir, to come. 







Indicative Mood. 






Present. 




Singular. Plural. 


1. 


vengo. 




2. 


vienes. 




3. 


viene. 


3. vienen. 
First Preterperfect. 


1. 


vine. 


1. vinimos. 


2. 


viniste. 


2. vinisteis. 


3. 


vino. 


3. vinieron. 
Future Imperfect. 


1. 


vendre. 


1. vendremos 


2. 


vendras. 


2. vendreis. 


3. 


vendra. 


3. vendran. 

Imperative Mood. 

1. vengamos. 


2. 


ven. 




3. 


venga. 


3. vengan. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Present. 


1. 


venga. 


1. vengamos. 


2. 


ven gas. 


2. vengais. 


3. 


venga. 


3. vengan. 





ETYMOLOGY. 




Subjunctive Mood. 




Present. 
Singular. Plural. 


1. 

2. 
3, 


saiga. 1. salgamos. 
saigas. 2. salgais. 
saiga. 3. salgan. 




Second Preterimperfect. 


1. 

2. 

3, 


saldria. 1. saldriamos 
saldrias. 2. saldriais. 
saldria. 3. saldrian. 



165 



The other parts of this verb are regularly formed. 

Satisfacer, to satisfy. See Hacer. 

The second person singular of the Imperative 
is satisfaz, or satisface. 

Seducir, to seduce. See Conducir. 
Segar, to reap. See Acertar. 
Seguir, to follow. See Pedir. 

This verb and its compounds , lose the u bejorc a 
or o. Thus we say, sigo, (not siguo) I follow ; 
siga, [not sigua) let him follow, fyc. 

| em t brar '^ f)s ee Acertar. 
bentarse, to sit. J 

Sentir, to feel. See Adherir. 

Serrar, to saw. See Acertar. 

Ser, to be. See its conjugation. 

Servir, to serve. See Pedir. 

Sobreponer. to place over. See Poner. 

Sobresalir, to surpass. See Salir. 

Sobrevenir to happen. See Poner. 

Soldar, to solder. 1 . , 

Soltar, to release. J SeeAcordar - 

fSolver, to solve. See Absolver. 

Sonar, to sound. | «,. . • , _ 

Sonar, to dream. f* ee Ac01dar - 

Sonreirse, to smile. See Pedir. 



166 ETYMOLOGY. 

Sosegar, to repose. 1 s Acertar# 

Sosegarse, to grow tranquil, j 

Sostener, to sustain. See Tener. 

Soterrar, to bury. See Acertar. 

Substraer, to subtract. See Traer. 

Sugerir, to suggest. See Adherir. 

Suponer, to suppose. See Poner. 

Suprimir, to suppress, is irregular in its perfect parti- 
ciple only, supreso ; it has also one re* 
gularly formed \ suprimido. 

T. 

Temblar, to tremble. See Acertar. 
Tender, to spread out. 

This verb and its compounds admit i before the 
radical e in the same tenses and persons as acertar ; 
but as tender and acertar are of different conjuga- 
tions^ the learner will observe that they require a 
corresponding difference of termination. Thus in 
the Indicative Present, acierto, aciertas, acierta, 
tiendo, tiendes, tiende, &c. 

Tener, to have. See its conjugation. 
Tenir, to dye. See Pedir. 
Tentar, to attempt. See Acertar. 
Torcer, to twist. See Cocer. 
Tostar, to toast. See Acordar. 
Traducir, to translate. See Conducir. 

Traer, to bring. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. traigo. 

First Preterimperfect. 

1. traje (traxe). I. trajimos. 

2. trajiste. 2. trajisteis. 

3. trajd. 3. trajeron. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



169 



First Preterimperfect. 
Singular. Plural. 

I vinieramos, 

lm \ or 

{ viniesemos. 

rvinierais. 
2.1 or 

Lvinieseis. 

rvimeran, 
3.1 or 

Lviniesen, 

Second Preterimperfect. 

1. vendria. 1. vendriamos. 

2. vendrias. 2. vendriais. 

3. vendria. 3. vendrian. 



fviniera, 
lJ or 

Lviniese. 
r vinieras, 
lJ or 

l.vinieses, 
fviniera, 
3 J or 

Lviniese. 



T. viniere. 

2. vinieres. 

3. viniere. 



Future Imperfect 

1 
2 
9. 



vinieremos. 
viniereis. 

vinieren. 



Participle. 
Present. 
Viniendo. 
The other parts of the verb are regularly fm 
Ver,* to see. 

Indicative Mood. 
Present, 



1. veo. 



2. 
3. 



veia, or via. 
veias, or vias 
veia, or via. 



Preterimperfect. 

1. veiamos; or viamosi 



2. veiais, or viais. 

3. veian, or vian. 



*The irregularity of ^ is very slight: it consist* only fa, v 
taming the e before sorne of the persons and tense?, 



170 ETYMOLOGY. 

Imperative Mood. 
Singular. Plural 

1. veamos. 

3- vea. S. vean. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 
!• vea. l. veamos. 

2. veas. 2. veais. 

3. vea. 3. vean. 

Participle. 

Perfect. 

Visto. 

■T&£ other parts of the verb are regular* 

Verter, to shed. See Tender. 
Vestir, to clothe. See Pedir. 

\°o\czr!°t{iverset. } See Acordar - 

Volver, to return . ~) . , , 
xr*a~~J*~ ^ 7 > r See Absolver. 
V olverse, to become. J 

Z. 

Zaherir, to upbraid. See Adherir. 



EXERCISE ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS.* 

(1.) I hate. Thou absolvest. I guess. Thou 

aborrecer absolver acertar 

approvest. I breakfast. Thou warnest. He increases, 

aprobar ahnorzar advertir acreceniar 

* Though in many of the following verbs few of the tenses, &x\ are 
irregular, yet the exercise will be extended to them all. This mode 
will oblige the learner to refer constantly to the preceding conjuga- 
tions, to discover which tenses are irregular, and whieh are not so ; 
and it will show him in what the irregularity of each verb consists. 
And as the greater number of the irregular participles are not used in 
forming the compound tenses, he will do well before he proceeds any 
farther, to read carefully over the section on Participles. And 
\*hen the verb ends m car, gar, &c. let him refer to "Changes in 
Certain Re^dar Verbs?' 



ETYMOLOGY. 171 

He acquires. He agrees. We go. We appear. 

adquerir acordar ir aparecer 

You walk. They wager. They hire. They assent. 

andar apostar arrendar aseniir 

I move. Thou contendest. He blesses. I sift. Thou 

mover competir bendecir cerner 

fannest. He collects. We awake. You discolour. 
event ar colegir despertar destenir 

They disobey. They unroll. (2.) I was drying. 

desobedecer desenvoher enxugar 

Thou wast erring. He was dismissing. We were 

errar despedir 

disposing. You were assailing. They were entertaining. 
disponer embestir entreiener 

I was impoverishing. Thou wast lighting. He was 

emprobecer encendar 

burying. We were hearing. You were laughing. 
enterrjar oir reir 

They were ruling. (3.) I retracted. Thou didst 

regir retraer 

breathe. He did twist. We came. You saw. They 
resollar torcer venir ver 

reproved. I resolved. Thou broughtest. He 
•reprobar resolver truer 

conducted. We proposed. You introduced. They 
conducir proponer introducir 

fryed. (4.) I have played. Thou hast seen. He has 
Jreir jugar 

proscribed. We have cursed. You have oppressed, 
proscribir maldecir oprimir 

They have concealed.— (5.) I had elected. Thou 

encubrir elegir 

hadst dissolved. He had undone. We had predicted. 

disolver deshacer predecir 

You had perfected. They had placed before. — -(6.) 

perfeccionar preponer 

I shall be able. Thou wilt place. He will go. We 

poder poner 

shall walk. You will promote. They will scrub. I 
andar promover fregar 

i2 



172 ETYMOLOGY. 

shall smart. Thou wilt presuppose. He will lose. 

escocer presuponer perder 

We shall go out. You will sustain. They will make. 

salir sostener hacer 

(7.) I shall have provided. Thou wilt have 

proveer 
grafted. He will have inserted. We shall have joined. 
injerir insertar juntar 

"You will have exposed. They will have fixed. (8.) 

exponer fij ar 

Have thou. Let him suffer. Let him expose. 
iener padecer exponer 

Satisfy thou. Let him prevail. Stain thou. Let him 
satisfacer prevalecer tenir 

recommend. Let him flay. Let him invest. Let us 
encomendar desollar envestir 

untwist. Let us wrap. Let us enrich. Let them 
destorcer envolver enriquecer 

oppose. Let them boil. Let them manifest. — — (9.) 
oponer hervir manifestar 

That I may utter. Though thoumayst play. Though 

prqferir aunque jugar 

he may prevent. That we may prevail. Though you 

prevenir prevalecer 

produce. Though they fold. Though I may think. 
producir plegar pensar 

Though thou mayst invert. Though he may prosecute. 
invertir proseguir 

T hw e may come. Though you may translate. That 
venir tradacir 

they may shed. (10.) That I might go out. Though he 

verier salir 

should return. Though he retained. That we might bring 
volver retener retro- 

back- That you might surpass. That they might cajole. 
traer sobresalir requebrar 

Though I saw. Though thou didst repeat. Though 

rer repetir 

he replaced. That we should transpose. That you 
reponer trasponer 



ETYMOLOGY. 173 

might refer. That they might demand. (11.) I 

referir pedi'r 

would have. Thou wouldst rest. He would obtain. 
tener holgar obtener 

We should make again. You would yield. They would 

rehacer rendir 

bite. I would prevent. Thou wouldst smell. He would 
morder oler 

entertain. We would go out. You would obtain. They 
entretener 

would place. (12.) Though I have discovered. That 

poner descubrir 

thou mayst have deposed. Though he has concluded. 

deponer concluir 

That we may have foreseen. Though you have 
antever 

written. Thattheymay have preferred. (13.) Though 

escribir. anteponer 

I had foreseen. Though thou mightst have confounded. 

confundir 
That he should have retracted. Though we had said. 
desdecirse decir 

That you might have compelled. Though they should 
compel er 

have blessed. (14.) I would have cursed. Thou 

bendecir maldecir 

wouldst have broken. He would have expressed. We 

romper expresar 

should have converted. You would have excluded* 
converter excluir 

They would have joined. (15.) If I should review. 

Juntar rever 

If thou shouldst require. If he should recline. If we 

requerir recostar 

should remove. If you should abjure. If they should 

remover renegar 

barter. If I should overset. If thou shouldst (become 
trocar volcar 

tranquil). If he should subtract. If we should twist. 
sosegarse substraer forcer 



174< ETYMOLOGY. 

If you should indispose. If they should unfold. 

indisponer desplegar 

(16.) If I should have satisfied. If thou shouldst have 

satisfacer 
returned. If he should have suppressed. If we should 
volver suprimir 

have seized. If you should have satiated. If they 
prouder hartar 

should have died. (17.) To have excluded. To 

morir excluir 

have manifested. To have released. To have 

manifest ar soltar 

extinguished. Coming. Cursing. Supposing. 
extinguir venir suponer 

Spreading out. Guessing. Having resolved. Having 
tender aceriar resolver 

fryed. Having provided. 
jfreir proveer 



VERBS DEFECTIVE. 

Of these, the following, which are conjugated in the 
third person singular only, are generally, though im- 
properly, termed Impersonal. 

Amanecer, to grotv light, or to damn.* 

Indicative. Present, amanece, it grows light, &c. 
Freterimp. amanecia. 
First Preierp. amanecio. 
Second Preterp. ha amanecido. 
Pretetphip. hubo, or habia amanecido. 
FuL Imp. amanecera. 
Fat. Per. hafara amanecido. 

* Amanecer and anochecer are sometimes employed with all the 
persons ; and in these cases they may be considered as denoting the 
situation of their subject at dawn or at evening : Amanecimos en Lon- 
dres ; we were in London at break of day : Anochecimos en el lugar ; 
Night closed upon us in the village. The former verb may some- 
times be translated to go to sleep, to lie down ; and the latter by to 
awake, to rise zip. 



ETYMOLOGY. 175 

Imperative. amanezca. 

Subjunct. Present, amanezca. 

First Preterimp. amaneciera, or amaneciese. 
Second Preterimp. amaneceria. 
Preterp. hay a amanecido. 
First Preterplup. hubiera^ 

or >amanecido. 
hubiese, J 
Second Preterplup. habria amanecido* 
Fat. Imp. amaneciere. 
Fut. Per, hubiere amanecido. 
Infinitive. Present, amanecer. 

Perfect, haber amanecido. 
Participles. Present, amaneciendo. 
Perfect, amanecido. 
Com. Per. habiendo amanecido. 

Anochecer, to grovo dark, is similarly conjugated. 

Nevar, to snow. 

Indicative. Present, nieva, it snotvs. 

Preterimp. nevaba. 

First Preterp. nevo. 

Second Preterp. ha nevado. 

Preterplup. hubo, or habia nevado. 

Fut. Imp. nevara. 

FuU Per. habra nevado* 
Imperative. nieve. 

Subjunctive. Present, nieve. 

First Preterimp. nevara, or nevase. 

Second Preterimp. nevaria, 

Preterper. haya nevado. 

First Preterplup. hubiera,"* 

or > nevado. 
hubiese. J 

Second Preterplup. habria nevado. 

Fut. Imp. nevare. 

Fut. Per. hubiere nevado. 
Infinitive. Present, nevar. 

Perfect, haber nevado. 



176 ETYMOLOGY. 

Participles. Present, nevando. 
Perfect, nevado. 
Comp. Per. habiendo nevado. 

Helar, to freeze, is conjugated in the same manner. 
Tkonar, to thunder. 

Indicative. Present, trueno, it thunders, 

Preterimp. tronaba. 

First Preterp. trono. 

Second Preterp. ha tronado. 

Preterplup. hubo, or habia tronado* 

Fid. Imp. tronara. 

Fut. Per. habra tronado. 
Imperative. truene. 

Subjunctive. Present, truene. 

First Preterimp. tronara, or tronase. 

Second Preterimp. tronaria. 

Preierper. haya tronado. 

First Preterplup. hubiera, ) 

or Mronado> 
hubiese, j 

Second Preterplup. habria tronado. 

Fut. Imp. tronare. 

Fut. Per. hubiere tronado. 
Infinitive. Present, tronar. 

Perfect, haber tronado. 
Participles. Present, tronando. 

Perfect, tronado. 

Comp. Per. habiendo tronado. 

Llover, to rain, is conjugated in the same manner, 
but as it is of a different conjugation, its inflexions are 
also different. See Absoher. 

Escarchar, to freeze ; ghaxizar, to hail ; lloviz- 
nar, to mizzle ; and relampaguear, to lighten; are 
all regular, and conjugated like the third person sin- 
gular of Amar. 

Haber, when impersonal, signifies to be. 
Indicative. Present. hay 3 there is, or there are. 



ETYMOLOGY, 177 

Indicative. Preterimp. habia, f there was, or 

First Preterper. hubo, \ there mere. 

Sec. Preterper. ha habido, {fa™^* 

Freterplup. hubo,"! ^^ ^ /md 

habia, J 

Fid- Imp. habra, there mil be. 

-n j. tj ^ u > -u w i S there will have 
Fut. Per. habra habido, -< 7 

And so on throughout the verb. 

Hacer, when impersonal, signifies to be. 

Indicative. Present, hace, it is. 

Preterimp. hacia, it was. 

First Preterp. hizo, it was. 

Sec. Preterp. ha hecho, it has been. 

Preterplup. h ub , ^ 

or > hecho, it had been. 
habia, J 
Fut. Imp. hara, ft will he. 
Fut. Per. habra hecho, it mil have been. 

And so on throughout the verb. 

Some personal verbs are frequently conjugated im- 
personally. 

The following are employed only in the annexed 
persons and tenses : 

Placer, to please. 

Indicative, Present r Sd per. sing, place^ it pleases. 

Preterimp. — — placia,! ., , 7 

77- . & ± i > iv pleased. 

Jb irst Preterp. ■ plugo, j l 

Subjunctive. Present, — pfegue, it may please. 

First Preterimp. — pluguiera, 1 itmight 

pluguiese, J please* 

Fut. Imp. =—— - pluguiere, it should please. 

The four last persons are used in these instances 

only : Pleguc, pluguiera, or pluguiese a Dios ; would to 

God : Si me pluguiere , if it should please me, 

10 



i 73 ETYMOLOGY. 

Podrir, to rot. 

Imperative. Sec. Per. Plur' podrid, rot you. 

Subju. Sec. Preterimp. 3d Per. Sing, podriria, { hetvould 

Infinitive, Present, podrir, to rot. 
Participle, Perfect, podrido, rotted. 

Soler, to he accustomed. 
Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. suelo. 1. solemos. 

2. sueles. 2. soleis. 
8. suele. 3. suelen. 

Preterirnperfect. 

1. solia. 1. soliamos. 

2. solias. 2. soliais. 

3. solia. 3. solian. 

Yager,, to lie. 

This verb is used only in the third person singular 
and plural of the Indicative present, yace and yacen, 
which are generally inscribed on tomb-stones. 

PARTICIPLE. 

The Participle is a certain form of the verb,, and de- 
rives its name from its participating not only the pro- 
perties of a verb, but also those of an adjective. It has 
the properties of the verb because it expresses action, 
passion, being, &c.; and those of an adjective, because, 
like that part of speech, it often agrees with the noun 
to which it belongs in gender and number. 

Spanish verbs have three Participles, the Present, 
the Perfect, and the Compound Perfect. 

The Present has an active signification, and ends in 



ETYMOLOGY. 179 

ando or iendo according as the verb from which it is 
derived is of the first, or of the second and third con* 
jugations : amando, loving ; temiendo, fearing ; pat* 
tiendoy dividing. 

The Perfect has an active or a passive signification 
according as it joined with haber or ser ; and if regular 
it ends in ado for the first, and ido for the second and 
third conjugations: amado, lived; temido, feared ; par- 
tido, divided. 

The Compound Perfect has also an active or a passive 
signification according to the auxiliary with which it is 
associated: Habiendo amado (active) having loved; 
habiendo sido amado (passive) having been loved. 

Some verbs, as the student will have observed, have 
two perfect Participles, one regular, the other irregular; 
as from maldecir are formed maldecido paid maldito. 
The regular Participles are employed with the auxili- 
aries to form the compound tenses of active and pas- 
sive verbs ; but the irregulars, which are a species of 
verbal adjectives, are never so employed. These four, 
however, preso, proserito, provisto and roto are often 
thus associated. Thus we say, 

ha prendido, or ha preso. 

ha prescribido, or ha prescrito. 

ha proveido, or ha provisto. 

ha rompido, or ha roto. 

Roto is even more frequently compounded than the 
regular Participle rompido ; injerio, opreso, and supreso 
are also thus used, but not so frequently as the four 
preceding. 

Some Observations on the Participle. 

The part of speech which we have denominated tl 
present Participle, the Spanish Academy terms the 
gerund ; and for Present Participles that learned body 
admits another species of words which were formerly 
indeed of that description, but which, through the 
lapse of time, have lost the most essential of their 
original properties. Like the gerund, they are derived 



^80 ETYMOLOGY. 

from verbs. Those of the first conjugation end in 
ante ; as amante, loving; those of the second or third 
in ente, as corriente, running ; oyente, hearing. But a 
great number of Spanish verbs have dropped this class 
of words ; and of those which are still used exceedingly 
few preserve the regimen of their verbs. Even the 
Academy acknowledges that many of them, for the 
reason just stated, ought not to be considered as Par- 
ticiples, but as a sort of verbal Adjectives, and some- 
times of Substantives.* As Adjectives they express 
qualities ; and as they are derived from verbs, they 
retain some of their original properties. If those only, 
as the Academy contends, are to be admitted as Par- 
ticiples which preserve the regimen of their verbs, why 
class them as a separate part of speech ? — The follow- 
ing have certainly in many instances the nature of Par- 
ticiples, and in those instances we have no objection to 
call them by that name: obediente, participiante, seme-' 
mute, fiaciente, habiante (almost obsolete) teniente when 
joined with lugar, obstante^ perteneciente, corres- 
pondiente* tocanie, est ante, and habitante. 

The disuse then of the original Present Participle 
has paved the way for the introduction of the gerund.f 
CThe latter has been slowly, but securely gaining 
ground ; and very probably it will at no very distant 
period entirely supersede the former. As the gerund 
therefore performs the office, it may properly admit the 
name of Present Participle. 

% " No se pueden formar participios depresente usuales en todos los 
verbos ni tocios los que pueden formarse, se deben considerar corao 
tales, par no conserver el regimen de sus verbos, y haber pasado a 
ser unos adjetivos verbales, que tambien sueien usarse corao nombres 

substantives." "H03- son rnuy pocos los participios de presente, 

crue conservan este regimen." — Gram. Castel. 

f " La misma frequencia con que per el uso han ido pasando estos 
participios a ser ya adjetivos verbales, ya adjetivos substantivados, 
les ba quitado verosimilmente el regimen de sus verbos : y tambien 
el mucho uso que se bace en nuestra lengua del gerundio, que muchas 
veces es su equivalente, y ademas es palabra mas sonora que el 
participio, en especial, que el de la terceraconjugacion, y muchas de 
ia segunda, en que por necesidad concurren muchas ii y ee t que son 
letras de menos sonoridad y variaciun que las que componen los 
vocables de los gerimdios."— Gram. Castel. 



ETYMOLOGY. 181 

Whether Participles signify time or not, has long 
been a subject of controversy to grammarians. It is a 
subject on which no prudent man will speak without dif- 
fidence when he considers that it is one on which the 
most acute have disagreed. But as the author will not 
shrink from expressing his opinion on any point which 
may throw light on any part of his present undertaking, 
he ventures to submit a few brief observations on this 
point to the reader. 

Every action is necessarily progressive : it has a 
beginning, a proceeding, and an end. Every action 
therefore necessarily embraces a portion of time either 
more or less extended. But Participles express action 
as well as the verbs from which they are derived. The 
former consequently signif}^ time as well as the latter. 

On the other hand, verbs have in their simple tenses 
a variety of inflections to denote the time of their re- 
spective actions ; but Participles when actively used 
have but one unvaried termination. Thus amando de- 
notes present action, but action, present ?iotv, at some 
time past, or at some time to come, according to the 
time denoted by the verb with which it is connected : 
Estoy amando, I am loving ; estaba amando, I was 
loving; estare amando, I shall be loving. And with 
respect to the Perfect Participle the same analogy pre- 
vails : Soy amado, I am loved ; era amado, I was loved ; 
sere amado, I shall be loved, &c. 

From what has been said then, it appears that Par- 
ticiples imply time absolutely, because they express 
action, and action necessarily implies time ; but it also 
appears that they have no variety of inflection to de- 
note the different relations of time, and that conse- 
quently per se they have no tenses in the strict sense of 
the word. The time in which the action of the Parti- 
ciple takes place, can be determined only from some 
verb to which it is joined, or with which it is connected. 
The Present Participle always expresses action co» 
existent with the accompanying verb ; but the Perfect 
is not so definite. It sometimes, as its name imports, 
denotes ^finished action ; as la carta es escrita, the letter 
is written ; but it often signifies progressive action,-— 



182 ETYMOLOGY. 

action begun, going on, and consequently not ended ; 
as el hombre es amado, the man is loved. The latter 
expression as evidently denotes that the action of loving 
is at the present time endured by the man, as the 
former does that the action of writing is entirely past. 
Again, el hombre era amado, the man was loved: that 
is, the same action was endured by the man at the time 
denoted by the verb era — in other words, it was then 
present. Lastly, el hombre sera amado, the man will be 
loved — the man will endure the action of loving at 
some future time implied in the verb sera ; the passion 
of loving will then be present to him. 

To pursue this subject further, would exceed the 
limits which the author has prescribed to himself, and 
would be useless to the generality of students. To 
those who are capable of understanding such subjects, 
what has been said may prove of some service ; it may 
furnish matter for much reflection. 

ADVERB. 

An Adverb is a word added to verbs, to adjectives, 
and sometimes to other adverbs, to express the various 
relations of place, time, order, manner, or quality, 
quantity, comparison, affirmation, negation, &c. 

1. Of place ; as aqui, acd, ahi 9 alii acidld, cerca, 
donde, dentro,fuera, delante, detras, encima, debajo. 

2. Of time; as hoy, ayer, manana,ahora, luego 3 tarde, 
iemprano 9 presto, pronio^ siempre, nunca, jamas, ya, 
mientras. 

3. Of order; as primer -amente, idiimamente, sucesiva- 
mente, antes, despues. 

4<. Of manner, or quality; as pnideiHemente, elegante- 
mente, const antemente, Men, mal, asi, pronto, apriesa. 
presto, bajo, alto. 

5. Of quantity ; as mucho, poco } demasiado, lasiante, 
harto, muy, tan, tanto, quanto. 

6. Of comparison ; as mas, menos, mejor, muy. 

7. Of affirmation ; as si, ciertarnente, verdaderamente, 
indubitablemente. 



ETYMOLOGY. 183 

S. Of negation ; as no, ni, nada, jamas, nunca, 
tampoco. 

Jamas and nunca have the same meaning, and they 
may be indifferently used for each other : Jamas le 
hablare, nunca le hablare ; I will never speak to him. 
Jamas vi tal cosa, nunca vi tal cosa ; I never saw such a 
thing. Sometimes nunca and jamas are joined to- 
gether, to give more energy to the negation ; nunca 
jamas lo hare ! never, never will I do it ! 

But when jamas is joined to siempre, always, ever, it 
ceases to have a negative meaning : it then also means 
ever, and when thus associated it renders the affirma- 
tion much more forcible : For siempre jamas me 
acordare de ti 9 I shall ever, ever remember thee 1 

No, no, not, is not always negative : it is often re- 
dundant : Mejor es la virtud que no las riquezas, virtue 
is better than riches. 

Two negatives do not destroy each other in Spanish j 
on the contrary, they deny with greater force : No he 
visto a nadie, I have seen no one : No hay ninguno, 
there is no one. And here it must be observed that, 
when the double negation is used, no must precede, 
and the other negative must follow, the verb. If any 
other negation than no precede the verb, no is sup- 
pressed : Jamas oi voz mas liarmoniosa, I never heard 
a more harmonious voice : Nada quiero, I wish for 
nothing. We may properly say, jamas ie hablare, or 
no ie hablare jamas; I will never speak to thee: 
nadie ie quiere, or no ie quiere nadie ; no one loves 
thee ; but we cannot change the position of these nega- 
tions without violating the language. No nadie ie 
quiere, or nadie no ie quiere, would not be Spanish. 

Mas, menos, and muy, have the peculiarity of quali- 
fying nouns, as well as the other parts of speech with 
which the adverb is usually associated: El es mas 
hombre que su hermano, he is more a man than his 
brother. La hija es menos muger que su madre, the 
daughter is less a woman than her mother. Muy sig- 
nifies much, or very much ; El es muy hombre, he is very 
much the man. 



184? ETYMOLOGY. 

May is also used in several idiomatical expressions : 
Muy amigo mio, my very true friend; soy uuy de vm 9 
or soy muy al servicio de vm ; I am very much yours, 
or, I am very much at your service. Muy de veras, 
very seriously ; muy de mala gana, with a very bad 
grace ; muy de priesa, in very great haste ; muy de 
onanana, very early. 



PREPOSITION. 

A Preposition is placed before nouns, pronouns, 
and verbs in the infinitive mood, to connect them with 
other words, and to show the relation between them. 

The following are the principal Spanish prepositions: 
a, ante, con, contra, de, desde, en, entre, hacia, hasta, 
para, por, segun, sin, sobre, tras. These are used both 
alone and in composition, except desde, hasta, hdcia, 
por, and segun, which are seldom, if ever, compounded. 
Prepositions have generally the same meaning in com- 
position as out of it : Anteponer, to place before ; that 
is, to prefer : Sobreponer, to place over, &c. 

A thorough acquaintance with the precise import of 
the Prepositions is a very necessary, but a very difficult 
attainment. The following observations on those wnich 
are most generally used, will be useful to the student. 

A, to. 

i 

A, before a noun or verb, denotes that the action or 
relation produced by some preceding word terminates 
in that noun or verb : Voy a Londres, I am going to 
London : Voy a estudiar, I am going to study. 

De, of ox from, 

Is often the reverse of a. Before nouns it signifies the 
beginning of some action or relation: Vengo de Francia, 
I come from France : El libro de Juan, the book from 
John, — the book abstracted or brought from John, and 
which may therefore be said to belong to him. 

Before verbs in the Infinitive it sometimes preserves 



ETYMOLOGY. 185 

the same meaning, as the infinitive has the nature of a 
verbal noun ; but oftener still it has no meaning at all 
when thus associated. 

Ante, before, 

Both in and out of composition, expresses precedency 
of place, time, situation, or action : Anteceder, to go be- 
fore: Ant ever, to foresee. Ante should not be con- 
founded with anti, against, the orthography of which 
is frequently the same. 

Contra, against, 

Both in and out of composition, signifies opposition or 
contrariety ; Contradecir, to speak against : Contra las 
leyes, against the laws. 

Con, ivith, 

Has the same meaning both in and out of composi- 
tion: it denotes union in action, passion, state, or locality? 
Concurrir, to concur (literally, to run together) : Con- 
venir, to agree (literally, to come together) : Conde- 
scender, to condescend (literally, to descend together). 
All these imply other beings than the subject of the 
verb : Convengo, I agree with whom ? The mean- 
ing is imperfect until the ellipsis be supplied. 

When con is not compounded, and is placed before 
nouns and verbs, it denotes the means, the instrument, 
the manner, or the exercise of any thing : Obro con pru- 
dencia, he acted with prudence : Con estudiar se 
alcanza la sabiduria, with studying knowledge is ob- 
tained. Here the intelligent student will perceive that 
though con is very differently associated, its character 
of union is invariably preserved. 

Sin, ivithout, 

Is the reverse of con : it denotes absence or privation : 
Trabaja sin comer, he labours without eating : Ire sin 
dinero, I shall go without money. 



186 ETYMOLOGY. 

En, in, 

Before nouns, implies the place, time, or state in 'which 
any thing exists, or takes place : En la iglesia, in the 
church : En elmes de Agusto, in the month of August: 
En lastima, in sorrow. 

Before verbs it has generally the same meaning. It 
can only be used before verbs in the Infinitive, and 
they, as we have before observed, have the nature of 
nouns : Se ocupa en leer, en hablar, he is occupied in 
reading, in speaking. 

Far a, for, 

Denotes, like a, the termination of an action or a re- 
lation in the following noun or verb ; but it differs from 
a in this point : a denotes simply the termination, and 
nothing more; but para denotes also the end, design^ 
or effect of some preceding action or relation : it also 
points out the person or thing to which the action, &c. 
Is directed. Like the other prepositions, it originally 
applied to space, but it is now applicable to time and 
other relations : Trabajo para descansar, I labour that 
I may rest (I labour in order to rest). It often denotes 
proximity : Estoy para partir, I am about to depart. 

POR 

Is generally equivalent to our hy : El mundo Jue 
hecho por Dios, the world was made by God. 

But when it denotes the end for which a thing is 
done, &c. it is equivalent to ouv jbr : Lo dare por cien 
doblones, I will sell it for a hundred doubloons : Asisto 
por mi companero % I attend for my companion : Doy mi 
vestido por el tayo, I exchange my dress for thine. 

The other Prepositions, with the exception of those 
which are inseparable, will present no difficulty to the 
learner. He will bear in mind that all l^d originally a 
relation to place, as is apparent from thir etymology 
as well as from their use ; and he will perceive, that 
even in their present complicated and metaphysical 
state, their primary relation is partially preserved. 



ETYMOLOGY. 187 

The following are called Inseparable Prepositions, 
because they are never found alone : 

Ab, or abs, from, &c. ; as abstraigo, I draw from ; 
that is, I abstract or separate. 

De, des, di, dis ; from, asunder, &c. ; as distraigo, I 
draw asunder. 

E, BK,fro?n, out of, &c, ; as emanar, to flow from) 
to emanate : expurgar, to cleanse from. 

Em sometimes signifies m, but it generally strengthens 
the meaning of the simple verb ; as empegar, 
to pitch. 

Im, in, sometimes signify in ; as imponer, to place in; 
but generally they imply privation or nega- 
tion ; as inhabilitar, to render unable. 

Inter, among, between, &e. ; as iniervenir, to come 
between ; that is, to intervene. 

Ob, on account of, by means of, &c. ; as obtenir, to ac- 
quire by certain means. Ob, with a verb of 
motion, signifies against, &c. ; as opponer 
(ofi-poner), to place against; that is, to op* 
pose. 

Per, through ; as perseguir, to follow through ; that is, 
to pursue with some fixed purpose through 
all opposition. 

Tos, behind, after, &c. ; as posponer, to place behind,. 
to postpone. 

Pre, before ; as preocupdr, to occupy before. Some- 
times it adds energy to the verb, and may be 
rendered by over ; as predominar, to rule 
over, to exercise a powerful sway. 

Re, again, bach, &c. ; as recargar, to load again ; re? 
ferir, to bear Z>ac&. 

Son, under, apart, &c. ; as sonreirse, to laugh under 
or apart ; that is, unobserved. 

Sus, su, sos, before, above, &c. ; as suponer, to place 
before; that is, to conceive before any certain 
knowledge : suspender, to hang z/p or a&ot^ .• 
that is, to be in a state of uncertainty: sos- 
Jewer, to hold wp or aoot^ ; that is, to sup- 
port : suscitar, to raise up. 



188 ETYMOLOGY. 

Sub, subs, under, afterwards, &c; as subarrendar, to 

hire afterwards. 
Super, above, over ; as superabundar, to superabound, 

to abound with any thing above what is 

necessary. 
Trans, through, beyond, &c. ; transporter ; to send 

beyond sea. 

CONJUNCTION. 

A Conjunction connects sentences and words. 

Both conjunctions and prepositions connect words, 
but the latter never connect sentences, and the former 
have no government, except over verbs in the Sub- 
junctive. 

The following are the principal conjunctions : y, e, 
o, u, ni, que, si, porque, puesque, pueitoque } mas,pero^ 
para que, qfin de que, &c. 

E is only used before nouns beginning with i or hi; 
and u before those with o. The former is in this 
case substituted for y, and the latter for 6. 

The Spanish Academy has classed Conjunctions into 
copulative, disjunctive, adversative, conditional, casal, 
continuative 9 comparative, and final ; but such a division 
is more scholastic than useful, and is besides very 
defective. 

INTERJECTION. 

An Interjection is a sudden exclamation, expressing 
some emotion or passion of the mind, The following 
are of this class : ah I ay ! o ! ha ! he I ola J to J 
chito ! to ! ta ! 

Interjections are scarcely deserving the name of 
words : they are mere expressions of passion, and are 
common to us with the brutes. 



189 



APPENDIX TO ETYMOLOGY. 



AM 


deviations of Words 


used in Writing. 


A. A. 


Autores, 


authors. 


A s . 
A. C. 


Arrobas, 

Ano Christiano, 


a weight of 2a pounds* 
Christian year. 


Adm or . 


Administrador. 


administrator. 


Agto. 
Am°. 


Agosto, 
Araigo, 


August. 
friend. 


Ant°. 


Antonio, 


Anthony. 


App co . 
Art°. 


Apostolico, 
Articulo, 


apostolic, 
article. 


ArzbP . 
B. 


Arzabispo, 
Beato, 


archbishop, 
blessed. 


b. 


Vuelta, 


turn over. 


B r . 


Bachiller, 


bachelor. 


B. L. M. 


Beso las manos. 


I kiss the hands. 


B. L. P. 

B mo , P e . 

C. M. B. 


Beso los pies, 
Beatisimo padre, 
Cuyos manos beso. 


I kiss the feet. 
most blessed father, 
iv hose hands I kiss. 


C P. B. 


Cuj'os pies beso, 


xi'hosefeet I kiss. 


Cam ra . 


Camara, 


clumber. 


Cap. 
Cap n . 
Capp 11 . 
Col. 


Capitulo, 
Capitan. 
Capellan, 
Coluna, 


chapter 
captain, 
chaplain, 
column. 


Comis . 


Comisario, 


commissary. 


Comp a . 

Cons°. 

Car* e . 


Compania, 

Consejo, 
Carriente, 


company. 

council. 

current. 


D n . 


Don, 




D a ,D. 


Dona, 




D^ 


Doctor, 


doctor. 


D. D. 


Doctores, 


doctors. 


D\ 


Dios, 


God. 



190 


APPENDIX TO 


Dho. 


Dicho, dicha, 


said. 


Dro. 


Derecho, 


right, duty. 


Diz re . 


Diciembre, 


December. 


Dom°. 


Domingo, 


Sunday. 


Ecc°. 


Ecclesiastico, 


ecclesiastic. 


En°. 


Enero, 


January. 


Ex m0 . 


Excelentisimo. 


most excellent. 


Ex cia . 


Excelencia. 


excellency. 


Fho. 
Fha. 


Fecho, 
Fecha, 


> dated. 


Feb°. 


Febrero, 


February. 


FoR 


Folio, 


folio. 


Fr. 


Fray, 


a friar. 


Fran co . 


Francisco, 


Francis. 


Frnz. 


Fernandez. 




Gde. 
Gue. 


J>Guarde, 
, Que Dios guarde, 


preserve. 


Q. D. G, 


whom God preserve* 


Gra. 


Gracia, 


grace. 


Gen*. 


General, 


general. 


■Igla. 


Iglesia, 


church. 


UK 


Ilustre, 


illustrious. 


HI**. 


Iiustrisimo, 


most illustrious. 


Inq or . 


Inquisidor, 


inquisitor. 


Jhs. 


Jesus, 


Jesus. 


Jf. 
Jph. 


> Josef, 


Joseph. 


Jn°. 
Jn. 


| Juan, 


John. 


Lib. 


Libro, 


book. 


Lib 8 . 


Libras, 


pounds. 


Lin. 


Linea, 


line. 


Liz°. 


Licenciado, 


licentiate. 


M. P. S. 


Muy poderoso senor, very powerful lord. 


M e . 


Madre, 


mother. 


M r . 


Monsieur, 


monsieur. 


M er . 


Mayor, 


eldest. 


M s . A s . 


Much os anos, 


many years. 


Mag d . 


Magestad, 


majesty. 


Man 1 . 


Manuel, 


Emanuel. 


May mo . 


Mayordomo, 


steward. 





ETYMOLOGY. 


Mig 1 . 


Miguel, 


Michael. 


Minro. 


Ministro, 


minister. 


Mrd. 


Merced, 


grace, worship. 


Mfn. 


Martin, 


Martin. 


Mfnz. 


Martinez, 




Mro. 


Maestro, 


master. 


Mrs. 


Maravedis, 




MS. 


Manuscrito, 


manuscript. 


MSS. 


Manuscritos, 


manuscripts. 


N. S. 


Nuestro Seiior, 


Our Lord. 


N. S™. 


Nuestra Senora, 


Our Lady. 


Nro. 


Nuestro, 


our. 


Nov re . 
9 re . 


> Noviembre, 


November. 


Obpo. 
Oct re . 
8 re . 


Obispo, 


bishop* 


> Octobre, 


October. 


On*. 


Onzas, 


ounces. 


Ofn. 


Orden, 


order. 


P.D. 


Posdata, 


postscript. 


P a . 


Para, 


for. 


P*. 


Padre, 


father. 


P°. 


Pedro, 


Peter. 


P'. 


Por, 


for, or by. 


pta 


Plata, 


silver, or plate. 


pte] 


Parte, 


part. 


pto 


Puerto, 


po?"t. 


P%. 


Pagina, 


page. 


Pp co . 


Publico, 


public. 


Pfnl. 


Principal, 


principal. 


Pro~r. 


Procurador, 


solicitor, proctor 


Prov. 


Provisos 


vicar -general. 


Q e . 


Que, 


that. 


Q do . 


Quando, 


when. 


Q». 


Quien, 


who. 


Q 1 *. 


Quanto, 


how much. 


R*. R 1 ^. 


Real, reales, 


royal. 


R*. 


Reales, 


reals. 


Rev mo . 


Reverendisimo, 


most reverend* 


R*>. 


Reverendo, 


reverend* 



191 



192 


APPENDIX 


: to 


R vi . 


Recibi, 


I received, 


S. 


San, santo, 


saint* 


S a . 


San, 
Santo, 


> saint. 


S. M. 


Su majestad, 


his majesty. 


S. S d . 


Su santitad, 


his holiness. 




J- Senor, 


sir, or Mr. 


Seb n . 


Sebatian, 


Sebastian. 


S ria . 


7 




Secret a . 


> Secretaria, 


secretaryship. 


Secret lia 


J 




Secret . 


i 




S rio . 


>Secretario, 


secretary. 


Secret 1 ' 10 , 


J 




Se re . 

7 re. 


J- Setiembre, 
Serenisimo, 


September. 


S mo . 


most serene. 


Serv°. 


Servicio, 


service. 


Serv or . 


Servidor, 


servant. 


Sig te . 


Siguiente, 


following. 


SS m °. P« 


, Santisimo padre, 


most holy father. 


SS no . 


Escribano, 


notary. 


S. S. s. 


Su seguro servidor, 


your faithful servant. 


Sup ca . 


Suplica, 


e n t rea ty, pet itim . 


Supte. 


Suplicante, 


petitioner. 


Super te . 


Superintendente, 


superintendant. 


Ten**. 


Teniente, 


lieutenant. 


Tom. 


To mo, 


volume. 


Tpo. 
V 


Tiempo, 


time. 




}- Venerable, 


venerable. 


Ven e . 


J 




V. A. 


Vuestra alteza, 


your highness. 


V. B d . 


Vuestra beatitud, 


your blessedness. 


V. E* 


Vuestra exeelencia, 


your excellency. 


V. G. 


Verbi gracia, 


for example. 



* In conversation, Vuestra excelencia is pronounced vecelencia ; 
and vuestra. senoria, vuesehoria. This contraction semetiraes takes 
place in writing. 



Vm. 

Vmd. 

Vms. 
V. P. 

V. s.* 

V. s. 

V. s. s. s 

V. S.I* 

V". 
Vol. 

Vfo. 

X m0 . 
Xptiano. 
Xpto. 
Xptobal. 



rVue 

^ c 
LUst 



ETYMOLOGY- 

' Vuestra merced, 1 

or > your Ivor ship. 

sted, J 

Ustedes, your worships* 

Vuestra paternidad, your paternity* 
f Vuestra seiioria, 
J or 
LUsia, 
Vuestra santidad, 
Vuestras senorias, 
f Vuestra seiioria ii 
X ustrisima, 



193 



1 



your lordship. 

your holiness, 
your lordships. 



Vellon, 

Volumen, 

Vuestro, 

Diezmo, 

Cristiano, 

Cristo, 

Cristobal, 



K s your grace. 

bullion, 
volume, 
your, 
tithe. 

■Christian. 
Christ. 
Christopher. 



Some of the most usual Christian Names which are not 
exactly alike in Spanish and English. 



A. 

Abrahan, Abraham. 
Absalon, Absalom. 
A dan, Adam. 
Adolfo, Adolphus. 
Alano, Alan. 
Alberto, Albert. 
Alexandro, Alexander. 
Alfredo, Alfred. 
Alfonso, Alphonso. 
Ambrosio, Ambrose. 
Andres, Andrew. 
AnselmOj Anselm. 



Of Men, 

Antonio, Anthony. 
Archibalo, Archibald. 
Arnaldo, Arnold. 
Arturo, Arthur. 
A tanas i o , At ha nasius, 
Agustin, Austin. 

B. 

Balduino, Baldwin. 
Bautista, Baptist 
Bernabe, Barnaby. 
Bartolome, Bartholomew. 
Basilio, Basil. 



See the Note to the preceding page. 
K 



19* 



APPENDIX TO 



Benito, Ben-net, or Benedict. 
Bernardo, Bernard* 
Betel, Bethel. 
Bias, Blase. 
Bonifacio, Boniface. 
Brian 6, Brian* 

C. 

Cesar, Ctesar. 
Cecilio, Cecil. 
Carlos, Charles. 
Cristoval, Christopher* 
Claudio, Claudius. 
Clemente, Clement. 
Conrado, Conrad. 
Constantino, Constaniine. 
Cornel io, Cornelius. 
Cipriano, Cyprian. 
Cirilo, Cyril. 

D. 

Demetrio, Demetrius. 
Diego, or Jayme, James. 
Dionisio, Dionysius. 
Domingo, Dominic. 

E. 

Edgaro, Edgar. 
Edrnondo, Edmund. 
Eduardo, Edward. 
Eduin, Edwin. 
Eleazaro, Eleazar. 
Eldret, Eldrecl. 
Eliseo, Elisha. 
Erasmo, Erasmus. 
Ernesto, Ernest. 
Esteban, Stephen. 
Etelbert, Eihelhert. 
Etelredo, Ethel-red. 



Eteluardo, Ethelivard. 
Evano, Evan. 
Everardo, Everard. 
Eugenio, Eugene. 
Eusebio, Eusebius. 
Eustacio, Eustace. 
Ezequiel, Ezekiel. 

F. 

Felipe, Philip. 
Fernando, Ferdinand. 
Francisco, Francis. 
Frederico, Frederic. 
Fulquio, Fatvkes. 



Gaspar, Jaspar. 
Geraldo, Gerrard. 
Gervasio, Gervase. 
Gedonio, Gideon. 
Gilberto, Gilbert. 
Gil, Giles. 
Godardo, Goddard. 
Godefredo, Godfrey. 
Gregorio, Gregory. 
Guido, Guy. 
Guillermo, William. 

H. 

Haroldo, Harold. 
Henrique. Henry. 
Heberto, Herbert. 
Hilario, Hilary. 
Huberto* Hubert. 
Hugo, Hugh. 

I. 

Jsaias^ Esaias. 
Juan, John. 
Jorge, George 



ETYMOLOGY. 



195 



Joscelino, Joscelinc. 
Jose, or Josef, Joseph. 
Judas, Jade. 
Juliano, Julian. 
Julio, Julius* 
Justo, Justus. 

K. 
Kenelmo, Kenelm. 

L. 

Lamberto, Lambert. 
Lancelote, Lancelot. 
Lazaro, Lazarus. 
Leolino, Leoline. 
Leonardo, Leonard. 
Leopoldo, Leopold. 
Lorenzo, Laurence. 
Luis, Lewis. 
Lucio, Lucius. 
Lucas, Luke. 

M. 

Marco, Mark. 
Marmaduco, Mqrmaduke. 
Manuel, Emanuel. 
Martin, Martin. 
Mateo, Matthew. 
Matias, Matthias. 
Mauricio, Maurice. 
Maximiliano, Maximilian. 
Miguel, Michael. 
Moyses, Moses. 

N. 

Nadal, Noel. 
Natan, Nathan. 
Natanael, Nathaniel. 
Nehemias, Nehemiah. 
Nicolas, Nicholas. 



O. 



Olivero, Oliver. 
Osmondo, Osmund. 
Osualdo, Oswald. 
Oionio, Otho. 

P. 

Pasqual, Pascal } Cyril. 
Pablo, Paul. 
Patricio, Patrick. 
Peregrino, Peregrine. 
Pedro, Peter. 

Quintino, Qiieniin. 

R. 

Randolfo, Randolph. 

Rafael, Raphael. 

Raymondo, 1 ^ , 

t> J > Raymond, 

Kay in on, 3 ^ 

Reynaldo, Reynold. 

Ricardo, Richard, 

Roberto, Robert. 

Rodrigo, Roderic. 

Rogerio, Roger. 

Rolando, Rowland. 

Ruperto > Rupert. 

& 

Salomon, Solomon. 
Sanson, Samson. 
Sebastian o, Sebastian. 
Sigismundo, Sigismund* 
Siivestre, Silvester. 



Teobaldo, Theobald. 
Teod or 0, The: Sure. 



K 2 



193 



APPENDIX TO 



Teodosio, Theodosius. 
Teodorico, Thcodoric. 
Teofilo, Theophilus. 
Tom as, Thomas. 
Timoteo, Timothy. 
Tito, Titus. 

V. 

Urbano, Urban. 



Valentino, Valentine. 
Valeriano, Valerian. 
Vicente, Vincent. 



Zacarias, Zachary. 
Zaqueo, Zaccheus. 
Zadoc, Zadoh 
Zedequias, Zedehah. 



% Of Women. 



Agnes, or Lies, Agnes. 
Ana, Anne. 
Antonia, Antoinette, 
Arab el a, Arabella. 

B. 

Benita, Benedict a. 
Berta, Bertha. 
Blanca, Blanche. 
Brigida, Bridget* 



Feliciana, Felicia. 
Felicia, Phillis. 
Felipa, Philippa. 
Florencia, Florence. 
Fortuna, Fortune. 
Francisca, Frances. 



G. 

Gertrudis. Gertrude. 
Gracia, Grace. 



Carolina, Caroline. 
Catalina, Catharine. 
Clara, Clara, Clarissa. 
Constanza, Constance. 

D. 

Debora, Deborah. 
Dorotea, Dorothy. 

E. 

Eleonora, Eleanor. 
Elena, Helen. 
Ester, Esther. 
Eva, Eve. 
Eunicia, Eunice. 



H. 

Helena, Helen. 



Isabel, Isabella, Elisabeth. 

Juana, Jane. 

Judit, Judith. 

Juliana, Julia , Julianne. 

L. 

Luisa, Louisa. 
Lucia, Lucy. 
Lucrecia, Lucntia. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



197 



M. 



Magdalena, Magdalen . 
Margarita, Margaret, 
Marta, Martha. 
Maria, Maria, Mary. 
Matilda, Matilda, 

P. 

Paciencia, Patience. 
Prudencia, Prudence, 

R. 

Raquel, Rachel. 



Rebeca, Rebecca. 
Rosamunda, Rosamond. 
Rosa, Rose. 
Ruda. Ruth. 



Sara, Sarah. 
Sofia, Sophia. 
Susana, Susanna. 

T. 

Temper ancia, Temperance, 
Teresa, Theresa. 



Some of the most common Names of Countries, Cities } 

Rivers, fyc. 

A. Bahia de Sligo, Sligo Bay, 

Baleico, Baltic, 
Barberisco, o Berberisco, 

Barbary [a native of) 
Baviera, Bavaria. 
Bavaro, Bavarian. 
Bela Isla, Belleisle. 
Bengal a, Bengal. 
Berberfa, Barbary. 
Bizcaya, Biscay. 
Borgona, Burgundy. 
Bretana, Britany. 
Brajas, Bruges. 
Bruselas, Brussels. 
Burdeos, Bordeaux. 



Adrindpoli, Adrianople. . 
Aleman, German. 
Alemania, Germany. 
Alpes, Alps. 
Amberes, Antwerp. 
Anseaticas, Hanse towns. 
A'rabe, Arab. 
Archipielago, Archipelago. 
Argelino, Algerine. 
Argel, Algiers. 
Argentina, Strasburg. 
* Asiatieo, Asia (a native of) 
Asiria, Assyria. 
Atenas, Athens. 
Austriaeo, Austrian. 

B. 

Babilonia, Babylon, 
Bahia Botanica, Botany- 
Bay. 



C. 

Cabo de Buena Esperanza, 

Cape of Good Hope. 
Cartago, Carthage. 
Catalima, Catalonia. 



198 



APPENDIX TO 



Castilla (la Nueva), Castile 
(Net»). 

Castilla (la Vieja), Castile 
[Old). 

Cefalonia, Cephalonia. 

Ceilan, Ceylon. 

Cerdena, Sardinia. 

C ester, Chester* 

Chile, Chili. 

Constantinopla, Constanti- 
nople, 

Copenhaga, oCopenhague, 
Copenhagen. 

Corinto., Corinth. 

Corcega, Corsica. 

Cortina, Corunna. 

D. 

Danubio, Danube. 
DardaneloSj Dardanelles. 
Delfinado, Dauphiny. 
Dinamarca, Denmark. 
Dinamarques, Dane. 
Dresda, Dresden. 
Dunas, The Downs. 
Dunkerque, Dunkirk. 



Edinburgo, Edinburgh. 
E'feso, Ephesus. 
Egipto, Egypt. 
Escalda, Scheldt. 
Escania, Scandinavia. 
Escocia, Scotland. 
Escoces, Scotchman. 
Esmirna, Smyrna. 
Espaiia, Spain. 
Estados Unidos, America 

(the United States of). 
Europa, Europe. 



F. 



Filadelfia, Philadelphia. 
Finlanda, Fi?iland. 
Flandes, Flanders. 
Florencia, Florence. 
Francforte del Oyder, 

Frankfort upon Oder. 
Francforte del Maino, 

Frankfort upon Maine. 
Francia, France. 
Frigia, Phrygia. 

G. 

Gales, Wales. 
Gascuna, Gascony. 
Galia, Gaul. 
Gante, Ghent. 
Garnesey, Guernsey. 
Genova, Genoa. 
Ginebra, Geneva. 
Gran- Bre tana, Great Bri- 
tain. 
Grecia, Greece. 
Groenlandia, Greenland. 

H. 

Haga, Hague. 
Hamburgo, Hamburgh. 
Havana, Havannah. 
Henao, Hainault. 
Holanda, Holland. 
Holandes, Dutchman. 
Hungria, Hungary. 
Hungaro, Hungarian. 



Indias Orientates, East 

Indies. 
Indias Occidentales, West 

Indies. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



199 



Inglaterra, England. 
Ingles, Englishman. 
Jonia, Ionia, 
Wanda, Ireland. 
Irlandes, Irishman. 
Isla de Francia, Isle of 

France. 
Isla de Reunion, Mauritius. 
Jutlandia, Jutland. 

L. 

La Sublime Puerte, The 

Sublime Porte. 
Leida, Ley den. 
Lenguadoc, Languedoc. 
Levante, Levant. 
Liorna, oLivorna, Leghorn , 
Lipsia, Leipsic. 
Lisboa, Lisbon. 
Loir a, Loire. 
Lombardia, Lombardy. 
Londres, London. 
Lusacia, Lusatia. 
Leon, Lyons. 

M. 
Madera, Madeira. 
Maguncia, Mentz. 

Malages, Malaga (a native 

of) 

Mallorca, Majorca. 

Maltes, Maltese. 

Mancha, Channel. 

Mar Adriatico, Adriatic 
Gulph. 

Mar Bermejo, Red Sea. 

Mar Caspio, Caspian Sea. 

Mar del Sud, South Sea. 

Mar Jonio, Ionian Sea. 

Mar MediterraneOj Medi- 
terranean. 



Ma* Negro, Black Sea. 
Mar Pacifico. 
Marruecos, Morocco. 
Mar Septentrional, North 

Sea. 
Martinica, Martinico. 
Menorca, Minorca. 

X. 
Napoles, Naples. 
Niza, Nice. 
Xilo, Nile* 

Normandia, Normandy. 
Norvega, Norway* 
Nueva York, New York. 

O. 

Cues Frisia, West Fries- 
land. 
Ouesminster, Westminster. 

P. 

Paises-Bajos, Belgium, or 

Loiv Countries. 
Palatinado, Palatinate. 
Petersburgo, Petersburg. 
Picardia, Picardy. 
Piemonte, Piedmont. 
Pirineos, Pyrenees. 
Polonia, Poland. 
Portugues, Portuguese. 
Provenza, Provence. 

Q. 
Quebeca, Quebec. 

R. 

Rin, Rhine. 
Rodano, Rhone. 
Rodas, Rhodes. 



200 



APPENDIX TO ETYMOLOGY. 



lloma, Rome. 
Rusia, Russia. 
Huso, Russian. 

S. 

Saboya, Savoy. 
Saxonia, Saxony. 
Sena, Seine. 
Se villa, Seville. 
Sicelia, Sicily. 
Stokolmo, Stockholm. 
Suevia, Suabia. 
Suecia, Sweden. 
Sueco, Swede. 
Suizo. Swiss. 
Suiza, 6 Helvecia, Switzer- 
land. 
Sunda, Sound. 

T. 

Tajo, Tagtis. 



Tartaria, Tartary. 
Tamisis, Thames. 
Tebas, Thebes. 
Terceras, Azores. 
Tierra Nueva, Newfound- 
land. 
Tunez, Tunis. 
Turco, Turk. 
Turquia, Turkey. 
Toscana, Tuscany. 

V. & U. 

Venecia, Venice. 
Viena, Vienna. 
Ukrania, Ukraine. 
Upsalia, Upsal. 
Utreque, Utrecht. 

Z. 

Zelanda, Zealand. 



PART II, 



SYNTAX 

Is the proper construction of words in a sentence. 

A sentence is an assemblage of words forming a 
complete sense. 

Sentences are of two kinds, simple and compound, 

A simple sentence contains but one subject, or no- 
minative, and one finite verb : La vida es buena, life is 
good. 

A compound sentence consists of two or more sim- 
ple sentences connected together : La vida es buena, 
y la muerte es terrible, life is good, and death is ter- 
rible. 

The principal parts of a simple sentence are the 
subject, the attribute, and the object. 

The subject is the nominative, or thing chiefly spoken 
oF; the attribute is the verb, or the action affirmed or 
denied of the subject; and the object is the thing 
affected by the action : Ella desprecia las riquezas, she 
despises riches. Here ella is the nominative or subject ; 
desprecia, the attribute or thing affirmed; and las 
riquezas, the object, or thing affected by the action of 
the verb desprecia. 

Syntax principally consists of two parts, Concord 
and Government. 

Concord shows the agreement which certain words 
have with one another, in gender, number, case, or 
person. 

Government is that power which one word has over 
another in directing its case or mood. 

k 5 



202 SYNTAX. 



ARTICLE. 

Rule I. 

The article agrees in gender and number with the 
noun to which it is prefixed: 

El hombre, the man. 
Las mugeres, the women. 
Lo atil, the useful. 
Un hombre, a man. 
Una muger, a woman. 

Note. — Feminine nouns beginning with a or ha accented require 
the masculine article in the singular : El area, el dguila, un dve, un 
dla. This is done to avoid the open sound of the two a's : la agua, 
la ahna, would not be tolerated in a language so sonorous as the 
Spanish. But as in the plural the two vowels cannot come in con- 
tact, the exception is no longer applicable : las dguilas, las albas. 
Nouns requiring this violation of concord are exceedingly few : 
those already mentioned are almost all. 



II. 

Nouns taken in a definite sense, require the definite 
article in Spanish, as in English : 

El alitor, the author. 
Las casas, the houses. 



III. 

Nouns taken in an indefinite sense, require, in both 
languages; the corresponding article : 

Un libro, a book. 
Una cosa, a thing. 



SYNTAX. 203 



IV. 



The definite article is prefixed to nouns used in their 
most extended sense : 

El vicio, vice. 
La virtudy virtue. 

Note, — When the noun is preceded by a preposition, both which 
are equivalent to an adverb, the article is omitted : Con paciencia, 
patiently. And the article is also often omitted before a noun pre- 
ceded by an adjective and a preposition, if that noon would require 
no article in English : Digno de imitation ; Ageno tte verdad. 

V. 

The definite article is generally prefixed to the 
names of countries., mountains, rivers^ winds; and 
seasons : 

La Inglaterra, England. 
El ParnasO) Parnassus. 
El Tajo, the Tagus. 

Note 1. — Countries which have the same name as their capital cities 
do not admit the article : as Kapoles, Corfu. 

2. Countries preceded by a preposition do not in general admit 
the article : El veyno de Inglaterra ; estd en Espana, But countries 
personified require the article even when they are preceded by a 
preposition; El mteresdela Inglaterra, the interest of England; that 
is, of the people of England. 

S. Some distant countries require the article under all circum- 
stances: Llego del Japan, del Peru, de la China. 

4. The insertion of the article before the preceding proper names, 
can only be accounted for by the ellipsis of some common noun : El 
monte Pamaso : el rio Tajo, &c» Proper names are surely sufficiently 
distinct without the application of the article. The office of this 
word is to give to common nouns the nature of proper ones, to dis- 
tinguish one object from an infinite number of the same kind ; and to 
render that object an individual. 



204 SYNTAX. 



VI. 



Seaor, sefwra, seuorito, sehorita* with their plurals, 
require the definite Article, unless they are in the 
vocative, or preceded by an adjective pronoun : 

El senor del Campo. 
La se nor a Villegas. 

VII. 

Common names denoting the dignities, professions, 
and employments of men, are preceded by the definite 
article : 

El rey Carlos, King Charles. 
El doctor Fel^ Doctor Fell. 

VIII. 

The hour of the day is preceded by the same article: 

La una, one o'clock. 
Lasoc/iOy eight o'clock. 

IX. 

Nouns of measure, weight, &c. when preceded by the 
indefinite article in English, require the definite in Spa- 
nish: 

Cinco duros la vara, five dollars a yard. 
Dos reales la libra, two rials a pound. 

Note.— If only one yard, pound, &e. were sold , the indefinite article 
ivould be used : Vendio una libra por dos reales : he sold one pound for 
two reals. And when par is used, the article is omitted : Dos reales 
por libra* This is equivalent to our mercantile form of expression, 

pei* pound. 

* Senoriio and senorita are diminutives, and applied to young 
people. 



SYNTAX. 205 

X. 

The article is usually repeated before every noun ; 
always if the nouns be of different genders : 

La verdad y la honra, truth and honour. 

La virtud y el vicio, virtue and vice. 

Los liombresy las mugeres, the men and women. 

XI. 

Nouns in opposition do not admit the article : 
Londres, capital de Inglaterra, y residencia del 

sober ano; London, the capital of England, and the 

residence of the sovereign. 

XII. 

Proper names of persons, cities, towns, and months, 
do not admit the article ; but the days of the week are 
seldom found without it : 

Socrates, Socrates. 
Londres, London. 
El Lunes, Monday. 

Note. — A very few cities are found with the article : La Coruna ; 
el Fevrol ; and some persons; as el Petrarca. But in these cases 
some common name is understood before the proper one : la c'wdad 
Coruna ; el lugar Ferrol ; el alitor Petrarca, 

XIII. 

No article is used before nouns signifying a part of 
the whole.* 

Dame vino, give me some wine. 
Como came, I eat flesh. 
Note* — Some may, however, be expressed by algunoin the singular, 
and algunos, or unos, in the plural ; but not so frequently in the sin- 
gular : Comprarc unos libros, I will buy some books. 

* That is, before nouns which are not, like those included under 
the fourth rule, taken in their most extended signification. The 
English word some is very often equivalent to the Spanish partitive, 
but it is not always expressed : Dificuliades, peligros, lazos le amwia- 
zan % 9 difficulties, dangers, snares, threaten him, 



206 SYNTAX. 



XIV. 



No article is used before adjectives, whether ordinal 
or numeral, when they are preceded by the noun to 
which they belong. 

Carlos Primero, Charles the First. 
Capitulo decimo, chapter the tenth. 

XV. 

No article is used in the titles of books, the heads of 
chapters, paragraphs, &c. unless the noun be the sub- 
ject of a verb, or the object of a verb or a preposition : 

Gramatica Castella?ia, a Spanish grammar. 
Discurso preliminary a preliminary discourse. 

Note 1. — When a verb connects two nouns, the latter of which de- 
notes the country, dignity, profession, &c. of the former, the indefi- 
nite article is suppressed : Soy Ingles : Es obispo : Era medico. 

2. The same article is also suppressed before cien, mil, as cien horn- 
bres; after que, tal, &c. expressing surprise, que lastima! what a pity ! 
after como if the noun has no necessary connection with other words 
following: Obro como hombre; he acted like a man. 



Exercise on the Rales for the Articles. 

The kingdom of France. The king of England. 
reyno de Francia rey Inglaterra 

The province of Navarre. France, England, Spain, 
provincia Navarra Espana 

and Italy. Prussia, Germany, and Russia. I shall go 

Italia Prussia 9 Alemania Rusia ir (irr.) 

to Italy. Thou wilt come to England. He will 
a *?emV(irr.) 

return into Spain. Emulation is noble. Virtue is 
solver (irr.) emulacion noble virtud 

amiable. Idleness is contemptible. Bread is dear. Man is 
amable pereza despreciable pan caro 



SYNTAX. 207 

mortal. Prudence is a precious virtue. The brother 
mortal prudencia preciosa hermano 

and sister. The men, women, and children, are at the 

hermana nino a 

door. The father, mother, and children, are sick. A 
puerta padre madre malo 

man and a woman. A king and a queen. A good 

reyna bueno 

man is beloved by all. A good woman. A true 
amado de todos verdadero 

friend is the best gift of God. Sehor Don John is a 
amigo don Dios Juan 

brave officer. Sehora Doha Catalina is a handsome 
bravo ojicial hermoso 

woman. * Doctor Godinez is skilful. King George 

habil Jorge 

is generous. Faith, hope, and charity, are the three 

generoso fe esperanza caridad tres 

great Christian virtues. An action worthy of praises. 

Cristiano action digno alabanza 

The ambition of men. Purity of heart. The sim- 

ambicion puridad corazon sim- 

plicity and goodness of Miss R. Constancy in ad- 

plicidad bondad Sehorita constancia en ad- 

versity. The generosity of Miss Maria C . 

versidad generosidad Sehorita Maria C , 

Philosophy and religion. The works of nature. Wine 
Jilosqfia religion obra naturaleza vino 

was sold yesterday at twelve pounds a hogshead. 
venderse aver libra media-pipa 

This lace is sold at two dollars a yard. This wine 
encaje duros vara 

* Don, Dona, have no plural, and the}' must always precede the 
baptismal name, not the surname. Senor Don, Senora Dona, Senorito 
Don, Senorita Do?la, are the most respectful titles, and Don alone 
holds the next rank. El Senor Don Pedro Garcia : La Sencra Dona 
Isabel Romero : Don Diego Martinez ; Dona Maria Castro, Sec. When 
speaking of persons of inferior rank to Don, Sec. Senor, Senora, with 
their diminutives Senorito, Senorita, are used. These generally pre- 
cede the surname, as el Senor Martinez ; la Senora Dorantes, 6cc. but 
when applied to persons in still lower walks of life, they sometimes 
pTecede the baptismal name unaccompanied by the article : Senor 
Pedro; Senora Maria Valdez. 



208 SYNTAX. 

costs three shillings a bottle, I will go at 

€0star (irr.) tres chelines botella ir[\vr.) a 

eleven o'clock. I was there at one. He came at four, 

alii venir (irr.) 

returned at six. We shall sup at seven. Give me 
volver (irr.) cenar dar 

some pens. We have honey. They have money. I 

pluma tener miel dinero 

have some books. You have wine. We sell bread. 

libro pan 

They sell eggs. We shall have friends. Let them 

Iiitevo amigo 

have corn. Paris, the capital of France, is a beautiful 

trigo capital Francia 

city. Happiness, the reward of virtue, is ours. 
ciudad dicha premio 

Jupiter, the son of Saturn, the husband of Juno, and 
Jupiter hi jo Saturno marido Junon 

the father of Minerva. George, the king of England. 

padre Minerva Jorge rey 

Charles the Second. Ferdinand the Seventh, the king 
Carlos Segundo Fernando 

of Spain. History of the Conquest of Mexico. Life 

hist or i a conquista Mejico vida 

of Lazarillo de Tormes. The king granted the par- 

conceder per- 
don, Death is a single moment between time and 
don muerte solo momento entre iiempo 

eternity. Interest, glory, and ambition, are com- 
eternidad i uteres gloria ambicion com- 

monly the motives of our actions. Ireland is more 
munmente motivo accion Irlanda 

populous than Scotland. Olympus and Parnassus are 
populoso Escocia Olympo Parnaso 

famous mountains. Spring, summer, autumn, and 
Jamoso, monte primavera verano otono 

winter, are the four seasons of the year. Wine 
hivierno estacion ano vino 

sells at one dollar a bottle ; butter at eighteen 

vender se a duro botella manteca diezy ocho 



SYNTAX. 209 

pence a pound, and eggs at twelve shillings a 
penique libra huevo eschelin 

hundred. How is Miss Perez ? How is your 
ciento como Sehorita 

mother ? Doctor Harvey discovered the circula- 
madre descubrir circula- 

tion of the blood. Father Isla translated the work of 
cion sangre traducir obra 

Mr. Le Sage. King John granted many privileges to 
sehor Juan conceder privilegio a 

England [personified). I shall go there at four o'clock. 

ir alii 
George the Fourth, the king of England, was crowned 

coronar 
on the 19th of July, 1821^ at one o'clock. The virtue 
Julio virtud 

and wisdom of Ulysses. Solomon, the son of David, 

sabiduria hijo 

was endowed with wisdom. Sunday is a day which we 

dotar Domingo dia 

ought to consecrate to God. Ash-Wednesday is the 
deber consagrar miercoles de ceniza 

first day of Lent. New kings, new laws. The 

quaresma nuevo rey leu 

world abounds in snares, difficulties, and dangers. 
mundo abundar lazo dificultad peligro 

Eiches, honours, dignities, (everything) vanishes 
riquezas honor dignidad todo dvsaparecer 

before death. Games, conversations, plays — nothing 
d muerte juego conversation, comedia nada 

diverts her. Bribes, promises, threats, all arts 
divertir dadiva promeso amenaza todo arte 

were used. 
us arse 



210 SYNTAX, 

ADJECTIVE.* 

1, Agreement of Adjectives. 

XVI. 

The adjective agrees in gender and number with the 
noun to which it belongs: 

Buena memoria, a good memory. 
Buenos hijos, good sons. 
Buenos hijas, good daughters. 

Note. — Adjectives qualifying the feminine noun nada are mascu- 
iine ; Nada es cierto, 

XVII. 

Two or more nouns singular require the following 
adjective to be plural. 

La madre y la hija son virtuosas, the mother and 
daughter are virtuous. 

XVIII. 

Two or more nouns singular of different genders 
require the plural adjective to be masculine : 

El hermano y la hermana son caritativos, the brother 
and sister are charitable. 

El tem^lo y la casa magnificos 9 the magnificent temple 
and house. 

Note. — When the adjective precedes two or more singular nouns, it 
generally agrees with the nearest : Elintrtpido valor y resistencia, 

* The Syntax of the noun will be treated of when we come to the 
concord of the verb with its nominative, and to the government of 
active verbs and cf prepositions. All that the learner has now need 
to observe respecting this part of speech is this : When two nouns 
signifying different things come together in English, and the former 
possesses the genitive termination s with an apostrophe, the order 
is reversed in Spanish. Thus, instead of mans nature, the order of 
construction is, the nature of man: la naturaleza del hombre. 



^SYNTAX. 211 

XIX. 

When an adjective belongs to two plural nouns of 
different genders, it generally agrees with the nearer : 

Los efectosy las riquezas preciosas, the valuable effects 
and riches. 

Note. — An adjective of two terminations should not qualify two 
nouns which differ both in gender and in number : su vista, y todos 
sus sentidos son exquisites. This construction is not uncommon ; but 
it would be better either to use an adjective of the same termination 
for both genders; or to repeat the adjective after each noun. Su 
vista es exquisita, y todos sus sentidos son exquisitos. If, however, the 
student should dislike the repetition of the adjective in this and 
similar cases, his own judgment will readily suggest some other 
mode of construction. 

XX. 

Adjectives do not agree with the titles of an indivi- 
dual, but with the individual himself: 

Su magestad estd malo, his majesty is ill. 

Su excelencia estd bueno, his excellency is well. 

2. Adjectives requiring Certain Prepositions.* 

XXI. 

Adjectives which denote plenty or want, care or ne- 
gligence, desire or aversion, knowledge or ignorance^ 

* With this part of the subject the author is least satisfied. To give 
rules which should be so comprehensive as to embrace all adjectives, 
that admit certain prepositions, and yet so precise as to exclude all 
that require other prepositions, would be impossible. Language is 
not so mechanical in its structure, nor so easily reducible to invariable 
rules. In imitation of preceding writers, he has arranged these 
adjectives according to their signification under general heads, but 
he is well aware that many exceptions will be found. The gramma- 
rian's task, however, is to classify, while to the lexicographer belongs 
the care of minutely particularising. And here the author may be 
permitted to observe, that no Spanish Dictionary worthy of the 
name has yet been published in England, Such a work should con- 
tain many important matters of which compilers have hitherto never 



212 SYNTAX. 

worthiness or untvor thin ess, capacity or incapacity, 
memory or doubt, innocence or guilt, fear or confidence, 
certainty or uncertainty, joy or sorrow, jealousy, shame; 
and in general all those which would in English require 
the prepositions of, from, and with, are followed by the 
preposition de : 

Lleno de agita, full of water. 

Descuidado de su diner o, careless of his money. 

Deseoso de saber, desirous of learning. 

Digno de muerte, worthy of death. 

Capaz del empleo, capable of the employment. 

Temeroso de nada, afraid of nothing. 

Cierto de la cosa,^ certain of the thing. 

Alegre de vernie, glad to see me. 

XXII. 

Numeral and ordinal adjectives, superlatives, rela- 
tives, interrogates, indefinite words, and nouns used 
in a partitive sense, are followed also by de : 

Uno de ellos, one of them. 

El mas sabio de los Griegos, the wisest of the Greeks. 
i Qjrien de los hombres ? which of the men ? 
Algunos de los oyentes, some of the hearers. 

Note. — Numeral adjectives require de before nouns of dimension : 
Dos veras de largo, two yards in length ; Treinta pies de alto, thirty 
feet high. And adjectives signifying distance of space or time are 
followed by the same preposition : Lejos de la ciudad. 

XXIII. 

Adjectives whose qualities are inherent in their sub- 
stantives (not those which are accidental) are also fol- 
lowed by de : 

dreamed. If ought not only to contain the etymology of words of 
Phenician, Greek, Latin, Gothic, Arabic, &c. derivation, but it also 
ought to show what adjectives precede, and what follow their nouns ; 
what prepositions are required by adjectives and verbs ; and, above 
all, to distinguish the words which are purely Castilian from those 
which are used by some provincial writers. Such a work is much 
wanted, and no ordinary difficulties shaii deter the author from exe 
cu ting it. 



SYNTAX. 213 

Largo de cuerpo, long of body. 
Ligero de pics, light of foot. 
Agndo de ingenio, acute in intellect. 

XXIV. 

Adjectives signifying profit or disprojit, likeness or 
unlilceness, pleasure, submission or relation to any thing, 
and those which would in English require the preposi- 
tion to and sometimes for, are generally followed by the 
preposition a ; 

JJtil a la navigation, useful to navigation. 
Provechoso a la salud y profitable to health. 
Gustoso a todos> agreeable to all. 
Leal a I rey } loyal to the king. 

XXV. 

Adjectives denoting proximity are followed by a : 

Vecino al palacio, adjacent to the place. 
Junto a la iglesia, adjoining the church. 
Proximo a morir, near dying. 

xxvr. 

All adjectives ending in Lie, and requiring to in Eng- 
lish, are followed by a : 

Inaccessible al pueblo, inaccessible to the people. 
Horrible a todos, horrible to all. 
Abominable a los buenos, hateful to the good. 

XXVII. 

Adjectives denoting fitness or unfitness are followed 
by para : 

Apto para el empleo, fit for the employment. 
Idoneo para todo, fit for every thing. 

XXVIII. 

Ajectives denoting experience, knowledge, &c. and 
those which require in English the preposition in, are 



214 SYNTAX. 

usually followed by the corresponding Spanish prepo- 
sition en : 

Experto en medicina, experienced in medicine. 
Perito en las leyes, learned in the laws. 
Versado en libros 9 versed in books. 
Constante enje } constant in faith. 

XXIX. 

Adjectives denoting behaviour, &c are generally 
followed by con ; 

Ingrato con los amigos, ungrateful to friends. 
Civil con todos, civil to all. 

Note. — Many of the preceding classes of adjectives admit also of 
other prepositions than those which have been assigned them, ac- 
cording to the sense in which they are taken. The same adjective 
may admit a, de, en, para, and con. See the chapter an Prepositions, in 
Etymology. See also the List in the Appendix to Syntax. 

3. Place of Adjectives. 

As names would be given to things before they were 
minutely compared with one another, and consequently 
before their qualities could be discovered, so in most 
languages the order of nature has been preserved, and 
adjectives have generally been made to follow the 
nouns with, which they agree. The Spanish is one of 
these. But whether owing to a dislike of uniformity, 
to a regard for harmony, or any other cause, custom 
has decreed, that many adjectives shall precede their 
substantives : 1. When they denote a quality essential 
to the subject ; as el duro ?narmol, the hard marble : el 
frioyelo, the cold ice. 2. When used as epithets; as 
el ambicioso Alexandro ; el sabio Salomon. 3. When 
accented on the antepenult, that is on the third syllable 
from the termination ; as intrepido gefo. Hence the 
superlatives in isimo are generally prefixed, as atro- 
cisima maldad. 

Nouns in the vocative are generally followed by their 
adjectives: lector caruimo. But if the adjective be 



SYNTAX. 215 

derived from a participle, it is more frequently followed 
by its substantive : desocupado lector. 

The irregular adjectives generally precede their 
substantives ; and so do mucho> poco, caro, and iodo. 
To these may be added the adjective pronouns, and 
participles used as adjectives. Cardinal numbers pre- 
cede their nouns ; as doce diets. Cierto, when it does 
not mean indubitable, also precedes ; as ciertos hombres, 
certain men. 

Many other adjectives are similarly placed ; jingida 
historia ; heroicas virtudes ; excelente razonamiento ; 
verdadera nobleza ; particular attention ; ridicula idea; 
discreta lisonja ; generosos pechos ; importuno hablista ; 
rigurosa observancia ; contrario dictamen ; curiosa ob~ 
servacion ; satirica representation ; agradable mezcla ; 
ingeniosa invention ; hermosos lazos ; faraoso caballero ; 
profunda erudition ; el sabio critico ; semejantes discur- 
sos ; honrada muger ; valientes palas ; diversas suertes ; 
conveniente rocio ; sosegado espiritu ; liquidas perlas ; 
perpetuo descubridor ; infinita bondad ; ignor ante pueblo ; 
dulces aguas ; claros rios ; ocultas venas ; alios arboles ; 
nativas fuentes ; artificiosa pintura ; ricos pastores / 
alegres campos ; celebres maestros ; facil cosa ; larga 
relation ; general aplauso ; perjudicial entretenimiento ; 
extraordinarios cosas ; perversos libros ; lisonjero elogio ; 
dificil empresa ; esfupendas e inumerables comedias ; 
indiscreto auior ; ilustre varon ; gloriosa memoria ; 
antigua opinion ; primer os versos ; incomparable escritor ; 
razonable cantidad ; blandas y suaves medicinas ; grave 
eclesiastico ; confuso juicio ; misteriosa historia ; hu- 
mildes pechos ; jieles relaciones ; justo aprecio ; breves; 
terminos ; poderoso ejercito, immenso trabajo ; diferentes 
formas ; insignes varones ; rara jigura ; valerosq horn- 
bre ; temerosa aventura ; peligrosa aventura ; mara- 
villoso silencio ; calarnitosos tiempos ; estravagantes 
hazanas ; piadoso varon ; immortal hazana ; honesto 
entretenimiento ; fabulosas cosas ; sublimes ingenios ; 
perfect a correspondencia ; prolijo examen. All these 
examples have been selected in perusing about fifty 
pages of the prose works of Cervantes, Lope de Vega, 
and Mariana. Some of the same adjectives with pre- 



216 SYNTAX. 

cisely the same meaning, are made by the same authors 
to folloiv their nouns : Varon illustre ; gente ignorante ; 
censuras ocultas ; alma verdadera, fyc. 

It would be easy to swell the preceding list ; but it 
is useless. Before the student ventures to compose in 
Spanish, he should be well acquainted with the subject 
of construction, not from grammatical rules only, but 
also from his own reading. To most rules there are 
exceptions. But though the position of the adjective 
is often arbitrary, and depending on sound, harmony, 
or even the caprice of the writer, rather than on any 
fixed data, yet the directions before given will be 
found useful. 

Before we dismiss this subject it is necessary to ob- 
serve that a few adjectives vary their signification with 
their place : Buena vida, a luxurious life ; vida buena, 
a virtuous life ; papeles varios, papers on various sub- 
jects; varios papeles, sundry papers ; habitation nueva* 
a dwelling newly built ; nueva habitation, a new dwell- 
ing ; mortal herido, a dangerous wound ; herido mortal, 
a mortal wound.* 



ILxertise on the Rule for Adjectives. 

A prudent man is worthy of imitation, the earth is 
prudent e digno imitation tier r a 

abundant in riches. An obedient son is a comfort 
abundant ei riquezas obedient e hijo consuelo 

to his parents. He is not mindful of me. James the 
para cuidado 

First was a learned and religious monarch. History 
sabio religioso monarca historia 

and Geography are useful sciences. A courage 

geografia util ciencia animo 
superior £o danger. He is ignorant of the fact. The 
peligro ignorante hecho 

* All adjectives must follow their substantives when they them- 
selves are connected by prepositions with other words : Hombre uiil 
para la patria ; hombre alegre de las noticius ; hombre temeroso de la muerte* 

f Abundante admits en as well as de : Abundante de, or en riquezas. 



SYNTAX. 217 

court is full of flatterers. Rich in substance, &nd 
corte lleno ad u lad or Rico substantia 
loaded ivith honours. His house is empty of friends. 
colmado honor casa vacia amigo 

Thou art unmindful ^benefits. Virtue is pleasant to 

descuidado beneficio virtud agradable 
the good. The divine perfections are interesting to 

bueno divino perfection inter esante 

man. Premature old age is the fruit of a luxurious 
anticipado vejez fruto luxurioso 

life. Nothing is so impetuous as the desires of 
vida Nada impetuoso deseo 

self-love. The love of life and the fear of death 

amor-propio vida temor muerie 

are natural to man. Health and power are uncertain 

natural salud poder incierto 

and perishable ; but glory and virtue are certain, solid, 

perecedero gloria virtud cierto solido 

and durable. The son and daughter are ill. The 

— hi jo hija enfermo 

wonderful prudence and judgment of Solomon. The 
maravilloso prudencia lino Salomon 

knowledge of political frauds and connivances is we- 
conocimiento politico fraude connivencia ne* 

cessary to him who governs. Ridiculous arguments 

cesario gobernar (irr.) ridiculoso argument o 

and objections. His majesty is indisposed. His ex- 
objeccion magestad indispuesto ex- 

cellency is resolved. Their lordships are buried 
cclencia resuelto senoria enter rar (irr.) 

in the church.. The husband and wife are buried. 

iglesia 
Cares are annexed to government. The English 
cuidado annexo gobierno Ingles 

language is more difficult than the German. (Idle 
lengua difficultoso Aleman pere~ 

men) are useless to society. Fortune is a capricious 
zoso fortuna caprichoso 

deity. I am joyful at the information. The woman is 
dezdad alegre not kids muger 



218 . SYNTAX. 

ashamed of her crime. He is jealous of his wife. 
avergonzado del it o zeloso esposa 

He is sparing in eating. The man is harsh in his 

par co comida dspero 

words, but exact in his payments. The woman is con- 
palabra pero exdcto pago con- 

stant in her devotions, and glad to pray. She was 
stante devocion alegre rogar 

afraid of death, and even pale xvith fear: she is 
temeroso muerte aun palido miedo 

desirous of life. The author is worthy of praises. 
deseoso auior digno alabanza 

The husband and the wife are unworthy of belief. 
marido indigno creencia 

The wall is thirty yards high, and six yards thick* 
muro vara alto grueso 

A man void of judgment. He was always carefid of 

falto juicio cuidado 

his money. They were capable of the employment, 

dinero capaz empleo. 

Men are uncertain of the consequences of their actions. 

incierto consequencia accion 

She was always disdainful of his favours. Some of the 

desdehoso favour alguno 

men, and many of the women were condemned. 

mucho condemn ar 

Charity is the greatest ^Christian virtues. He is fit 
caridad Crisiiano virtud apto 

for the army. You are fit for his majesty's service. 
ejerciio idoneo servicio 

Idleness is pernicious to youth. The son is like the 
pereza pernicioso juveniud hijo semejante 

father, and the daughter like the mother. He is equal 
padre hija madre igual 

to others. She is near to death. My house is adja- 
otro cercano casa ve- 

ceni to the king's palace. Your house is contiguous 
cino rey palacio. contiguo 

to mine. I live far from the noisy tumults of the 
vivo lejos rnidoso tumidto 



SYNTAX. 219 

city. Lemons are sour to the taste. The king is 
cmdad Union agrio gusto 

hateful to his subjects. The news is agreeable 

aborrecible vasallo noticias (pi.) agradable 

to the people. He lives very distant from the court. 

pueblo muy distante corte 

Tyrants are inaccessible to the people. 
iirano - 

PRONOUN.* 

RELATIVE. 

XXX. 

The relatives que, quien, and cual, agree with their 
antecedents in gender, number, and person : 

El rey que golierna, the king who governs. 
El hombre con quien venimos, the man with whom we 
„ came. 

Los hombres a quienes amais, the men whom you love. 
El criado por el qual envie la carta, the man servant 
by whom I sent the letter. 

has dudas de las cuales (or de que) haUamos, the 
doubts of which we speak. 

XXXI. 

Cuyo agrees with its antecedent in person only ; in 
gender and number with the noun to which it belongs : 

Los santos de Dios, cuyo nitmero es infiniio ; the 
saints of God, whose number is infinite. 

La iglesia, cuyos preceptos son saludables ; the church, 
whose precepts are salutary. 

* The Syntax of Personal Pronouns will be treated of when we 
come to the Concord of the Verb with its Nominative, and to the 
Government of Active Verbs and Prepositions. As a sufficient 
number of Exercises on Pronouns has already been given in the 
Etymological part of this work, none will be given in the present 
case. The student must already be sufficiently familiarised with the 
subject. 

L 2 



220 SYNTAX. 

El apostol, cuyas palabras son misteriosas; the 
apostle, whose words are mysterious. 

Note 1. Quien, as we have before observed, refers to persons 
only ; cual and que to persons or to things. When the relative is in 
the same case as the antecedent, and is not separated from it by any 
other word, que is generally employed : La muger que me hablo, the 
woman who spoke to me. Whom, however, is as often expressed 
by quien as by que : La muger a quien quiero, or la muger que amo, 
the woman whom I love. 

£. The relative is often understood in English, but it is always 
expressed in Spanish : The man I saw, el hombre que, or d quien ve. 

3. The antecedent is sometimes understood in English, especially 
in gee try ; 

" Who lives to nature, rarely can be poor ; 
Who lives to fancy, never can be rich." 

The same ellipsis is to be met with in Spanish writers, and used in 
the same sense:, in general prepositions— -Quien mas habla, menos 
piensa; who speaks the most, thinks the least. In this, and similar 
expressions, que could not be substituted for quien. 

4. As que has no change of inflection to denote the distinction of 
gender and number, and cual only that of number, the definite ar- 
ticre is always prefixed to the latter, and sometimes to the former; 
so that the gender, &c. of the relative, and consequently of the an- 
tecedent, is at once perceived : El hombre por el cual ; la muger por la 
cual; los hombres por los cuales ; el que me hahla j la que me habla 
los que me hablan; las que me hablan.* 

* Que, as a relative, is too much used by Spanish writers, and is 
often confounded with que, the conjunction. This ambiguity might 
easily be avoided by more frequently substituting another relative. 
Though we have before quoted the following clumsy sentence from 
the Gramatica Castellana, we again transcribe it for the purpose of 
pointing out the word : — " La misma frequencia con que por el uso 
nan ido pasando estos participios a ser ya adjetivos verbales, ya 
adjetivos substantivados, les ha quitado verosimilraente el regimen 
de sus verbos ; y tambien el mucho uso que se hace en nuestra 
lengua del gerundio que muchas veces es su equivalente, y ademas 
es palabra mas sonora que el participio, en especial, que el de la 
tercera conjugation, y muchas veces de la segunda, en que por 
necesidad concurren muchas ii y ee, que son letras de menos sono- 
ndad y variacion que las qve componen los vocables de los ge- 
ruadios." 



SYNTAX. 221 

ADJECTIVE. 

XXXII. 

Adjective pronouns, whether possessive, demonstra- 
tive, or indefinite, agree like adjectives in gender and 
number with the nouns to which they are joined : 

Mi casa, my house. 
Mis casas, my houses. 
Nuestrosjardines, our gardens. 
Vuestras palabras, your words. 
Est a muger, this woman. 
Aquellos hombres, those men. 
Algunos libros, some books. 
Algunas cosas, some things. 

Note 1. The noun with which the adjective prcnoun agrees, is 
frequently understood. But the possessive*, when they are con- 
junclive, are always used with the noun ; and those which are dis- 
junctive require that the substantive be immediately preceding : Bli 
casa y la tuya, my house and thine : Xuestros jardines y los vuestros, 
our gardens and yours. In one case, however, the noun is not ex» 
pressed; — when the neuter article, lo, is used, and the sense is 
indefinite : Lo mio noestuyo, mine is not thine. 

2. When the disjunctive possessive pronoun is connected with the 
noun by a verb, the article is omitted : Este libro es mio ; Aqusl libro 
es tuyo ; this book is mine; that book is thine. And when, in 
English, the preposition of precedes the possessive, there is no cor- 
responding preposition in Spanish ; and in this case the possessive 
invariably follows the noun-: A friend of mine, un amigo mio ; one of 
your friends, un amigo vuestro. 

3. Nouns in the vocative are followed by the conjunctive pos- 
sessive pronoun just as they are followed by adjectives : Hijo mio* 
my son. 

4. The possessive pronoun is changed into the definite article in 
the following cases : 

First, After reflected verbs : She washed her hands, ella se lam 
las manos. 



222 SYNTAX. 

Second. When the part of the body with which the possessive 
agrees, is not in the nominative : He gave me his 
hand, tl me dio la mano. He came with tears in his 
eyes, vino con las lagrimas en los ojos. He broke her 
head, le rompio la cabeza. 
Third, When the part of the body is the subject of the verb to 
ache : My head aches, me duele la cabeza. 
In the three cases preceding, the possessive is changed into the 
article only where the human body is concerned, and especially where 
it is subject to some action. But the same change takes place in other 
situations, if there can exist no ambiguity as to the person to whom 
the article refers : Me did la bolsa, he gave me his purse. 

VERB. 

1 . Concord of the Verb mth its Nominative, 

XXXIII. 

The verb agrees with its nominative case in number 
and person* 

El hombre viene, the man comes. 
Las mugeres ca?itan 9 the women sing. 
Yo amo, I love. 
Vosotros vendeis, you sell. 

Note.— When a pronoun is the nominative it is seldom expressed, 
unless for the sake of emphasis, or to distinguish the persons : Yo ire 
pero tu no irds ; I shall go, but thou shalt not go ; si yofuera rico, if 
I were rich. In the latter case, the omission of the pronoun would 
leave the mind in doubt as to the nominative ; for fuera, like other 
verbs in the subjunctive, has the same termination for the first and 
third persons singular. 

XXXIV. 

Two or more nominatives singular, joined by the 
conjunction y> require a verb plural : 

El rey y la reyna son coronados, the king and queen 
are crowned. 



SYNTAX. 223 

Afltel. — When the verb precedes two nominatives singulat thus 

united, it is sometimes singular : Nunca me ha sido mas necesario hi 
mixilio v iu asistencia. But in making this verb singular, the writer 
was probably more influenced by the great resemblance in meaning 
of the two nouns. Had the nouns been more different in significa- 
tion, he would have committed a gross solecism. Even as it is, the 
construction ought not to be imitated. If both nouns are perfectly 
synonymous, one would be sufficient : if they are not, the verb 
should be plural. 

2. If the nominatives be of different persons, the verb agrees 
with the first rather than the second, and with the second rather than 
the third : Yo y tu ircmos, I and thou will go : tu y el ireis, thou and 
he shall go. In the former example iremos is the first person plural, 
and agrees with nosotros understood ; in the latter, ireis is the second 
person plural, and agrees with tosotros understood. 

XXXV. 

When two or more nouns of different numbers are 
connected by the conjunctions 6, sino, ccc. the verb 
agrees with the last : 

Que yo 6 ellos vengan, whether I or they come. 
No solamente el padre, sino las hijas habian muerto ; 
not only the father, but the daughters were dead. 

Kate. — In the preceding sentences, and in all those of a similar 
construction, there is an ellipsis of the verb after the first nomina- 
tive : Que yo venga, 6 cue ellos vengan : No solamente el padre habia 
muerto, sino las hijas habian muerto. Indeed many of the anomalies in 
language are occasioned by elliptical forms of expression. 



XXXVI. 

A noun of multitude may have a verb either singular 
or plural : 

La gente viene, the people come. 
La genie van, the people go. 

Una tropa de soldados entrdron, a crowd of soldiers 
entered. 



224? SYNTAX. 

Note.— A noun of multitude is cftener formed with a singular than 
-with a plural verb, but the best Castilian writers use both forms of 
construction. Sometimes they assign a singular, at other times a plural 
verb to the same noun. Little reliance is therefore to be placed on 
the distinction which some writers on the subject have attempted to 
draw between Collectives Definite and Indefinite, the former, ac- 
cording to them, admitting a verb singular, and the latter a verb plu- 
ral. If the student will take the trouble to read a few pages of 
Cervantes, Mariana, Father Isla, kc. be will find that such a dis- 
tinction is often purely visionary. Seme words, however, as nation, 
pueblo, parlamento, ejercito, are never found with a plural verb. 

2. Government of Verbs. 

XXXVII. 

Active verbs govern the accusative case : 

Los buenos araan la vhtud, the good love virtue. 
Los buenos quieren a Digs, the good love God. 
El me ensehciy he teaches me. 

Note 1. When a person is the accusative, the preposition d is pre- 
fixed to the noun ; but, as we have before observed, that preposition 
has no government: it is only the sign of the case. It is therefore 
often omitted when the cases are sufficiently distinct without it ; and 
it should also be so when its insertion would occasion ambiguity : 
Jntroduje la muger alconde, I introduced the woman to the count, 
If a were inserted before the article prefixed to muger, how could any 
one determine whether the count were introduced to the woman, or 
the woman to the count? And yet such forms of expression are by- 
no means unfrequent in celebrated Castilian authors. Whatever 
excellencies many of these may possess, perspicuity is not always 
amongst the number. 

2. When the accusative case of a pronoun is governed by a verb 
in the imperative, or the infinitive, or by the present participle, it 
follows, and is united with, the word by which it is governed: 
AmemosisA, let us love hei* : AmarhA, to love her : Amandai a, loving 
her. In other cases it precedes the governing verb, as in the last 
example under the above rule. When the verb is compounded, the 
governed pronoun precedes both the auxiliary and the partieiple 



SYNTAX. 225 

Si la hubiera amado y if I had loved her ; but it is placed between the 
two words forming the compound perfect participle : HabiendoLA 
amado, having loved her. 

Sometimes, however, the governed pronoun may follow the verb, 
even when that verb is not in the imperative, the infinitive, or the 
present participle j but in such cases the verb must always be the 
first word in the sentence : ConoscioyiE inmediatamente. he knew me 
immediately: CegdbaLEs el interes, interest blinded them. Tbis 
mode of construction is considered elegant. 



XXXVIII. 

Many active verbs govern also these objective cases 
of the personal pronouns me, te, le, with their plurals 
nos 9 os, lesj and also se, which is of both numbers : 

Me hallo, he spoke to me. 
Te did algo, he gave something to thee. 
Le escribi, I wrote to him (or to her.) 
Ella os dijo, she told you. 

Note 1. As these pronouns have the same form with the accusa- 
tives, so they are similarly placed. See Note 2, under Rule xxxvii. 

2. When a verb not in the imperative, infinitive, &c. governs two 
pronouns, the one in the accusative and the other in the objective, 
the former immediately precedes the verb, unless that verb be 
reflected: Me lo dijo, he told it to me ; se la did el rey, the king 
gave her to them. When the verb is reflected, the objective; on 
the contrary, is placed nearer to that verb : Se me descubrw, be dis- 
covered himself to me. Lastly, if both pronouns follow a verb in 
the imperative, infinitive, or the present participle, the objective is 
joined immediately to the verb : Quiero decirrxlo, I wish to tell it to 
thee, 

3. Sometimes two accusative or two objective cases are used 
with the same verb. In these instances the one precedes, and the 
other often, if that verb be not in the imperative, &c. follows the 
verb. The former can admit no preposition ; the latter always re- 
quires it : Yo te qmo a ti, perp tu no me amas a mi j I love thee, but 
thou dost not love me : Ellos se aman A sr, they love themselves 
Sometimes mistne k added to the latter pronoun : Me amo a an 

if 5 



226 SYNTAX. 

mismo, I love myself: Nos amamos a nosotros mismos, we love 
mine'ves. The association, however, of mismo is unnecessary, as the 
two simple cases must surely be sufficiently emphatic without it ; 
and accordingly we find that it is not now so generally used in this 
case as it formerly was. 

4. Sometimes, when the verb is not in the imperative, &c. both 
the governed pronouns precede that verb, and then the one usually 
placed after the verb precedes even the other that always goes before 
it : a ti te amo, I love thee. 

After what has been said it is perhaps scarcely necessary to add 
that when the yerb is in the imperative, &c. both pronouns are 
placed after that verb, and the one preceded by the preposition in- 
variably follows the other : AmemosLE a el, let us love him : 
AmandosE a si, loving himself, &c. 

3. Verbs Requiring Certain Prepositions.* 

XXXIX. 

Verbs implying motionfrom a place, are followed by 
de; to a place, by a ; and through a place by por ; 

Viene de Francia, he comes from France. 

Va a LondreS) he is going to London. 

Anda por el campo, he is walking through the field. 

Note 1. Towards is generally rendered by hacia, sometimes by 
para, if the destination be uncertain: Part id para la ciadad, he set 
out for the city. And here the student will perceive that the 
English expression is exactly similar in both cases. rl He is gone 
to the city," contains a positive and unconditional assertion : *' he 
set out/or the city," means that the subject of the assertion intended 
at the time of his departure to proceed to the city, but it by no 

* With this part of his subject the author is as little satisfied as 
with that of the Adjectives similarly situated. See the note to 
Adjectives Reauiring Certain Prepositions* He will endeavour, how- 
ever, to lessen the discouraging difficulties of both, by inserting in 
the Appendix, a copious List of Verbs, and other words, with the 
prepositions by which they are followed, and the nouns governed by 
those prepositions. 



SYNTAX. 227 

means implies that some unexpected circumstance might not divert 
him from his design. 

2. Verbs implying distance, separation, &c, are comprehended 
under the above rule : Me alejarc de mi tierra, I shall remove from 
my country j futron de laprision, they went from prison. 

XL. 

Verbs signifying plenty or tonnt, care or negligence, 
remembrance or forgetful 'ness, praising or blaming, load- 
ing, filling, or unloading, binding or releasing, jeering or 
pitying, receiving, depriving, repenting, absolving, using, 
and many others, are followed by de : 

El palacio ahundaha de riquezas, the palace abounded 
with riches. 

El rey se acuerda de su amigo, the king remembers 
his friend. 

Me olvide de todo el mundo, I forgot every body. 

Estaba siemnre caroado de miserias, he was always 
loaded with misery. 

Rien de los que se compadecen de ellos, they laugh at 
those who pity them. 

Note 1. Olvidar, when it is not reflected, governs an accusative. To 
remember is also rendered by tenerd lamemoria* 

2> Verbs reflected of jeering, of trusting, and distrusting, and many 
others, also require de: Fiate de mi, rely on me. 

XLI. 

All verbs implying acquisition or loss, advantage or 
disadvantage, and requiring in English the prepositions 
to, for, or from, are followed by a: 

Se convertio a Dios, he turned to God. 

Embio a Madrid, he sent to Madrid. 

Vote. — This rule is by far the most general of any in the Spanish 
"Syntax : it is too general to be understood without the. aid of nume- 
rous subdivisions. 

The following are followed by d : 

1. Verbs of ashing or denying, of granting or refusing ; Elreo 
pidid perdon a! jnez, the criminal asked pardon from the 



228 SYNTAX. 

judge : Nego eljucz perdon al reo, the judge deiied par- 
don to the criminal. 

2. Verbs of buying or selling : Ccmjrrart los libros d ml amigo, I 

will buy the books from my friend : Vendio la casd d la 
mnger, he sold the house to the woman. 

3. Verbs of borrowing or lending, of owing or paying : Tomd pres- 

tado el dinero al conde, he borrowed the money from the 
count : Debio mucho al tesoro del rey, he owed ranch to 
the king's treasury. 

4. "Verbs of promising and offering: Prometio el dinero al nego- 

ciante, he promised the money to the merchant; Ofrecioel 
reyno d su primogtnito, he offered the kingdom to his eldest 
son. 

5. Verbs of giving and of taking away : Did el seual d su com" 

panero, he gave the signal to his companion : Robo las 
pedrerias a la mnger, he stole the jewels from the woman. 
(3. Verbs of conforming, yielding, and resisting: Se acomoda al 
juicio de otros, he conforms to the judgment of others : Se 
opuso a las leyes del reyno, he opposed the laws of the 
kingdom. 

7. Verbs of declaring and recommending: Declarart la verdad d 

todos los hombres, I will declare the truth to all men : En- 
commendard el negocio al rey, I will recommend the business 
to the king. 

8. Verbs of questioning and answering : Pregunto al hombre, he 

asked the man : Respondio d la ranger, he answered the 
woman. 

9. Verbs of pertaining and happening : Pertenece el hombre d la 

tierra, man belongs to the earth : Desgracias acoutecen d los 
hombres, misfortunes happen to men. 

10. Verbs of playing and oondemning: Juega a les naipes, he is 

playing at cards : El general condemno al desertor d la 
muerte, the general condemned the deserter to. death. 

11. Many other verbs which are not easily reducible to distinct 

heads ; as adherir, cenirse, humiliarse, &c. 

XLII. 

Many verbs are found with en or con, according to 
the meaning of the sentence : 



SYNTAX. 22 

El mundo se divide en muckas partes, the world is 
divided into many parts. 

El se caso con la p-incesa Maria, he married the 
princess Mary. 

Note. — Verbs of behaviour, general conduct, &c. are generally fol- 
lowed by con : Ajustarse con alguno, to settle with some one. 



EXERCISE ON VERBS. 

1. On the Concord of the Verb with its Nominative. 

My brother and sister {are opposed) to it, but 

hermano y nermann oponerse (irr.) a pero 

my father and mother consent. The good are happy. 

padre y madre consentir (irr.) bueno feliz 
The wicked are wretched. The meadows are beautiful 

malo infeliz prado hermoso 

in Spring. Fortune and caprice govern the 

en primavera Jbrtuna capricho gobernar (irr.) 

world. Interest and vanity cause much unhappiness, 
mundo interes vanidad causar mucho infelicidad 

I or you ought to go. If we or they should go. A 

6 deber ir si 

babbler speaks when we do not hear. His virtues 
Jiablador hablar cuando escuchar virtual 

are noble. Thou and he shall perish. The man, 

perecer (irr.) hombre 

the woman, and I began to sing. I and he shall 

muger comenzar (irr.) a cantar 

relate the adventure. The parliament decreed that 
contar aventura parlamento decretar que 

the army should return. The majority opposed the 

ejercito volver majoridad oponerse a 

resolution. The people are looking** The people 
resolucion pueblo mirar gente 

are powerful. The nation is powerful. An infinity of 

poderoso nacion injinidad 

* To be rendered either by the third person of the indicative 
present, or by estar with the present participle. 



230 SYNTAX. 

men entered. A multitude of women followed. A 

entrar multilud seguir (irr.) 

crowd of children cried out. The king and the queen 
tropa nino clamar rey reyna 

are there. Demosthenes and Cicero were two great 

alii Ciceron 

orators. Whether he or I were there (is of no moment). 
orador que nada es 

Whether you or they should go, the king shall be 
informed. 
informar 

2. On the Government of Verbs. 

God governs the world. Riches produce 

gobernar (irr.) mundo riquezas producir 

envy, and discord produces quarrels* Love God, 

envidia discordia contienda querer (irr.) Dios 

christians. Nature makes the poet. Minos loved 

cristiano naturaleza hacer (irr.) poeta 

his people more than his own family. I resolved to 

pueblo propio Jamilia resolver (irr.) 

go to seek Senor Arias de Londoiia. We fear God. 
ir a buscar • temer 

We honour the Icing. She loves her mistress. The 

honrar am a 

man asked Don Quixote. He prayed the damsel, 
pedir (irr.) rogar (irr.) donzella 

We desired the innkeeper. I hated the alguaziL 

desear mesonero aborrecer (irr.) — =» 

We always loved the mother. They terrified 

siempre madre poner (irr.) miedo 

my husband. The wicked often praise the good. 

marido malo muchas veces alabar 

We heard the preacher. You saw the minister, 
oir (irr.) predicador w(irr.) ministro 

They reproved the servant, and praised the master. 

reprehender criado alabar amo 

We surprised the enemy. You conquered the 
sosprehender enemigo veneer 



SYNTAX. 231 

Moors. The man disarmed John. Csesar conquered 

Morisco desarmar Juan 

Pompey. 

Pompcio. 

Place of the Governed Pronouns. 

I am resolved to send thee to Salamanca. The 

revolver (irr.) enviar 

man observing ?ne attentively, said: I wish 

observar attentamente decir (irr.) querer (irr.) 

to punish thee. The countess, seeing him in the gar- 
castigar condesa ver (irr.) en jar* 

den, called out. We desire to see her. Forgive them, 
din clamar desear de perdonar 

G God. Forgive him. gentlemen. Let us love her. 

seh or 
Let us separate them, I wish to help thee. You ought to 

separar ayudar deber 

see them. If we had seen them. If you had hated 

aborrecer (irv.) 
her* If they had J , defeated him. God sees us, calls us, 

veneer llama 

and will judge us. My father placed me in his 

juzgar poner (irr.) a 

business. He ordered me that I should follow 
oficio ordenar segidr (irr.) 

him. We put ourselves. He received us with 

poner (irr.) recibir con 

gladness. They told us. We spoke to them. I 

alegria decir (irr.) hablar 

asked him. The wife wrote to him. We told 
preguntar muget escribir 

her. What I had heard seemed to me a dream. 

toque parecer (irr.) sueiio 

We will punish you. He turned it (neut.) He 

castigar convertir (irr.) 

killed her. She saw them. They spoke to us, Give 
watar dar (irr.) 

it (n.) to the man. 



232 SYNTAX. 

He told it (n.) to me. We gave her to them. Her 
image presented itself to them. They will grant her 
imagen presentarse conceder 

to me. They will give her to them. I told it (n.) to 
Iter. She granted it (n.) to them. They gave them (m.) 
to us. Husbands, love your wives : God has given 

mar i do muger 

them to you. , God requires thy heart : give it to him : 

requerir (irr.) corazon 
canst thou refuse it to him ? I wish to give her to 
poder (irr.) rehusar 

them. The privilege was great : he resolved to grant 

privilegio 
it to them. He discovered himself to us. Give her 

descubrirse 
this letter, but do not give it to her before him. 
carta pero delante de 



3. On Verbs requiring certain Prepositions.* 

I passed from the bitterest grief to the greatest 
pasar amargo dolor 

joy. We had passed then from the hardships of 
alegria entonces rigor 

slavery to the sweets of liberty. They have passed 
escalvitad dulzura libertad 

from death unto life. We bring wines from 

muerte vida traer (irr.) vino 

France to England. The child was surfeited with 
Francia Inglaterra ahitarse 

meats, Let us arm ourselves with patience. 
manjar armarse paciencia 

He filled the house with people. Remember thy 

llenar casa gente acordarse (irr.) 

Creator. He boasts o^ wisdom. We shall repent 
Criador gloriarse _ sabio arrepentirse 

* If the student should be at ar^ loss to determine from the 
7iiea7iing of the verb what preposition should be employed, let him 
turn to the List in the Appendix to Syntax. 



SYNTAX. 233 

of our crimes. I shall remove from my country, 

delito alejarse tierra 

They escapecl/row prison. 1 appeaiy?om the sentence. 
escapar prision apelar sentencia 

He is recovering from sickness. We rest 

convalecer (irr.) enfirmidad descansar 

from labour. They disembarked from the ship. He 

trabajo desembarcar nave 

has degeneratedy?-o??2 his birth. He was deposed 

degenerar nacimiento deponer (irr.) 

from his authority. They are loaded with wheat. 

autoridad car gar trigo 

You ought to abstain from fruit. Rules always 

deber abstenerse (irr.) fruto reglo siempre 
want examples. I doubt not of the death of my 
necesitar ejemplo dudar 

husband. Christians, pity my youth 

tnarido cristiano compadecerse (irr.) juventud 
and my tears. Let us avail ourselves of 'the present 

lagrima aprovecharse present e 

time. He had changed his dress. The (worldly 
iiempo mudar vestido mun- 

niinded) will deride me. I asked the innkeeper if 
dano burlarse preguntar mesonero si 

he had any fish. The adventures of Gil Bias, says 

pescado aventura decirijxx*) 

Father Isla, were stolen from Spain, and adopted in 
padre robar Espana adoptar en 

France. No one is able to resist his arguments. 
poder resistir argumento 
Let us dedicate ourselves to God. He accustoms 
dedicarse habituarse 

himself to bear the fatigue of journeys. I prefer 

sufrir fatiga Jornada preferir (irr.) 

my country to the hundred cities of Crete. The 

patria ciudad Creta 

fortune of the wicked resembles the lightning which 
fortuna malo semejarse relampago 

precedes a (clap of thunder). He can play at cards, 
precede r trueno poder jugar naipes 



234 SYNTAX. 

and you can play at dice, It concerns princes to 

dado importar principe 

judge of their ministers. Adam was condemned to 
juzgar ministro A dan condemnar 

cultivate the ground. We belong to the 

cidtivar tierra pertenecer (irr.) 

earth. (Everything) seemed to her a dream. The 

todo parecer (irr.) sueno 

world has often been compared to a theatre. Turn 
mundo compararse teatro convertirse 

to God, my sons. He paid the debt to the executors. 

hijo pagar denda albacea 

He comes from Spain, and he is going to Italy. 
venir (irr.) ir (irr.) Italia 

We shall return the money to the banker. We 

volver (irr.) diner o banqnero 

owe much to heaven. He promised his daughter to 
deber mucho cielo prometer hija 

the count. I will abandon myself to my fate. We 

conde abandonarse suerte 

ought to conform to reason. He condescended 
deber conformarse r&zon condescender (irr.) 

to entreaties. He yielded to the arguments of his 

ruego rendirse 

friend. He burned in his desires. 
amigo abrasarse deseo 



XLIII. 



VERBS PASSIVE 

Require the preposition de or por before the agent : 

La virtud es amada de or por todos, virtue is loved 
by all. 

El rey fue herido por su antagonist a, the king was 
wounded by his antagonist. 

Note 1. De and por cannot always be indifferently used for each 
other. Generally when the action is of a mental nature, either de 
or par may be employed ; but p>r oftener than de when the actor 



SYNTAX. 235 

is a person The two examples under the rule illustrate both 
cases. 1,_But, like many other distinctions, this is often fallacious. 

2. The instrument of an action requires con before it : El la mato 
con un martillo, he killed her with a hammer. The injury or bloio 
occasioning death, &c. may be preceded by either de or con in the 
singular, and a in the plural : El la mato de (or con) un puntapie, he 
killed her with a kick ; el la mato a puntapies, he killed her with 
kicks. 

XLIV. 

Verbs passive in English are frequently rendered 
into Spanish by prefixing the pronoun se to the third 
person singular and plural of the active voice : 

Se oi/6 una voz, a voice was heard. 
Se ama la virtud, virtue is loved. 

Note 1. Here the student should be careful not to confound verbs 
reflected with those of which the passive voice is formed in the pre- 
ceding manner. The former are reflected through all the persons ; 
the latter in the third person only. We cannot say Pedro se quierz 
when we mean to assert that Peter is the endurer of the action. 
loving ; but Pedro es querido, 

2. Most active verbs may be used reflectively by adding the accu- 
sative cases of all the personal pronouns to those verbs : Detente, 
emigOy Gil Bias, stop, friend, Gil Bias. Here the accusative te is 
added to detener, which is an active, not a reflected verb. Without 
the pronoun, the action of the verb would have no object on which 
its influence might terminate. Similar forms of expression are com- 
mon in our own writers, and especially in our poets : 

" Oh stay thee, stay thee, man of blood ! — w 
" Oh haste thee, haste, the lady cries." 

Infinitive Mood, 

XLV. 

One verb governs another in the infinitive, sometimes 
without, but generally with a preposition: 

Quiero estudiar, I wish to study. 
Voy a pasearme, I am going to walk. 



236 SYNTAX. 



XLVI. 



Verbs signifying to dare, to begin, to teach, to learn, 
to exhort, to invite, to prepare, to assist, to compel, fyc. 
require a before the infinitive : 

No me atrevo a ir al apasento del rey, I dare not go 
to the king's apartment : 

Ayudo a sembrar, he helped to sow. 

ILmpezb a baylar, he began to dance. 

Se preparo a partir, he prepared to depart. 

Me solicito a ir, he desired me to go. 

Me convido a cenar, he invited me to supper. 

XL VII. 

Verbs of abstaining, ceasing, depriving, mdjinishing, 
are followed by de : 

Me abstengo de beber vino, I abstain from drinking 
wine. 

Cesad, amigos, de atormentarme, cease, friends, to 
torment me. 

Me habia privado de escribir, he had debarred me 
from writing. 

Note, — Adjectives and verbs generally admit the same prepositions 
before the following infinitive as they do before nouns. Hence, the 
rules which have been given for them will be found useful on the 
present subject. Thus a verb requires para before the infinitive, 
when the effect or consequence of an action is denoted. 

XLVIII. 

An action just past is rendered by acabar de, and 
one that must necessarily happen hereafter by haber de 
or tener que, before the infinitive : 

Acaba de llegar, he is just arrived. 
Ha de escribir, he must write. 

Note. — To ha ve, followed by an infinitive, is rendered by tener que; 



SYNTAX. 237 

to be, by haber de : Teugo que escribir, I have to write ; he de escribir, 
I am to write, or I must write : No hay que pcrder tiempo, no time is 
to be lost. 

XLIX. 

The infinitive is frequently governed by r adjectives, 
participles, and substantives: 

Cansado de trabajar, tired of working. 
Licencia tengo de ir a Londres, I have permission to 
go to London. 

Note 1. When the infinitive is governed by a noun, the preposi- 
tion de is always required before the verb, as in the latter example. 

2. The infinitive, as we have before observed, lias often the nature 
of a verbal noun ; and it sometimes admits the definite article before 
it : Me gusta el leer, reading pleases me j al ver d estos hombres, to 
see these men. 

L. 

The infinitive in English is often rendered into 
Spanish by a conjunction and a finite verb : 

Me ordeno que le siguiese inmediatamente 9 he or- 
dered me to follow him immediately. 

Se que todo esto es verdadero, I know all this to be 
true. 

PARTICIPLE. 

LI. 

Participles have the same government as the verbs 
from which they are derived : 

Queriendo a Dios, loving God. 

Arrepintiendose de sus culpas, repenting of his 
crimes. 

LII. 

The perfect participle is declined after the verb ser ; 
but not after haber : 

Elhombre es premiado, the man is rewarded. 



238 SYNTAX. 

La muger es premiada, the woman is rewarded. 
Los hombres son premiados, the men are rewarded. 
Las muger es son premiada s, the women are rewarded, 

Notel. The same participle is also declined after certain neuter 
verbs, but then ser is understood : Ella parece affligida, she appears 
afflicted, she appears to be afflicted. 

2. The participle past is sometimes declined after tener, but then 
it does not agree with the nominative of the verb, but with the noun 
governed by the verb : Tengo escrita una carta a mi hijo t I have 
written a letter to my son. This declension happens only when 
there is an accusative after tener ; in other cases the participle is 
indeclinable : Tengo escrito d mis hermanas, I have written to my 
sisters. But the instances in which tener is used as an auxiliary are 
xexj few, — in modern writers at least. 

Anciently the perfect participle was declined in Spanish as it is- 
now in French in such instances as the following : Las cartas que 
hemos escritas (Les lettres que nous avons ecrites), the letters which we 
have written; Las mugeres que han vistas (Lesfemmes qu'ils ont vues);. 
the women whom they have seen. 

3. The perfect participle is sometimes elegantly used without the 
present participle siendo, but the latter is always understood : Tomada 
esia resolution, me levantz, this resolution being taken, I arose ; Hecho 
este juramento, me prepare d ir, this oath being made, I prepared 
to go. 

4. The present participle after a finite verb in English, is some- 
times rendered into Spanish by the infinitive : Le oigo cantar, I hear 
him singing. This form of construction is chiefly restricted to the 
governing verbs oir and ver. 

LIXL 

The English present participle is often rendered by 
the infinitive in Spanish : 

The fatigue of walking, lafatiga de pasear. 
Without seeing him, sin verle. 

JSfote.— This mode ef construction is generally used when the 
English present participle is preceded by a preposition. 



SYNTAX. 239 

Exercise on the Prepositions required by Verbs Passive, 
on the Infinitive Mood, and on Participles. 

He is loved by all. Great men are persecuted bij 
to do perseguir (irr.) 

envy. Learning and virtue are sought by few. Caesar 
envidia ciencia virtud buscar poco 

was slain by the conspirators. Abel was slain by Cain* 
matar conspirador — — — — 

Rome was built by Romulus. God is adored by all 
Roma fundar Romulo adorar 

nations. The history of Don Quixottewas written 
nacion — — escribir (irr.) 

by Cervantes. This church was founded by the king, 

iglesia rey 

The house was overthrown by the wind. The criminal 

casa derribqr -cento reo 

was sentenced by the judge. 
sentenciar juez 

I wish to go, but he does not wish to return. We 
querer ir (irr,) pero ro/rer (irr.) 

ought to suffer with patience the evils which we are not 
deber sufrir paciencia mat 

able to avoid. We ought to jiee from vice, and 

poder (irr.) evitar huir vicio 

to practise virtue. Grammar teaches us to speak and 

practicar gramatica ensenar hablar 

to vcrite correctly. We ought to htotu ourselves* • 

escribir correctamente conocer (irr.) a nos mismos 

The armies begin to descend. We were compelled 
ejercito empezar descender compel ir (in.) 

to abandon the city. We were obliged to see them* 

abandonar ciuclad obligar ver (irr.) 

You assisted them to conquer the enemy. Help mej 

ayudar veneer enemigo 

my friends, to conquer myself. Fortune will, perhaps. 

ami go Jbrtuna quiz a 

cease to persecute me. They ceased to torment me with 
cesar perseguir (irr.) tormentar 



240 SYNTAX. 

their remedies. We abstain from drinking. I prepared 

remedio abstener(\rr.) beber 

myself to go. I exhort thee to live well. He will 

exhortar vivir 

learn to write. I assisted the captain to undress. 

capitan desnudar. 

The Asiatics remembering the dignity of Berenice, 

Asiano acordarse (irr.) dignidad — ■ 

and pitying her hard fate, sent her sue- 

compadecerse (irr.) malo suerte envia so- 

cours. The emperor considering the hard fate of the 

eorro emperador consider ar 

queen, and admiring her constancy, resolved to 

reyna admirar constancia resolver (irr.) 

send her some consolation. Profiting by the 

consolacion aprovecharse 
opportunity, I went away. Ihave just seen the king, 
ocasion irse (irr.) ver (irr.) 

and they have just heard the acclamations of the people. 
oir (irr.) grita pueblo 

We have to write. He is to go. They were to sing. 

cantnr. 
The men are fatigued. The girl is loved. The 
fatigar ninu 

wicked are hated. The good are esteemed. The 

malo aborrecer (irr.) bueno estimar 

woman shall be rewarded. Their virtues shall be 
muger premiar 

rewarded. The church is built. The churches have 

iglesia fundar 
been founded. The learned are honoured. The fatigue 

sabio honrar 

of running. The facility of writing. The labour of 

correr facilidad trabajo 

thinking. Without answering, he departed. Without 
pensar (irr.) respond er partir 

seeing her, I walked through the street. 
andar (irr.) culle 



SYNTAX. 241 



PREPOSITION.* 

LIV. 

Prepositions govern the objective case : 

Sin ti, without thee. 

Quejd de mi, he complains of me. 

Con la espdda, with the sword. 

"Note 1. The preposition in Spanish immediately precedes the 
noun or pronoun which it governs. The same rule should be ob- 
served in English. 

2. Many prepositions; and words used as such 3 are Followed by 
the preposition de : 

Acerca del batallo, concerning the battle. 
A cubierto de la tempested, under shelter from the storm, 
Ademas de esto, besides this. 
Al lado de ella, at or by the side of her. 
AI rededor de la casa. around the house. 
Antes de las ocho, before eight o'clock. 
A pesar de esto, Twtwitkstanding this. 
Cerca de la plaza, near the place. 
Dehajo de la mesa, under the table. 
■ Delante del palacio, before the palace. 
Dentro de la casa, within the house. 
Despues del sermon, after the sermon. 
Detras del caslillo, behind the castle. 
Encima de la puena, above the door. 
Enfrente de la casa, opposite the house. 

* Of the Syntax of the adverb nothing can be said. It has no 
government; and its position in the sentence is too variable to be 
determined by rules. Much depends on the sound mid harmony of 
the syllables ; much on emphasis, and the relative importance of 
words, but more still on caprice. Generally, however^ adverbs of 
manner, especially those in mente, follow the verb they qualify. 

M 



242 SYNTAX. 

Fuera de la ciudad, without the city. 

Mas ac& de las mur alias, on this side the walls. 

Mas alia, del parque, beyond the park. 

3. The preposition is usually repeated before every noun : 
Cuando vieron que el testador dejaba las mejores alajas a la seHora 

Jacinta y a su nieta ; and when they saw that the testator had left 

the best effects to dame Jacinta and her niece. 



CONJUNCTION. 

LV. 

The conjunction connects like cases and moods : 

Yo y tu temimos a Dios, I and thou fear God. 
Ella *ca y viene, she goes and comes. 

LVI. 

Some conjunctions require the indicative, others the 
subjunctive, mood after them: 

g Porque cor re vm ? why do you run ? 

Es preciso que venga, he must come. 

Note, — Many conj unctions require the subjunctive where no con. 
tingency is implied ; and where contingency is implied, the sub- 
junctive must always be used, whatever conjunction precede. 

LVII. 

Dado que, Men que, con tal que, hasia que, amenos 
que, no sea que, antes que, encaso que y sin que, sea que, 
ojaia, and other conjunctions which imply something 
conditional or contingent, govern the subjunctive : 

Con tal que viniere, provided he should come. 
Bten que la ambition sea un view, though ambition is 
a vice. 



SYNTAX. 243 



LVIII. 



Que, after words implying nothing either conditional 
or contingent) is followed by the indicative : 

Se que viene, I know that he is coming. 
Dice que vendra, he says that he will come. 

LIX. 

Que, after verbs implying Jit ness, necessity, command, 
permission, desire, joy, wonder, fear, doubt, &c. after 
impersonals, and many verbs used interrogatively or 
negatively? is followed by the subjunctive : 

Conviene que venga^ it is fit that he come. 
Temo que vaya, I fear that he may go. 
No ha ninguno que oiga, there is no one to hear. 
No creo que saiga, I do not believe he will go out. 

'Note 1. Que, after verbs winch are a consequence, an effect, Cxc. of 
some preceding action, and which generally require the infinitive in 
English, is followed by the subjunctive in Spanish : Haciendo strides 
que callaseii, making signs for them to be silent. 

2. Some conjunctions, though they usually govern the subjunc- 
tive, admit the indicative in certain tenses if no contingency be im- 
plied. Thus aunqv.e and bien que are, in that case, followed by the 
preterimperfect of the indicative : Aunque suplicaba ianto, though he 
entreated so much. 

3. The best direction which can be given for the use of the indi- 
cative or the subjunctive after que, £cc. is the positive or contingent 
sense of the sentence. But after the conjunctions enumerated under 
Rule lvii., the subjunctive is used if even the verb like the indica- 
tive simply asserts: Bien que la ambition sea un vicio, though ambi- 
tion is a vice. 



M 2 



244 SYNTAX. 

INTERJECTION. 

LX. 

Adjectives used as interjections require de before 
the noun or pronoun following: 

Pobre de mi padre ! my poor father ! 
Pohre de mi ! poor me ! 

Note 1« — Ay, when equivalent to icoe, is also followed by de: 
! Ay de mi ! woe to me! 

Ncte % — The interjection ete is used only before pronouns, with 

which it is united, and it requires the objective case : 

Eiela que! lo ! she goes. 
Eteme que vengo ! Id ! I come. 



Exercise on the Rides for Prepositions and Conjunctions. 

The hopes en which his ambition had fed, 

esperanza de ambition alimentarse 

were, destroyed. The soldiers were before the palace. 
perder (irr.) soldado delante palacio 

After an absence of two months, he returned. 
despues ausencia mes volver (irr.) 

Under the appearance of joy, she concealed fear. 
bajo apariencia alegria ocidtar miedo 

He came . before, me. He spoke to me about the 

venir (irr.) delante hablar cerca 

affair. He lived by the side of a mountain. Stay 
nevocio vivir al lado monte quedarse 

with me, my son, and you will be {under shelter) from 

kijo estar a cubierto 

the rain. Without thee, the world would be a desert; 
iluvia sin mundo desiertQ 



SYNTAX. 2i5 

xvith thee, it is supportable. We have been before the 
con tolerable. ir (irr.) del 'ante 

judge. Before nine o'clock. Flattering words insi- 
juez antes lisonjero palabra insi- 

nuate themselves like a serpent under flowers. With 
nuarse como serpiente aebajojlor 

us there is safety. Behind us there is danger, and 

seguridad detras peligro 

before us uncertainty. Before his death, he con- 
delante incertidumbre antes muerie con- 

fessed his crime before witnesses, hie drew from under 
fesar (ivr.) delito delante testigo sacar debajo 

the habit a purse. He saw himself compelled to 

vestido bolsa verse (irr.) precisado 

place me under the rod of a preceptor. Cast thy 

poner (irr.) bajo ferula poner 

eyes on me. How shall I be able to live mthoui 

ojo en como poder (irr.) vivir sin 

thee? There was no mercy for me. 
misericordia por 
The thing could not be discovered, because they 

cosa descubrirse (irr.) porque 

never carried any letters. Consider, man, thai 
nunca llevar carta consider ar 

every thing has had a beginning, and that it xuitt have 

todo principio 

an end. It is not (to be wondered at) that the super- 
fn maravillarse super- 

stitious ages have produced an unbelieving age. There 
sticioso sigh prodticir (irr.) incredulo 

are few who (have not exposed themselves) to 

poco exponerse (irr.) 

temptations. The judge ordered that the carrier should 
tentacion juez mandar arriero 

be stripped, and that in his presence two hundred 

desnudar presencia 

lashes should be given him. Though he slay me,, I 
azote dar (irr.) mm que matar 

will trust in him. If I have offended him, I will 
far si qfender 



246 SYNTAX. 

ask pardon of him. Although Homer (according 

pedir (irr.) perdon Homer o segun 

to) Horace, slumbers sometimes among heroes, he is 

Horacio sonar algunas veces entre 

yet the first of all poets. I will give you this 

sin embargo poet a 

picture, provided you preserve it as a testimony of 

con tal que guardar como prenda 
ray friendship. If I should live to see that day, if I 

amistad vivir dia 

slwidd return to your embraces. I shall believe our 

volver (irr.) abrazo creer 

conjugal love well rewarded. Though queen Elizabeth 

- amor recompensar reyna 

loved the earl of Essex, she consented- that he should 

conde consenlir (irr.) 

he beheaded. (TVould to God) I had been there! 

degollar ojala alii 

Carry this book to your brother that he may learn 
llevar libro hermano aprender 

his lesson. Send me the newspaper, that I may read 
leccion enviar gctzeta leer 

it. If I perceive thai you keep bad company, you 

percebir tener malo compania 

shall lose nry friendship. I doubt whether any 

perder (irr.) duda r 

philosopher has ever known the origin of the winds. 
Jilosqfar conocer (irr.) origen viento 

The Egyytians doubted not that certain plants were 

Egiptio cierto planta 

divinities. 
divinidad. 



SYNTAX. 247 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 1 



EXERCISE FIRST. 

Gil Bias and the Sick Canon. 

The good ecclesiastic (could do no more), and as 
eclesiastico no poder (in\) mas 

I presented him 2 ' a large glass of the sovereign specific 
presentar gran vaso sober a no e&picifico 

to drink^ i6 Stop,* friend Gil Bias," said he to 

ami go ■ — — decir (irr.) 

me, with a languid voice; "now I cannot drink 

con languida voz ya poder (irr.) 

more. I know that I must die^ notwithstanding the 

mas coriGceriixw) dpesar de 

great virtue of the water ; and I do not feel better^ 

virtud dgua sentir (irr.) 

though scarcely a drop of blood has been left in my 
aunque a pen as got a sangre 
body : 6 a clear proof that the most skilful and most 

clara prueba habil 

learned physician in the world, 1 is not capable of pro- 
sabio medico mundo capctz pro- 

1 The first seven of the following exercises are selected from the 
Spanish edition of Gil Bias, on account both of the classic purity of 
the language and of the work's containing fewer idioms than are to 
be found in most Spanish writers. In a few instances a slight 

liberty has been taken with the original.- In the English portion 

of these exercises, the author has adhered as closely as possible to 
the literal meaning. Here elegance of style would have been sadly 
misplaced. He has not scrupled even to do some violence to the 
structure of our language whenever he conceived that his doing so 
would render the relation between the two languages more intelli- 
gible to the learner. Preferences will not be made to all the rules, 
but to those only which are deemed of most importance. Even 
this assistance will not always be afforded. 

2 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 3 Para que la bihicse 
4 J\ote 2, Rule xliv. 5 Me es precise rnorir, 
e Note 4, Rule xxxii. 7 Rule xxii. 



218 SYNTAX. 

longing our l life when the fatal time arrives. Go, 

longar vicla termino llegar ir(irr.) 

then, and bring me here a notary, as I wish 
pues traer (irr.) aqui cscribano que querer (irr.) 

to make my will*' % Concealing the joy wliich I had 

disi 'malar gem a 

f fulfilling^ (as soon as possible) the commission which 

complir quanta antes con common 

he had just given me, 4 6i O } sir/' replied I to him, 

seizor responder 
heaving a deep sigh, " you are not so ill, through 
dor (irr.) prqfundo suspiro vm malo por 

the mercy of God." " No, no, my son, it is all 

misericordia Dies no, no 

over with me." 5 Persuaded that the affair (re- 
persitadir a que cosa apa* 

quired haste) I set outdriving. 1 entered 6 into the 
rar (imperf.) pariir volar (irr.) ^enirarse en 
house of the first notary which I met with. " Sir/' 
casa en co ntrar (irr.) 

said I to him, u my master, the licenciate, Sedillo, is 

a mo licenciado — « 

izoiv on the point of dyingil he wishes to declare 

querer (irr.) declarar 
his last will, and there is no time to be lost" 8 The 

ultimo volant ad 
notary was a man chubby and little, of a merry 
hombre rechoncho pequenho alegre 
humour, and a friend of jesting .9 " What physician 
genio amigo bufonear que 

attends him?" asked he of me. "Doctor 10 Sangrado," 
asistir preguniar 

I answered him. " God bless me!" replied he, "let us 
responder vive Dios! 

1 Note 4, Rule xxxii. 

Q Hacer testamento, no possessive pronoun. 

3 Note 1, Rule xlix. 4 Rule xlviii. 

5 Este ya se acabo, an idiomatic al expression. 

6 Note 2, Rule xiiv. 

7 Esta ya para morir. 8 Note — Rule xlviii. 
s Nole'i, Rule xlix. 1o Rule vii. 



SYNTAX. 24-9 

go — let us go (in haste), for he is a man who has 

a priesa porque 
deprived me of the profit of many wills." Saying 

guitar ganancia testamento 

this, we went out together, run- 

esie (neuter) salir (irr.) juntos an* 

ning to arrive before the patient 

dar (irr.) aceleradamente para llegar antes que enfermo 
should fail 1 into the (last agony): and in the way I 

entraren dgonia en c amino 

said to the notary,. u I beseech you that, if it be 

decir (irr.) suplicar a vm 

necessary, you may make 
menesier hacerQrr.) 

attachment and zeal." " I promise it to thee," - he 
Jealtad zelo prometer 

replied to me, " and rely on my word," 3 When we 

fia rse p a la b ra cu a n r lo 

arrived at the house, we found dame Jacinta, who hadjust 

I leg a r a li a II a r s e n or a — ■ 

played * well her part. The notary remained alone with 
hacer(in\)bien papel quedar solo con 

the master. We were in great apprehension, the (pious 

amo con tenor beata 

dame) and I, lest he should die in the 

deque morir (irr. silbj.) 

very act of {making Ins tvffl)J We save the notary 
mismo acto testigar 

come out, 6 who smiling, said to me : " We have 

sonreirse (irr.) 
not forgotten Gil Bias:"? words which JUled me 8 xvith 

chidarse palabra llenar 

rejoicing ; and I (felt so grateful for) the mention 
alborozo agradecer (irr.) tanto memoria 

which my master had made of me, that I resolved 

qfrecer [irr.) 

1 Rale Ivii. 3 ?v<rfe 2, Rale xxxvil". 

3 Note 2, Rule xl. * p, a j e xiriii. 

5 Note \ } Rule xlix. 

6 Vimos salir at escribano, we saw tc ccme out the notary. 

7 Rule xl. ■ Idem. 

M 5 



250 SYNTAX. 

to recommend him (with a sincere heart) to God, 

encomendar (irr.) muy de veras 

after his death, which soon happened. 1 

despues de mnerte 

He had scarcely breathed 2 the last sigh, when 
apenas exalar idtimo suspiro, cuando 

the physician entered, who remained surprised and 

entrar quedar cortado 

motionless, notwithstanding his being accustomed to 
mndo 7io ostante de ser acostumbrado 

dispatch* (very expeditiously) his patients A With all 
despachar quanto antes enfermo con todo 

this; far 5 from attributing his death to so much water 
esto lejos atribuir tanto agua 

and to so many bleedings, he went away 7 6 saying 

sangria 
coldly that he had died because they had bled 

confrialdad habermorir sangrar 

him "i too little 
poco. 
The relatives of the deceased persuaded themselves 
parlente difunto persuadirse 

that the canon had died intestate. But little time 

can on i go abiniedato 

passed 8 in opening before all the will, invested with 

en abrirse en pre send a de r eve stir de 

the necessary formalities ; and when they saw that the 

necesario formalidad . ver(irrJj 

testator had left 9 the best effects to dame Jacinta and 
testador dejar alaja senora 

her niece, 10 they made a funeral oration of the 

nieta hacer (irr.) funebre oracion 

canon, little respectful to his memory ; apostrophising 
poco decorosa apostrofar 

1 La que zardo poco en suceder. 2 Rule xlviii. 

3 Rule xlix. and also the 'Note, Rule xxii. 4 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

5 Note 1, Rule xxii. 

6 Literally, tie turned his shoulders, volvio las espaldas. 

7 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 8 Pero tardo poco. 

9 In the original, dejala, the preterimperfect for the preterpluper- 
fect. This substitution of the former for the latter is common in the 
Spanish writers. 

10 Note 3, Rule liv. 



s 



SYNTAX. 251 

at the same time the devotee, and giving me l some 
a beat a dar alguno 

praises, which truly I did not deserve. The 

alabanza verdaderamente merecer (irr.) 

licentiate, in peace be his soul, to oblige me not to for* 

en paz alma para obligor 

get him 3 in all my life, (expressed himself) thus in the 

en vida explicar a si 

part of the will which spoke of me J " Item (forasmuch as) 
articulo hablarcon pot quanta 

Gil Bias is a youth who has some smattering 
- — ■ mozo alguno time 

literature ; in order that he may -perfect himsef * and 
liieratura 

make himself a learned man, I leave him my library, 

hacerse (irr.) sahio dejo libreria 

with all the books and manuscripts without exception/' 
con libro manuzcrito sin excepcion 

I knew not where the boasted library could be :$ as 

saber (irr.) cuanio 

to the manuscripts, the most curious were all the details 
(i curi&so auto 

of a law-suit. After Iliad examined 6 my legacy with 

pleyto despues que examinar legado con 

greater attention than what it merited, I abandoned 
aitencion toque abandonar 

it to the relatives of the deceased. I delivered to theml 
also the dress which I had on, and returned 

iambien vestido iener d cuesias poZuer (irr.) 

to take Bay own. I contented myself* that they should 
a iomar contcniarse con que 



1 Note S, Rule xxxviir. 

a This and similar forms of construction require not the infinitive, 
but the subjunctive in Spanish. 

3 Coumigo. See the personal pronouns in Etymology. 

4 Para que acabe de perjicic i 

5 Doncie podia e&tur la tal sofiada libreria. 

6 Another change of tense, the preterimperfect for the preterplu- 
perfect. 

? Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 8 Note 2, Rme xliv. 



252 SYNTAX. 

pay me my salary, and I tvent l to seek another 
pagar salario irse (irr.) buscar otro 

place. 
conveniencia 



EXERCISE SECOND. 

Gil Bias serves Doctor Sangrado. 

I resolved to go to seek* Mr. Arias cle Londona\ in 
resoher (irr.) senor 

order to choose in his register another house where to 
para escoger en registro casa donde 

serve ; but when I was very near the corner where he 
servir estar cerca de rincon 

lived, I met with Doctor z Sangrado, idiom* I had 

vivir encontr 'arse con 
not seen from the death of my master, and I ventured 5 

mr muerte amo atreverse 

to salute him. He knew me 6 immediately, though I 

saludar conocer inmediatamenie aunque 

iuasl in another dress ; and showing a particular 

trage mostrar (irr.) 

pleasure 8 to see me : " My son," said he to me ; " even 
gusto hijo ah or a 

novo I was thinking about iliee. 9 I ivant a servant 10 and 
misma criado 

thou art he who suits me^rcyz^rfthou 11 knowest 

convenir(\i\\) contalque saber(irr.) 

7w%v to read and write." " As you do not require more 

leer escribir como pedir (irr.) mas 

you may consider the business settled" 11 (" That being 

pues 

1 Note 2, Rule xli v. 2 Note 1 , Rule xxxvii. 

* Rule vii. 4 Note 1, Rule xxxi. 5 Rule xlvi. 

6 Note °2, Rule xxxvii. — For the place of the personal pronouns, 
few references will hereafter be made. If the student be under any 
doubi as to their proper position, he raav consult the Rules. 

7 Note 2, Rule lix. " 8 Nats 1, Rule lxix. 

9 lhapensado en ti. 1o He menester un criado. ll Rule Ivii. 

12 De to todopov hcchc, an idiom : give it all for done. 



SYNTAX. 253 

the case/') he replied, "come with me, for thou art 

asi replicar irse{\n\) con porque 

the man whom I seek. In my house thou shalt pass the 

que buscar en casa 

time agreeably: 1 I will treat thee well: I will 

tratar con distincion 

asign thee no salary, but nothing shall be wanting to thee. 
sehalar salario nada faltar 

I will take care* to clothe thee decently ; I will teach 

cuidar vestir con decencia ensenar 

thee the great secret of curing 3 every kind of diseases : 

segreto curar genro eiifermidad 

in a word thou shaltrather be my pupil than servant/' 

palabra mas discipido criado. 

The plan pleased me, and I accepted the proposal of 
■ armar 'aceiar proposition 

the doctor. — At that time Sangrado was the most 

a 
celebrated physician 4 in all Valladolid owing his 

acreditado deber 

reputation to a specious (manner of expression,) 
reputation especioso loquela 

supported by a certain grave appearance, and at the 
sostener (irr.) de cierto ■ ■ ayre a 

same time, (flowing like honey) together with some 

meloso junto con 

fortunate cures, which were celebrated more than 
fortundado cur a celebrar 

what they deserved. 
loque merecer. (irr.) 

" Look, son," said he to me one day, " I am 
mirar dia estar 

satisfied with thee ; I love thee, and 1 wish 
content o de querer (irr.) 

to make thy fortune. At this very moment, I am goings 
hacer (irr.) Jbrtuna a hora misma 

1 Lo pasards alegremente, thou shalt pass it agreeably. The same 
mode of expression is not unfrequent among the vulgar in our own 
country : " I will try for it" " Let us run for it." *' He carries it 
proudly." 

• Rule xl. 3 Rote 1 , Rule xlix. 4 Rule xxii. 5 Rule xli. 



254 SYNTAX. 

to discover to thee the very soul l of the healing 

descubrir (irr.) saliidable 

art, which I have professed here so many years. Other 
arte profesar tanto am otro 

physicians make it to consist in the painful study of a 
medico consistir en penoso estudio 

thousand sciences, as useless as difficult. Know, 4 
ciencia inutil clijicultoso saberse 

friend, that to cure every kind of disease, no more is 
amigo que para curat genero mat 

necessary * than to bleed, and to drink water hot. This 

sangrar beber agua calienie 

is the great secret to cure all the infirmities in the 

para enfermidad de 

world. Yes ! this wonderful secret which I communi- 
mundo maravilloso communi- 

cate to thee, and which nature was unable to conceal 
car naturaleza poder ocultar 

from* my profound observations, remaining impenetrable 

prqfundo observation quedarse — 

io$ my brethren and companions, is reduced 6 to 
hermano companero reducirse a 

two single points — bleedings and hot water, and both 
solo punto sangria uno y otro 

In abundance. Behold, Gil Bias, thou art learned 
en abundancia he aqui sabio 

without being 1 a physician, whilst there are others for 
Mn cuando hay otro 

many years, and perhaps throughout life, without being, 

quiza por todo vida 
or ever having been, learned. ,, 
jamas 

1 pulled off my dress, and took another of my 
desnudarse de iomar otro 

-master's to appear in the costume of a physi- 

amo para comparecer (irr.) en ayre 
cian. I met with Fabricius: he(lookedat)me, 

encontrarse{\n\) con Fabricio mirar 

1 Lo masfino. 2 Note 2, Rule xliv. 

3 No es menester mas. 4 Rule xli. 5 Rule xxvi. 

6 Rule xliv. "Ruleliii. 



SYNTAX. 255 

attentive, and surprised for some time, and afterwards 
atento suspenso por alguno tiempo despues 

broke out into a (fit of laughter) so great, that it 
prorumpir en carcajada tan que 

seemed he (was going) to burst with laughter. 
parecer (irr.) d rebentar de risa 

< s Bless me! Gil Bias," he exclaimed, " how magnU 
vive Dios — ■ exclamar que magni- 

ficently equipped thou art ! l who has metamorphosed 
ficamente equipado quien enmascarar 

thee * thus ? " " Softly, Fabricius, softly, and treat 

asi pozo a poco tratar 

with every respect 3 a new Hippocrates. Know 4 that I 

con respeto nu&oo saber se 

am substitute of Doctor Sangrado, the most famous 

substitute — famoso 

physician of V alladolid." 



EXERCISE THIRD. 

(The same continued.) 

There was near our house a tennis-court, where 
haber (imp.) cerca de casa juego de pelota donde 
assembled daily all the idle part of the people ; 

concurrir diariamente ocioso gente pueblo 

among these one of those bullies and duellers by 

entre ella a quel valenton perdona-vida de 

profession, who raise themselves into masters, and 
prqfesion erigirse en maestros 

decide (without appeal) all the controversies which 
decidir definite am enie duda 

occur on such occasions. He was a Biscayan, and 
ocurrir en semejante ocasion Biscay no 

called himself 6 Don Rodrigo de Mondragon. He 

1 How thou art magnificently equipped is the Spanish order of con- 
struction . 

2 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 3 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

* Note 2, Rule xliv. 5 Rule vii. 

6 Made himself called ; se hacia llamar* 



256 SYNTAX. 

appeared about thirty years of age J a man of ordinary 

ordinario 

stature, but well made iri limbs : his eyes, small 

est at ur a Jlirnido de miembro ojo pequeno 

and sparkling, which seemed to roll in his head, 3 

centellante parecer (irr.) girar cabeza 

and to threaten all those* who (looked at) him ; a nose 

amenezar mirar nariz 

flattened, as if stuck upon a pyramidical figure; 

espatarrado como derramar sobre pyramidal figura 

and whiskers, which in form of a half-moon 

bigot e en forma media-luna 

reached (up to) the temples. His voice was so harsh 

subir hasta sienes voz aspero 

and gruff, that it sufficed to hear it 4 to raise terror. 

bronco bastar oir (ivr.) para cobrar — — 

This blusterer raised himself into the command of 

rompe-palas levantarse en mando 

the tennis-court. He decided authoritatively and 

juego depelota resolver (irr.) soberana y 

finally 5 all the disputes which arose among the 

definitivamenie disputa suscitarse entre 

players. He admitted no other appeal from his 
jugador admitir mas apelacion 

decisions than the sword or the pistol : he who did not 
sentencia espada pistola 

conform to them, had an inevitable challenge 6 on the 
conformarse 

following day. Such as I have just described himl 
siguie?ite dia tal qual pintar 

neither more nor less, was Seizor 8 Don Roderic. 

m mas ni menos ■ Rodrigo 

Although the Don which always preceded his name 
siempre 2> (irr.) delante de nombre 

1 Parecio como de treinta alios. ° Note 4, Rule xxxii. 

3 Los for aquellos. The Academy calls the former an article, but it 
performs the office, and it should have the name, of pronoun. 

4 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 

s When two adjectives ending in mente succeed each other, the 
termination is annexed only to the latter, and understood to the 
former. 

6 Tenia seguro un desafio. 7 Rule xlviii, 8 Rule vii* 



SYNTAX. 2.57 

did not dispense with him from being 1 a plebeian. 

dispensar hombte plebeyo 

This man made a great impression on the heart of a 
haccr (irr.) impresion en corazon 

woman who was the owner of the tennis-court. She mas 
mager catena ji'^go 

forty years old, 2 rich, agreeable, and it was fifteen months 

rico agr actable 
since she became a widow* 3 I knew not what cGuld make 

no se que 
her in love with that man,* Certainly she was not 

segur anient e 
enamoured?* of him for his beauty. It would be without 
enamorarse hermosura sin 

doubt for that, I know not what, of which all speak, 
duda por aquel que hablar 

and which no one (knows how) to explain. (Let it be 

ninguno saber (irr.) explicar sea lo 
what it might,) the fact is that she was enamoured 6 of 
que fuera Jieclio 

that strange figure, and she determined to give him 7 

figura - determinarse 

her hand. When the treaty was about to bg 

memo cuando i rat a do para 

concluded , 8 she fell grievously ill ; and to 

<concluirse caer (irr.) gravemente enfermo por 

her misfortune, it fell to me 9 to be I0 her physician. 

desgracia tocar ser medico 

Thouglihex disease had not been 11 of itself so bad,, 
aunque enfermedad de suyo tan maligno 

my remedies cuozv'/c/ have sufficed 12 to render it dangerous. 
remedio bastar porhacer{ivr.)peligroso 

1 Dispe7isar is active. See Rule liii. 2 Tenia esta cnarenta altos. 

3 Habia quince meses que estaba viuda. 

4 La pudo enamorar de aquel hombre. 5 Rule xliv. 

6 Idem. "- Note 4, Rule xxxii. s 

* When teas about to be concluded the treaty. See Rule xliv. 
9 Note 3, Rule xxxviii. 10 Note C Z, Rule xlix. " Rule Jvii. 

12 Another change of tense, the preterimperfect for the preterpiu- 
perfect. 



258 SYNTAX. 

At the end of four days, I filled with 1 mourning the 
d Jin dia llenar luto 

tennis-court ; for I sent the (owner of it) whither I 
Juego de pelota por que enviar pelotera adonde 

(was in the habit of sending) 2 my patients, Don 

embiaba enfermos 

Roderic in the despair of having 3 lost* his mistress, not 

con desperacion perder dama 

content to rage and vent his fury$ against me, swore 
contento con contra jurar 

that he would run me through ivith the sword 6 the first time 

vez 
that he should see me. One of my 7 charitable neigh- 

ver caritativo ve- 

bours gave me notice of this oath, and advised me 
cino dar (irr.) noticia juramento consejar 

that I should notgo out of the house, that I might 

salir (irr.) de casa 

not encounter the man, 8 This advice filled me with 9 fear 

aviso llenar miedo 

and trouble. Continually I imagined to myself that 

iurbacion continuamente imaginarse 
I saw enter into the house the furious Biscayan. It 

entrar en casa furioso 

*)T)liged me at last to abandon medicine, and to seek 
obligar enfin abandonar medicina buscar 

a mode of delivering myself from such a panic. I 
modo delibrarme de semejante sobresalto 

again took 11 my embroidered habit ; took leave of my 

bordado vestido despedirse (irr.) 
master, who, whatever he did^ could not detain 
amo poder (irr.) contener(irr.) 

me ; and at the dawn of the following day, I (went out) of 
a amanecer siguiente dia 

1 Rule xl. - Note 1, Rule xxxvii, 

3 Rule liii. 4 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

5 Con vomitar fuego y llamas ; a proverbial expression. 

6 Que me pasaria de parte a parte la espada. 7 Note 2, Rule xxxu. 
* Por no encontrarme con el hombre. 9 Rule xl. 

10 Volvi a toman l2 Por mas que hizo* 



SYNTAX. 259 

the city ; fearing always 1 to meet" Don Roderic 

ciudadtemer siempre encontrar (irr.) 
Mondragon in the road. 
en camino 



EXERCISE FOURTH. 

Gil Bias and the Archbishop. 

One of the first persons that I met in the 

sugeto 
streets of Granada, was 3 Senor Don Ferdinand de Leyva, 

calle — — Fernando 

son-in-law of the count de Polan. We both remained 
yerno conde ■ quedar 

surprised to see each other * in Grenada. " How 
sorprendido de en que 

is this, Gil Bias," said he to me, w thou in Grenada I 

esto 

what brings thee here?"* "Sir," said I to him, "if 

senor si 

you wonder to see me in this country, with much 

vm admirarse de pais con 

more reason will you be astonished when you know 
mas razon maravillar cuando saber (irr.) 

the cause which has obliged me to leave the service 
causa obligdr a dejar servicia 

of Don Caesar and his son/' Immediately I related 

de — hijo seguidamente contar (irr.) 

to him what had happened to me with Sefora^ without 6 

loque pasar con sin 

concealing from hiritf any thing. He laughed heartily 
ocidtar nada reir (irr.) conftierza 

at the jest, and his laughter being assuaged* he said to 
chasco y visa sosegar 

1 Rule xxi. 2 Xote 1, Rule xxxvii. 

3 Rule vii. 4 Xos joined to ver. 

5 i Que es la que aqui ie trae ? 6 Rule liii. 

7 Le joined to ocidtar. 8 Note 3, Rule li-i. 



260 SYNTAX. 

me seriously ; " friend, lamgoing to take on myself 1 this 

seriamente ami go 
business : I will write to my sister-in-law." (i No, 

negocio escriijird(\n\) cuhada 

no, sir," interrupted I, " I beseech you do not write to 

interrumpir suplico a vm 

her :« I have not departed from the house of Leyva 

salir (irr.) casa 

to return to it. If you please you may m 
para volver (irr.) a gnsiar poder hacer (irr.) 

another use of your interest. I beg that if any one 

otro uso Javor rogar(\n\) alguno 

of your friends wants a secretary or a steward, you 

necesitar secretario mayor domo 
mil recommend me."3 « With much pleasure," he 

recommendar (irr.) gusto 

replied : " endeavour to see mesome days hence^ 

responder procvrar ver (irr.) 

and perhaps I shall have then found thee a 

quiza ya luscar 

place. 
conveniencia 

In fact,, the first time that voe met^ he said to me : 
efectivamente vez 

" the archbishop of Grenada, my relative and friend, 

arzobispo pariente 

who is an excellent writer, wants a man well-informed 

excelente escritor instruido 

and (a good penman) to copy his ivories in a Jair hand* 6 
y de buen pulso 
He has composed, and every day he does compose 

componer (irr.) cada dia 
sermons, which he preaches with great applause. 
Jiomilia predicar applauso 

As I consider thee (exactly suited) for the occasion, 
como contemplar a proposito para caso 



1 Voy d tomar por mieuenta &c. 

a Put escribir in the subjunctive present. See Rule lix. 

3 Rule lix. * Pasados algunos diets. 

5 Que 7ios vimos, e Para poner en lirnpio sus ohras. 



SYNTAX. 261 

I have proposed thee^ and he has promised to admit 

proponer (irr.) promoter admitir 

thee. Go, and offer thyself (as from me) : from the 

ir (irr.) presentarse de mi parte por 
manner in which he may receive thee, thou wilt learn 
niodo con recibir conocer 

the good character which I have given him concerning 

inforrne dari^vx.) 

thee. 1 

The situation appeared to me just such as I 
conveniencia parecer (irr.) 
could desire, 2 ' and so having prepared myself* the best 
asi prepay arse lo mejor 

that I could, I went one morning to present myself 
que poder (irr.) m'anana a presentarse 

to this prelate. If I ivere * to imitate those $ who write 

prelado si imitar escribir 

novels, I shoidd make 6 a pompous description of the 
novela hacer (irr.) pomposo descripcion 

Episcopal palace of Grenada, I should dwell 

palacio ~ extenderse (irr.) 

on the structure of the building, I should celebrate, 
sobre esiructura edificio celeorar 

the richnes of its furniture, I shoidd speak of its statues 
riqueza muebles Jiablar estatua 

and paintings, and I shoidd not spare the reader' the 

pint ura perdonar lector 

least of all the histories which are represented in them ; 

h istoria represenlarse 

but I shall content myself with saying* that it equals 

conteniarse con decir (irr.) egualar 

in magnificence the palace of our kings. 
en magnijicencia a palacio rey 

I saw in the an ti chambers a (considerable number) 
a ntesala much idumbre 

1 Co7icernhig tliee may be omitted in Spanish. 
4 Tal como la podia desear. 3 Note 2, Rule xxxvii. 

4 Note, Rule xlviii. 5 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

G The termination ria, and so with the other tenses whose auxi- 
liary is should, in the present sentence. 

" Nets 1 , Rule xxxvii. 8 Rule liij, 



262 SYNTAX. 

of ecclesiastics and others, the greater part servants of 

eclesiastico otro partejamiliar 

the archbishop. The liveries of the lackeys were very 

arzobispo librea lacayo 

rich, so that they rather appeared masters than 
rico tanto que mas parecer (irr.) senor 
servants: they showed themselves haughty, and 

criado mo&trarse (irr.) altivo 

played the part of men of consequence. To see 1 their 
hacer (irr.) papel hombre consequencia 
affectation, I could not do less than to laugh,* and 
qfectacion poder (irr.) menos de reirse 

to divert myself 3 with them. I said (within myself) : 
de burl arse a mi sayo 

" these people have the happiness of not feeling 4 

gente J'orhina no sentir (irr.) 

the yoke of servitude"* I approached a grave and fat 

yugo servidumhre acercar * — gordo 

personage who was at the door of the archbishop's 

a puerta 

cabinet, 6 to open and shut it, I asked him with 
gabinete para abrir cerrar preguntar con 

much civility if I could speak to his graced M You 

cortesia si hablar 

may wait," said he to me rudely, " until his grace 

esperarse secamente que 

goes out to hear mass, and then he will be able 
salir(\xx.) para air (irr. )misa al paso poder(in\) 

to hear you." I answered not a word : I invested 

escuchar responder palabra revestirse(\rv.) 

myself with patience, and endeavoured (to enter into) 

de paciencia procurar trabar 

conversation with some of the servants, but those 
conversation con sirviente pero 

1 Note 2, Rule xlix. * Note 2, Rule xl. s Ibid. 

4 Note 1, Rule xlix. * RuLe j v . 

6 Note to Adjectives in Syntax. 

7 Excelenciais the title usually assigned to archbishops, and Ilus- 
erisimo to bishops. The latter, however, is sometimes applied to 
both. Excele?icia is also applicable to ambaassdors, ministers of 
state, &c. 



SYNTAX. 263 

gentlemen deigned not to answer me, and they 

senor dignarse contestar 

amused themselves in examining 1 me from head 

entretenerse (far.) en registrar 

to foot. 2 Afterwards they looked at one another, won- 

despues mirarse unos a otros ad- 

tiering at the liberty which I had taken of en- 

rarse de libertad tener{\xv.) de mez- 

gaging in conversation with them.3 
clarme 



EXERCISE FIFTH. 

The same continued. 

I confess that I was astonished to see myself thus 
confesar (irr.) aturdirse a I venue asi 

treated by lackeys. I had not yet recovered* from my 
tratar porlacayo de 

confusion, when the door of the cabinet was opened,* and 
■ — cuando abrirse 

the archbishop came out. Immediately all was hushed.* 

salir (irr.) inmediat anient e 
These proud servants abandoned their insolent 
soberbio dornestico dejar insolente 

manners, and appeared with a respectful air 

modo mostrarse (irr.) con respetuoso ayre 

before their master. The prelate might be about sixty 
del ante de amo prelado 

nine years old J As soon as he saw me, he came 

luego que rer(irr.) venirse (irr.) 

to me, and asked me with much mildness what I 
preguntar dulzura 

1 Ruleliii. 

* The Spanish expression is the reverse of the English : De pies a 
tabeza, from foot to head. 

3 En su conversation, instead of en conversation con ella, 

* Todavia no habia vuelto. 

5 When was opened the door of the cabinet, and came out the archbishop. 
is the Spanish order of construction. 

6 Quedo todo en un prof undo silencio. 

7 Tendria el prelado unos sesenta y nueve affas. 



264< SYNTAX. 

wished with hi?)!. 1 I told him that I was the person 

decir (irr.) 
recommended by * Don Ferdinand de Leyva. a Ah," 
he exclaimed, " art thou he whom he has praised so 

exclamar alabar 

much to me i Thou art already admitted. I rejoice 
tanto ya recibir alegrarse 

at so valuable an acquisition. Remain (from this 
de tan bueno hallazgo quedarse desde 

moment) in the house." These words being said, 3 
luego en casa palabra decir (irr.) 

he leaned on two domestics, and having heard 4 some 

apoyarse sobre escudero oir (irr.) 

ecclesiastics who came to speak to him, he (went out) 
eclesiastico llegar a hablar salir (irr.) 

of the room. Scarcely was he out, when the very 

sala apenas faera caando 

same who a little before had despised my conversation, 

poco antes despreciar 

came to salute me^ and testified the greatest 

venirse (irr.) para saludar testificar 

joy to see me entered into the archbishop 's serviced 
alegria de ver 
They had heard what their master had said 1 to me, and 

lo que amo 

they desired with eagerness to know what employ- 

desear ansia saber (irr.) em- 

mentl was to hold with his grace ; but to revenge 
pleo deber tener cerca de pero para vengarse 

myself for the despite which they had done me, I 

de desprecio hacer (irr.) 

liadthe malice s not to satisfy their curiosity. 

malicia saiisjacer (irr.) curiosidad 

His grace did not delay long in returning^ and he 
tardar mucho en volver (irr.) 



1 Qitese me rfrecia. Q El recomendado del senor. 

s Note 3, Rule lii. 4 Xote 1, Rule xxxvii. 

3 When came to salute me the very same. 

6 Comencal del arzobispo. 7 What had said their master. 

8 Note 1, Rule xlix. * s R sle iiii. 



SYNTAX. 265 

made me enter into his cabinet to speak to me 

Jiacer (Sir.) entrar en gabinete para hablar 

alone. I thought justly it was his intention to try 
a solos pensar (irr.) bien intention tantear 

my abilities : wherefore I prepared to measure all 

talent o por lo que preparar para medir (irr.) 
my words. He began with some questions on the 

palabra principiar pregunta sobre 

humanities. I had the luck 1 not to answer ill, and to 
humanidades fortuna responder mal 

show him % that I knew sufficiently the Greek 

conocer (irr.) siificientemenie Griego 
and Latin authors. He touched afterwards on dialec- 
Latino autor tocar despues en la dialec- 

tics, and here I expected him J He found me (a close 

tica encontrar (irr.) bien 

antagonist.) " It is clear," said he to me, as if 
qferrado conocerse (irr.) como 

astonished, " that thou hast had a very good education. 
admirado tener educacion 

Let us see now thy penmanship." I drew from my 

ver (irr.) letra, sacar 

pocket a specimen which I had brought expressly 
bolsillo muestra llevar expresamente 

for the purpose, which did not displease 4 my prelate* 
para caso desgradar prelado 

" I am glad that thou hast as good a hand," he 

alegrarse de que tener (subj.) mano 

exclaimed, " and still more that thou hast such 
exclamar todavia mas 

good abilities. I shall thank my nephews Don Ferdinand, 

talent o Fernando 

since he has provided me a servant so useful. In 
por que proporcionar familiar uiil a la 

truth he has made me a valuable present." 

verdad hacer (irr.) bueno regalo 



1 Note 1, Eule xlix. 2 To make him see; hacerle ver. 

3 Yjustamente aqui era en dcnde yo le esperaba. 

4 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

5 I shall give thanks to my nephew. 



266 SYNTAX. 

The day following his grace called me x very 
dia siguiente bien de 

early, to give me a sermon to copy* He charged me 
m ana m a pa ra dar ho m ilia a copiar en ca rga r 

much that I should do it with all possible accuracy, 

vnucho hacer (irr.) lo con exactitud 

which I executed w\thoii\, for getting 3 accent or point, 
Toque executar sin olvidar acento nipunto 

and which filled the prelate xmih pleasure and admira- 
llenar prelado gusto admira- 

tion.4 "Tell me, my friend, hast thou found in 
cion ' decir (in\) ami go encontrar en 

.copying any thing which may have (struck thee as 
escribir chocar 

erroneous) — any negligence in the style, or any 

descuido esiilo 

improper term ? Something of this might easily 
imp fop io iermino 

escape 5 in the fire of composition/' ei Ah, sir," 
con f ue g° composicion senor 

I modestly replied, " my learning is not such that 

modestamente responder instruction tanto 

I can assume the critic ; 6 and even if I were ca- 

'poder (irr.) aim cuando ca- 

pable of it, I am persuaded that the works of your grace 
paz asegnrado obra 

would not fall under my censure." He 

caer (irr.) lajo censura 

smiled at my reply, and said nothing ; 

sonreirse (irr.) con respuesta replicar nada 

but in the midst of all his piety, it appeared 
pero en medio piedad traslucirse (irr.) 

that he loved passionately his writings. 
amor con pasion escrito 

1 Me hizo llamar. 2 To give me to copy a sermon, 

3 Rule liii. 

4 Which filled with pleasure and admiration the prelate. The prepo- 
sition required by lienor may be seen at Rule xl; and for the con- 
struction of prelado, see Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

5 Es muyfacil se escape alguno de esio, 

6 Meterme dcritico. 



SYNTAX. 2G7 

I completely gained him 1 with this flattery. Every day 
con adulation cad a 

he loved me more, (so much so) that Don Ferdinand, 

querer (irr.) tanto 

who visited frequently* my master, assured me that 

visit ar frequent emente amo asegurar 
I had in such a manner gained his (good will,) that I 

tal mo ch ganar voluntad 

might consider my fortune as made.* 

EXERCISE SIXTH. 

(The same continued.) 

The archbishop having one day repeated before 

repel ir (irr,) delanie de 
me a sermon which he was to preach in the cathe- 

homilia deber predicar cate- 

dral, did not content himself toith asking me in 
dral content arse con pregurdar &* 

general tohat I thought of it,* but he obliged me (to 
■ pero obligar a 

point out) to him the passages tohich had most struck 
decir (irr.) pa sage 

me. -5 I had the (good fortune) 6 to select those with 

fort una ciiarle de 

which he was most satisfied, and which were his 

s at i facer (irr.) 
favourites. This made me pass in the opinion o£ 
favorito esto hacer (irr.) pasar en concepto 

his grace for one of delicate understanding, who 

por delicado conociraierdo 

(knew how) to distinguish the beauties of a work, 
.safer (irr.) atinar con hermosura oora 

1 Acabe de ganarle. - Sote 1, Rule xxxvii. 

3 Que podia dar per hecha mifortuna. 

4 Con is not followed by the present participle. See Rule liii,— 
I thought of it ; qut me habia p. recido. 

* Que me habian dado mas solve. u l\ote 1, Rule x-ix, 

n2 



268 SYNTAX. 

a This is," he exclaimed, " what is called taste and 

exclamar Ham arse gusto 

delicacy ." In short he was (so much) pleased that 
finura en Jin quedar tan contento 

he said to me with much emotion ; " Have no care: r 

expresion cuidado 

thy fortune is in ?py hands ^ and I will render it 

procurar 
agreeable to thee. I esteem thee, and in proof of 
agradable estimar en prueba 

this / ivish thee to be 3 my confident. 

querer (irr.) confidente 

On hearing* these words, I threw myself at the 
palabra echarse 
feet of his grace, penetrated with gratitude. 
pie penetrado de reconocimiento 

" Yes, my son," proceeded the archbishop, whose 

si hijo proseguir (irr.) 

discourse had been interrupted by my action ; 
discurso interrumpirse por accion 

"yes, my son, I wish to make thee the de- 

hacer (irr.) de- 

pository of ray most secret thoughts. Listen 
positario secreto pensamiento escuchar 

attentively to what I am going to tell thee* 

atentamente ir (irr.) a decir (irr.) 

I have delight in preaching, 5 and the Lord 
gusto en predicar Senor 

blesses my sermons, for they (reach the hearts of) 

hendecW (irr.) herir (irr.) 

sinners, 6 make them to enter w T ithin themselves, 

peccador hacer (irr.) entrar dentro de 

and (to have recourse) to? repentance. I have the 

recur rir a penitencia 

satisfaction 8 to see 9 a miser terrified with the images 
satisj accion xer avaro espantado con imdgen 

1 The subjunctive present, not the imperative. 
q Corre de mi cuenta tufortuna. 3 I wish that thou mayst be. 

* J J air. See Rule liii. 5 Rule liii. 6 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 
7 Rule iv. * Note 1, Rule xlix. 9 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 



SYNTAX. 269 

which I present to his avarice, opening T his treasures, 

presenter d codicia abrir tesoro 

and distributing* them with a prodigal hand ; to wean 
distribuir prodigo mano apartarse 

a (lascivious man) from his impurities ; to drive the 

lac'vco de torpezas retirarse 

ambitious to the hermitage, and* to confirm 3 in her 
ambicioso ermita en 

duties * a wife, idiom a deceitful gallant caused 
obligacion esposa engahoso galan Jiacer (irr.) 

to waver. $ These conversions which are frequent, 

titubear frequente 

ought of themselves alone to excite me to exertion. 6 
deber por solo excitar a trabajo 

With all this I confess to thee my weakness : 

con todo confesar (irr.) Jtaqueza 

another reward influences me,— a reward for which 

premio mover (irr.) 
the delicacy of my virtue reproves me in vain : 

delicadez mrtvd reprehender inutilrnente 

this is the esteem of the public for perfect works. 7 

estimacion publico a perfecto obra 

I find much pleasure in being accounted a 

encontrar (irr.) satisfaccion 

consummate orator. 8 Now my works pass 9 for 
hoy pasar por 

energetic and delicate ; but I should not wish 
fuerte delicado pero qiierer (irr.) 

to fall into the errors of good authors, who write 

caer (irr.) en fait a auior escribir 

many years, and at length decay. I should wish not 

ano alfin fiaquear 

to lose my reputation. 
perder reputacion 

1 Rule liii. 2 Rale liii. 

3 Hacerjirme. 4 jVote 1, Rule xxxvii. 

5 Whom caused to waver a deceitful gallant, is the Spanish order of 
construction. 

6 Rule i v. 7 Ruleiv. 

8 En que me tengan por un evador consumado. 

9 Now pass my works. 



270 SYNTAX. 

In this supposition, my dear Gil Bias," continued 
supuesto amado continuar 

the prelate, " I expect one thing from thy zeal : when 
prelado esperar coia zelb cuando 

thou perceivest J that my pen fails; when thou 

pertibir pluma envejecerse(in\) 

ohservest - that my style grows feeble, Jail not to in~ 
noiar est Ho bajarse 

form me ojit^ In this point I do not trust 4 to myself; 

en punto Jiarse 

my self love might blind me. This observation 
amor propio pocier (irr.) cegar observation 

requires an impartial understanding : wherefore I 
pedir (irr.) impartial entendimiento por tanto 
select ^ thine, which I consider . (as exactly suited 
elegir contemplar a proposito 

to the occasion,,) and from this moment / shall be 

desde luego 

regulated by thy opinion," 6 "Your grace is yet 

todavia 
very far from this time, thank God. 7 Besides, an 

lejos tiempo ademas que 

understanding like that of your grace preserves 

tal como el conservarse 

itself better than those of another stamp, and to 

I os temple para 

speak with propriety, your grace will ever be the 
hablar con propiedad siempre 

same. I consider 8 your grace like another Cardinal 
mismo juzgar como a Cardenal 

Ximenes, whose superior genius it appears 

• genio parecer (irr.) 

received more strength with years, instead of 9 weak- 
recibir fuerza con los aho en lugar debili- 

ening with I0 old-age" (" Let us leave) flattery, my 
tarse con vejez dejarse de adulation 

1 Rule lvii. 2 Rule lvii. 

3 No dejes de adveriirmelo. 4 Note 2, Rule xl. 

5 See Changes in Certain Regular Verbs in Etymology. 

6 Estare a tu dictamen. ~ A Bios gracias, or gracias a Dios» 
8 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 9 Rule Iiii. 1o Rule i\\ 



SYNTAX. 271 

friend/' replied my master ; " I know that I 

ami go responder amo saber (irr.) 

may decay, and lose the sublimity of my style 

poder {irr, Jdecaer perder (irr.) sublimidad estUo 

from one moment to another. At the age in which 
de instants a en edad en 

I am, 1 infirmities begin to be felt, a and the 

Jiallarse enfermedad principiarse a sentir (irr.) 
infirmities of the body alter the mind. Again, I 

ctterpo alferdr espiritu de nuevo 

charge thee, Gil Bias, not to delay a moment* 

encargar deternerse (irr.) momento 

in warning 4 me when thou perceivest 5 my head 
avisar cuando percibir cabeza 

is. 6 Fear not " to use tvith me '" freedom and 
deiilitarse temer mar franqueza 

sincerity, as thy warning will be towards me a 
sinceridad porque aviso para 

proof of the love which thou bearest me. Besides, 
prueha amor tener 

thy interest is concerned in it; 9 for if I should 

_ , . . P or i ue 

know it was spoi^en in the city that my sermons had 

saber (irr.) hablarse ciudad - — 

fallen from their usual elevation, thou wouldst 

decaer (irr.) ordinario elevacion 

lose not only my affection, but the advantage which 
perder solo qfecto sino a corns do 
I have promised thee." 
prometer 
Here ended the exhortation ol my master to 
aqui exhortacion amo para 

hear my reply, which was reduced to 

oir (irr.) respuesta reducirse (irr.) a 

1 Rule lv. 

2 Now (ya) begin to be felt infirmities is the proper order cf con- 
struction. 

3 Rale lix. 4 p Ui ] c Jiii. 5 s ee Xote \ page 270. 
G Weakens my head, the verb before its nominative. 

7 See Xote \ page 268. 

8 Conmigo. — Usar requires de before the two following nouns. 

9 Por otra parte va en ello tu inter es. 



272 SYNTAX. 

promise what he desired. From this moment he had 

dcscar desde moment o 

nothing secret for me, and I became his peculiar 
nada seer e to para 
confident. 1 All the servants envied my lot. They 

familiar enviadar suerte 
were not ashamed to abase themselves to please 

afreniarse de abaiirse 
me. 2 Their meanness made me doubt that 

bajeza (plur.) hacer (irr.) dudar 
they were 3 Spaniards. Though I knew their 

Espahol aiinque conocer (irr.) 
Interested ideas, and their flatteries never deceived 
interesado lisonja nunca enganar 

me, I did not for this neglect to serve them. My 

por cso dejar de servir 
entreaties caused his grace to procure them em- 

ojicio hacer (irr.) 

ployments + To one I induced him to give a com- 
hacer (irr.) dar com- 

pany, and the means of' shining 5 in the army; another 6 
pania ejercito 

he sent to Mexico with a great appointment. 
enviar Mejico con destino 

While I was occupied in this manner in serving 
cuando ocuparse en modo en servir 

one and another^ Don Ferdinand prepared to 

Fernando prepararse para 
leave Grenada. I visited 8 this gentleman before 

dejar a visitor seftor antesde 

his departure, to give him thanks for the excellent 

part id a para dar gracia por excelente 

situation which he had procured me. st My dear 
acomodo procurar amado 

1 Vint a ser su privado. - Por tenerme contento. 

s Rule lix. 4 Que S. E. les procurase empleos. 

5 Conquelucir. b Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

7 Rule liii. — For one and another see the Adjective Pronouns in 
Etymology, and Notel, Rule xxxvii. 

8 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 



SYNTAX. 273 

Gil Bias," said he to me, "I am very glad that 

alegrarse viucho 
thou art satisfied with my uncle the archbishop." 

satisfacer (irr.) de tio arzobispo 

"I am most content/' I replied, "with this great 

contento res-ponder con 

prelate, and in truth, I ought to be so. J Besides 
prelado verdaderamente deber ademasde 

that he is a very amiable nobleman, I shall never be 
que amahle sehor nunca 

able (to be sufficiently grateful for) the favours 

poder (irr.) agradecer (irr. ) bondad 

which I owe him." 

deber 

EXERCISE SEVENTH. 

(The same concluded.) 

Within two months after the departure of Don Fer- 
dinand, % and in the time that I was 

tiempo encontrarse (irr.) 

most favoured, we had a great (subject: of fear) in the 

favor ecido susto en 

palace. , The archbishop was attacked by apoplexy, 
palacio at a car de apoplegia 

but he was succoured with so prompt and efficacious 
pero socorrer con pronto eficace 

remedies, that it disappeared within very few days, 
remedio desaparecer (irr.) a poco dia 

but his head remained somewhat weak. 3 At the 
pero cabeza quedar cdgo debit a 

first sermon which he composed, I perceived it.* 

componer (irr.) 

Clearly my orator began to fail ; 

claramente oradorempezar (irr.) a decaer (irr.) 

1 See the neuter Personal Pronoun. 

2 A los dos meses de haberse marchado Ben Fernando, 

3 But to him remained somewhat weak the head. See Note 4, 
Rule xxxii. 

4 Lo echi de ver. 

n5 



274 SYNTAX. 

but to decide, I waited until he should preach 

para decidir esperar a que predicar 

another. He did so, l and it was unnecessary 

hacer (in*.) menester 

to wait longer. The good prelate stammered, 

mas rozarse 

(made repetitions,) rose to the clouds, end fell 

repetir (irr.) leventarse a nube abatirse 

to the very ground. His oration was diffuse, a 
hasta suelo oracion difuso 

tiresome cathedral harangue; 2 in fine, it tvas alto* 
causa do catedrdtico arenga en fin 

gether bad, 3 and without connection. 
sin concierto 

I was not (the only one) who observed it. Almost 
solo not a lo casi 

all who heard him, whispered to one another: 4 « This 

oir (irr.) 
sermon smells of the apoplexy.'' " Come," said I 
— — — oler (irr.) a vamos 

to myself, ' ' prepare to do your duty. You 

prepararse para hacer deber 

now see that his grace declines, and you are obliged 
ya ver(in\) declinar obligar 

to 'warn him. s both as the depository of his con- 
ianto por depositario con* 

fidence, and for fear that some one of his friends 
fianza por temor . amigo 

may anticipate you. If this circumstance should 

anticipar si caso 

happen 6 you very well know its consequences ; 

llegar muy bien saber (irr.) consequencia 

you would be left out of his will." 

borrado de testamento 
To these reflections succeeded others entirely 

reflexion seguir (irr.) enteramente 

1 See Note *, page 273.. 2 Arenga de catedrdtico, 

3 Un sermon de mission. 4 Se decian al oido. 5 Obligado d advert irsela. 

(i If should happen this circumstance. 



SYNTAX. 275 

opposite ; for it appeared to me very dangerous 
contraria porque parecer (irr.) expuesto 

to give a warning so disagreeable to an author so 

dar aviso desagradable autor 

attached to his works* (On the other hand) it ap- 
apasionado por otro parte 

peared to me impossible that my liberty should 

___ lib er tad 

displease him, 1 after having enjoined it to me 

disgustar despues de ordenar 

with such earnestness. (Let us add) to this, that I 

con eficacio anadir 

intended to introduce the thing tviih dexieritu 2 and 

pensar (irr.) 

to make him swallow the pill mildly. 

hacer (irr.) tragar pildora suavemenie 

In short, persuading myself that I risked mare 
en fin persuadirse a aventurar mas 

by (being silent) than by speaking 3 J resolved 
en callar en hablar determinate 

to break silence. 
a romper sileneio 

Only one thing disturbed me : I knew not Iigw 
solo cos a inquieiar saber (irr.) 

to begin the conversation. Thank heaven, the 

sacar conversacion gracias al cielo 

orator himself drew me irom this embarrassment by 
orador sacar . embarazo 

asking me what was said of him in 

preguntar decirse (irr.) en 

public,, and if his last sermon had pleased. 4 I an- 

publico si ultimo gusiar res- 

swered that his homilies were always admired, but 
ponder siempre admirar 

that in my opinion the last had not so much 



1 That him should displease ray liberty 

2 Entrurle con mafia. 3 Rule liii. 
* If had pleased his last sermon 



276 SYNTAX. 

moved ' the audience as the preceding. " How 
mover (irr.) auditorio antecedenle como 

is this, friend?" replied he, surprised. " Most illus- 
amigo sobresaltado ilus- 

trious lord," answered I, " the works of your grace 
ire senor obra 

are not such that any one dares to censure them, * rather 
las antes 

all praise them ; but as your grace has com- 

celebrar pero como 

manded me to speak to you 3 with freedom and sin- 

franqueza sin- 

cerity, I shall take the liberty 4 of saying* 
ceridad tomarse libertad decir (irr.) 

that your last sermon appears not to me to have 

parecer (irr.) 
the solidity of the preceding, — does your grace 

solidez precedent e 

think otherwise?" At these words my 

pensar (irr.) de otro modo palabra 

master changed colour /* and with a forced smile he 
amo mudarse color con Jbrzado sonrisa 

said to me : " Mr. Gil Bias, then this piece is not 

senor conque pieza 

to your taste ?" 6 U I do not say that," interrupted I 

interrumpir 

(in confusion) " it is excellent, although a little 

todo turbado excelente antique poco 

inferior to the other works of your grace." "lun- 

en- 



1 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 2 Que hay a quien se atreva a censurarlas. 

5 Subjunctive. See Rule lix. 4 Note 1, Rule xlix. 
s Rule xl. 

6 No es del gusto de vm. The learner will here observe the change 
of number in the second person. The archbishop does not in this 
sentence use the pronoun generally employed hy persons of dignity 
in addressing their servants, or those whom they wish to patronise. 
He uses the third person singular, as though he were addressing an 
equal. The student will perceive the sarcasm implied in this 
change of person. 



SYNTAX. 277 

derstand thee," replied he, " it seems to 

tender (irr.) replicar parecer (irr.) 

thee that I am failing ; is it not so ? To be brief, * 

ir (irr.) bajar esto 

thou believest that it is now time I should 

creer ya tiempo 

think of retiring" 2 " Never should I have 

pensar (irr.) en ret ir arse jamas 

spoken to your grace with such plainness, if you had 
liablar con tanto claridad si 

not expressly commanded it to me ; and since in 

expresamente mandar lo pues 

this I have obeyed 3 your grace, I humbly 
esto obedecer (irr.) rendidamente 

intreat you not to take amiss my boldness" \ '•' God 
suplicar ttevar a mat atreximiento 

Jbrbidii" 5 interrupted he hastily ; " God forbid 

precip it ad a m enie 
that I should blame thee for such a thing: 

reprehender tal cos a 

(in that case) I should be very unjust. It is not at all 

en eso muy unjusto del ioclo 

wrong that thou speahest 6 to me thy opinion, but thy 
onalo decir (irr.) dictdmen 

opinion appears not to me well founded. I deceived 

fundado enganarse 
myself in submitting 7 to be the tool of thy li- 
en someterse a juguete IU 
mited understanding." 
mitado inteligencia 

Although 1 8 xvas so agitated, I endeavoured to 
aunque tan turbado procurar 

1 Acorta de razones. 

2 Pensar must be subjunctive, see Rule lix. For the construction 
of retirarse, see Rule liii. 

3 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

4 Llevar to be subjunctive. See Rule lix. 

5 No lopermita Dios. 

6 Decir to be subjunctive. See Rule lix, &c. 
' Rule liii. 8 Note 2, Rule lix. 



278 SYNTAX. 

discover the means of mending 1 the matter ; but it is 
buscar medio hecho pero 

impossible to soothe * an irritated author, and (the 
— sosegar irritado autor 

more so) if he is accustomed to hear (nothing more) 
mas acostumbrado ci oir (irr.) mas 

than praises. " Let us not speak of the subject, my 

elogios hablar asunto 

son/' said he to me : " thou art yet too young to 
hijo nino para 

distinguish the true from the false. Know that 

distinguir lo verdadero falso saber (irr.) 

in my life I have never composed a better sermon, 
vida nunca componer (irr.) homilia 

than this which has had the misfortune 3 not to have 

desgracia 
merited thy approbation. Thank heaven, my 

merecer (irr.) gracias al cielo 

intellect has lost nothing yet of its vigour. In 

entendimiento nada todavia vigor en 

future I shall choose better confidants. I wish 
adelante elegir confidente querer (irr.) 

others more capable 4 of deciding than thou. Go," 

capaz decidir ir (irr.) 

he proceeded, pushing me out of his cabinet ;$ " tell 

decir (irr.) 
my treasurer to give thee 6 a hundred ducats, and 

tesorero entregar (irr.) ducado 

may God bless thee 1 with them. Farewell, 8 Mr. Gil 

con senor 

Bias ! I shall rejoice that you enjoy 9 every felicity, 
ale gr arse lograr felicidad 

with a little more taste." 
con poco gusto 

1 Note 1, Rule xlix. 2 Note 1, Rule xxxvii. 

3 Note 1, Rule xlix. 4 Rule xlix. 

5 Empajandome para que saliera de su gabinete, 

6 That he may give thee. See Rule lix, &c. 

7 Anda bendito de Dios. 

8 Vayavm con Dios. See Note 6 , page 276. 

9 Lograr, subjunctive. See Rule lix, &c. 



SYNTAX. 279 

EXERCISE EIGHTH. 

Martyrdom of ' Hermenigildus 9 A. D. 570. 1 

Leovigildus, now master of all Spain, (with the) 
Leovigildo ya dueho Espana a 

exception of Malaga, and of some maritime places 
excepcio?i ■ alguno maritima plaza 

occupied by the Greeks, applied all his attention to 
ocupado por Griego aplicar attention a 

leave secure the succession of the crown in his 
dejar assegurada succesion corona 

family. He had txvo sons,* Hermenigildus and Hecaredus, 
Jamilia Hermenigildo Recaredo 

whom, before his elevation to the throne, he had by 
antes de elevation trono en 

Theodosia, sister of the saints Leander, Isidore, and 
Teodosia hermana santos Leandro Isidoro 

Fulgentius. Theodosia being dead^ he married a 
Fulgencio morir (irr.) casar en 

second time with Gosvinda, widow of king Athana- 

segundas nupcias con viuda rey Aiana- 

gildus; and ceding the kingdom of Seville to his 
gildo ceder reyno Sevilla 

eldest son Hermenigildus, and gave him to 

primogenito Mjo dar (irr.) por 

wife Ingunda, daughter of Sigibert, king of Austrasia. 

muger hija Sigiberio - 

Gosvinda professed with bigotiy the Arian sect, 
prqfesar con tenacidad Arriano secta 

v The three following exercises are taken from the " Compendia de 
la Historia de EspaTta" Madrid, 1785. 

As the learner must now be familiar with the principal rules of 
construclion, scarcely any references to them will hereafter be given. 
If he entertains any doubt as to the construction of any particular 
part of speech, he will naturally consult its Syntax. 

Whenever the collocation of Spanish words^ or the translation of 
particular phrases, is attended with any difficulty, assistance will, as 
iisual, be found in the notes. 

2 Halldbase con dos Jdjos. 3 ^fote 3, Rule lii. 



280 SYNTAX. 

and spared no means 1 to reduce the queen of 

parareducir (in*.) reyna 
Seville te the same profession. She used caresses, 
mismo prqfesion usar de caricias 

authority, threats, insults, and violent behaviour, " 
autoridad amenaza ultrage malo tratamiento(plur.) 
(even to) dragging her by ((he hair of her head), to 

hasta arrastrar por los cabellos con 

the scandal of majesty, and of the palace. Ingunda 

escandalo mages tad palacio 

always immovable * in the Catholic religion, evinced 
siempre inmoble en Catolico ■■ convencer 

the truth of what she professed, by the invincible 
verdad lo que con invencible 

patience with which she bore the much that she 
paciencia con tolerar lo macho 

suffered, constantly endeavouring to prevent its 

padecer (irr.) 

reaching 3 the notice of her husband, by complaint, or 
a noticia marido por queja ni 

even by her countenance ; and her greatest care 
aim el semblante cuidado 

being 4 to conquer with obedience, with sweetness, and 

veneer obsequio agrada 

with respect, the violence of her mother-in-law, 

respeto violencia (plur.) la suegra 

tvhich so nearly bordered on tyranny.?* 

To make a pious husband (there is no) means 

para hacer (irr.) santo marido ?iohaber 6 medio 

more powerful than a virtuous wife, a truth which was 

poderoso virtuoso muger 

experienced by Hermenigildus. Notwithstanding the 
experimentarse en no obstante 

Arianism which he professed, what was passing in the 
Arrianismo pasar en 

1 Noperdono a medio alguno. 2 Immovable always Ingunda, 

3 Poniendo todo su estudio en que no llegase. 

4 And being her greatest care. 

5 Que andaban tan cerca de parecer tyranias* 

6 See the Defective Verbs. 



syntax; 281 

palace not being able (to be concealed) any longer , x 

jjoder (in*.) ocultarse mas tiempo 

and arriving to his knowledge the violence which his 

lie gar noticia 

step-mother was exercising towards Ingunda, he con- 
madrasta executar con co- 

trasted the ungovernable fury of- the one with the 
tejar arrebatado furor 

silent suffering of the other; and proceeding to 
silencioso sitfrimiento pasar d 

infer the difference which (there was) in the two 
inferir diferencia haber (def.) 

religions by what he observed in the professors of 

observar prqfesor 

them, he concluded that could not fail to be 

concluir poder (irr.) dejar de 

true which produced in Ingunda a virtue so con- 

verdadero inspirar en mrtud con- 

stant. With this thought he wished (to be 

stante pensamiento querer (irr.) 

instructed) more thoroughly in the foundations of it ; 
instruirse mas de proposito fundamento 

and holding for this purpose repeated and secret con- 
d Jin repetitido oculto con- 

ferences with his uncle St. Leander, archbishop of 
ferencia tio arzobispo 

Seville, within a few days he declared himself con- 
d poco dia declararse con- 

vinced, passing from the hopeful disposition of 
vencido pasar desde bueno disposition 

(one in doubt) to the public profession of (one 

dudoso publico prqfecion 

freed from error). He solemnly abjured Arianism. 
desengahado solemnemente abjurar 

Leovigildus being informed* of the conversion of 

informar 

his son, yielded entirely the first movements of his 
'hi jo conceder enteramente movimiento 

1 Not being able to be concealed any longer what was passing in 
the palace. 

2 Informed Leovigildo. See Note 3, Rule lii. 



282 SYNTAX. 

heart to the ebullitions of anger; but afterwards 

corazon destemplanza colera despues 

giving place to reason, and resolved to reduce 
hacer (irr.) lugar razon resnelto a reducir (irr.) 

Hermenigildus either by violence or gentleness, he 

6 por 6 dulzura 

considered that he ought to commence by the 
juzgar deber comenzar (irr.) 

means which mildness dictates, and he did not spare 
medio suavidad dictar perdonar a 

any one of (those 'which) paternal tenderness could 

alguno quantos ternura poder (irr.) 

suggest to him. 1 But seeing his artifices frustrated 
sugerir mas ver (irr.) artificio hurlar 

by the constancy of his son, notwithstanding that in 
por constancia no obstante 

the answers of the latter, respect was always joined * 

respites t a este 

to firmness, irritation returned to its place, and he 

Jirmeza irritation volver (irr.) lugar 

forgot that he was a father by remembering that 
olvidarse padre por acordarse (irr.) 

he was a king. He proceeded to besiege Hermeni- 

rey pasar d sitiar 

gildus in his own court of Seville ; and seizing on 
mismo corte apoderarse de 

the place and the prince, he commanded him to be 

plaza principe mandar 

confined) in a narrow prison. There he detained him 
encerrar(\vY.) estrecho prision alii tener 

all the time, and with all the rigour which appeared 

rigor parecer (irr.) 

to him sufficient (in order) that severity might re- 
bastante para molestia re- 

duce him vohom persuasion had not [been able) to 

ducir (irr.) > poder (irr.) 

subdued And when, by his mode of judging he 

convencer cuando a modo entender (irr.) 

1 Which could suggest to him paternal tenderness. 

2 Andaba siempre el respeto inmediato. 

^ Whom had not been able to subdue persuasion. 



SYNTAX. 283 

considered him less obstinate, from conceiving him 
Juzgar obstinado por imaginar 

more dispirited, he despatched to him a minister of his 

obatido de spa char ministro 

greatest confidence, to offer 1 him liberty, the crown, 
confianza libertad corona 

and the increase of his states, merely on the condition 

aument o est ado solo 

that he xvould return 2 to the religion which his ances- 



— — proge- 

tors had professed. The' generous prisoner replied^ 
nitor generoso prisionero resvonder 

that it teas to him 4 an unspeakable mortification 5 to 

de inducible mortifxacion 
see himself situated in the sad necessity 6 of being 

constituido en iriste necesidad 
disobedient to the commands of God 5 or of not com* 
desobediente precepto Dios 6 com- 

plying with the pleasure of his father; and that 
descender (irr.) con gusto padre 

(being placed) in the indispensable condition off re* 
colocado precision re- 

nouncing a perishing crown, to encircle his brows 
nunciar caduco por cenirse sienes 

with another and an indefectible diadem, he was not so 

diadema 

foolish as to sacrifice 7 the eternal to the perishing ; nor 
necio lo eterno perecedero ni 

did it appear to him founded in reason to aspire to a 

puesto en razon aspirar 

liberty of a few years, and (perhaps even) of a few 

poco ana quiza 

moments, which would have (for its end) a perpetual 
instante por termino perpetuo 

irredeemable slavery. 
irredimible es davit ad 

1 Who should offer (subj.). 2 Con que quisiess restituirse* 

3 Replied the generous prisoner, 4 Que le servio. 

5 See Note 2, Rule xlix. 

6 Note 1, Rule xlix, which is also applicable to the two following 
participles in italics. — No reference will hereafter be made to the 
same note. 

7 Que pospusiese. 



284 SYNTAX. 

Leovigildus was of a soul naturally noble and 
alma naturalmente ■ 
generous, and an answer (especially in his own son) 
respuesta y mas en hijo 

in which nobleness was so joined with genero- 

nobleza andar (irr.) mezclado con genero- 
sity, could not displease him. 1 He approved it in 
sidad poder (irr.) disonar aplaudir 

his heart, and although he did not appear 

corazon aunque mani/e&tarse (irr.) 

at all satisfied, he showed himself less obstinate 

del todo satisjecho mostrarse(in\) empehado 

and so he contented himself with despatching to him 

asi content arse con despachar 

a second message by his brother Recaredus, assuring 
recado por hermano asegurar 

Hermenigildus that he would restore him to his 

restituer 
favour, provided only that he (Hermenigildus) should 
gracia con que solo 
not refuse to communicate (by the hand) of an 

resistirse a comulgar por mano 

Arrian priest. The pious youth replied,* that his 

eclesiastico santo mancebo 

religion did not permit him to treat with this dissi- 

> " permitir tratar disi- 

mulation the faith which he professed ; neither was 

mulo Je ni 

any action lawful to him which might appear 

, accion licitar poder (irr. ) sonar (irr.) 

that he held the same communion as the heretics. 

corn-union con herege 

Leovigildus tvas so incensed 3 with this resistance, which 

con resistencia 

he called obstinacy, (confounding obstinacy with con- 
llamar obstinacion equivocar con- 

stancy) that immediately he gave orders that on 

stancia al punto or den (sing.) en 

1 And could not displease him an answer, &c. 

2 Replied the pious youth. 3 Indignose tanto Lsovigildo* 



SYNTAX. 285 

the very same night, he (Hermenlgildus) should be 

noche 
beheaded in the prison. 1 Scarcely arrived (to the) 

apenas llegar a 
knowledge of the afflicted Ingunda the execution of the 

noticia afligido execution 

tyrannical sentence, when, without losing time, that 
tyrano sentencia sin perder tiempo 

she might not endanger in the delay her safety and 

pelegrar en dilation seguridad 
that of her son, prince Theodoric, she retired with 
la principe Teodorico retirarsecon 

him to Africa, where, a short time after, died 

donde poco despues morir (irr.) 

son and mother, the climate, grief, and pain, 

madre clima pesadumbre dolor 

conspiring against their precious lives. * 
conspirar contrar precioso vida 



EXERCISE NINTH. 

Invasion of Spain by the Saracens, A. d. 71 1- 

Roderic possessed the throne after the death of 
Rodrigo ocupar trono despues de muerte 

Bitiza. In the court was breathed an infected and 

en corte respirarse inficionado 

putrid air. The virtue of Roderic was weak, where- 
podrido ay re virtud Jlaco con- 

fore he made no resistance to the contagion. He 

que hacer (irr.) resistencia 

feared that if he reformed the state, he should multiply 
temer reformar estado multiplicar 

enemies, and that he should have for opposers all those 
enemigo por contrar io 

tvhorn he should not resemble : 3 a cowardice unworthy 

cobardia indigno 

1 Le cm*ta$en la cabeza dentro de la carcel. 

2 Conspiring against their precious lives, the climate, &c. 

3 A quienes nofuese semejante. 



286 SYNTAX. 

of a royal mind. It is well to live like all when all 

real animo bien vivir como 

live well ; and even in this case the prince should 

aim caso deber 

endeavour to live belter, since in (every thing good) it 
aspirar a porque en todo lo bueno 

is his reputation to surpass the subjects. Roderic 

reputation sobresalir (irr.) vasallo 
"began x by pusillanimity, and afterwards by inclination 
por pusilanimidad despnes par inclination 
to follow the paths, (or rather) the deviations of his 
& seguir(\n\) paso 6 descamino 

predecessor. — He suffered himself (to be constrained) 
predecesor dejarse arrastrar 

by the same incontinence, and by the same cruelty;— 
de incontinentia crueldad 

two furies which seldom Jail to make him their prey on 

Juria rara vez 

tvhom they once seize. 2 ' He preserved in all their force 

conservar Juerza 

the infamous laws of Vitiza, and in imitation of that 

infame ley • — - imitation 

tyrant, he pardoned no one tvho should resist him.* In 
iirdno perdonar en 

short, he had all the vices of his predecessor, but he did 
Jin vicio pero 

not commit so many excesses, because he did not live 
. comet er exceso porque vivir 

so long. 
ianto ano 

Among the ladies of the queen (there was) one 
entre dama reyna haber (def.) 

who was called Fiorinda, known commonly by the 

llamarse conocido vulgarmente por 

name of Cava, which in the Arabic language is the 
nombre Arabigo lengua lo 

same as bad ivoman : and because the Moors applied 
mismo que porque Moro aplicar 

1 Comenzo Bodrigo al principio. 

a Dejan de liacer preset en quien una vez seapodwan, 

3 Que le hiciese reslstencia f 



SYNTAX. 287 

without reason this injurious epithet to Florin da, some 
sin razon injurioso epiteto alguno 

historians believed with less reflection that this was 
historiador creer reflecion 

her own name. Florinda, or la Cava, was daughter of 

propio o Jiija 

Count Don Julian, one of the chief lords 1 of Spain, a 
Conde ■■ ■ Espaha 

lady of extraordinary beauty, which (was the more 
dama peregrino hermosura sobresalir (irr.) 

conspicuous) from being accompanied by no less 
mas por acompanar de 

extraordinary honour. She had the misfortune to 

honesiidad desgracia 

please the king ; but she had courage to resist his 
agradar rey pero valor para resistirse a 

continual solicitations. This repulse added fuel to 
continuo instancia desprecio 

his flame ;* and he obtained by availing himself of 
lograr valerse de 

violence, what (he was unable) to accomplish 

molencia no poder (irr.) conseguir (irr.) 

by gallantry or by entreaty. (There is) in heaven 
por cortejo ni ruego haber (def.) cielo 

an avenger of oppressed virtue^ and Itoderic soon 
vengador oprimido presto 

experienced this truth greatly to his cost. 
experiment ar verdad muy cuesta 

Though the unfortunate Spanish Lucretia did not 
aunque infeliz Liter ecia 

feel herself less influenced by grief than the 

seniirse, (irr.) arrebatado de dolor 

Roman, she was more prudent in concealing, and more 
Romana cuerdo en disimidar 

moderate in regulating the effects of her resentment* 
moderado disponer (irr.) efecto resentamiento 

She placed (in the knowledge) of the Count her 
poner (irr.) en noticia 

1 Senov de lo$ mas principales* 

2 Encendio mas la pasion* 



288 SYNTAX. 

father the violence which she had suffered, and 
padre padecer (irr.) 

she enforced the truth of her innocence with tears, 
esforzar (irr.) razon innocencia lagrima 

and with the pressing entreaties she made him, 

vivo instancia hacer (irr.) 

exhorting him to a revenge proportionate to the 
exhortar despique proporcionado 

magnitude of the offence. Less entreaty was 
grandeza agravio esfuerzo 

sufficient to inflame the wrath of the Count 

menester para encender (irr.) colera 

exceedingly irritated with an affront which he 
sobradame?ite irritado con afrenta 

considered his own as well as his daughters, 1 and from 
reputar desde 

that moment he employed all his time 2 in meditating 

punto a meditar 

the means of a frightful vengeance. 
medio ruidoso venganza. 

The Saracens were at that time 3 masters of Mauri- 

Saraceno por tiempo dueno . 

tania, whose possession gave the name of Moors to 

posesion dar (irr.) nombre 

its conquerors. Count Julian was at that season* 

conquistador 
governor of Ceuta, from whose vicinity, king Roderic 

gobernador por inmediacion 

had made him ambassador to the Saracens. 

hacer (irr.) embajador cerca de 

The Count availed himself of this circumstance 

aprovecharse ocasion 

so favourable to the designs of his revenge, and 

favorable intento 

meeting with the chiefs of the Moors, he offered to puts 
avocarse con gefe 

1 Como de su luja. See the note to the Adjective in Syntax. 
- Did toda la aplicacion del descurso, 

3 Were at that time the Saracens. 

4 Halldbase d la sazon el Conde de Julian. 

5 Les ofrecio quependria* 



SYNTAX. 289 

in their hands all Spain, provided they should assist 
mano como ayudar 

him to (wash away) in the blood of Roderic the 

a lavar sangre 

dishonour of his daughter. To facilitate to them 
dcshonra para facilitar 

the enterprise, he represented to them that all the 

empresa represent a r 

people were disarmed, the (fortified places) 

pueblo (plur.) desarmado plaza 

dismantled, the subjects dissatisfied, and the king 
desmantelado c as alio descontento 

hateful to all ; so that only by (allowing them- 
odioso de manera que solo con dejarse 

selves to be seen) the conquest xxjas secure. J The 

ver conquista asegurado 

Moors being persuaded, and the treaty being concluded % 

persuadir traiado concluir 

with great secrecy, he returned immediately 3 to the 
con secreto 

court of Toledo, under pretence of transacting with 
carte con pretexto comunicar 

the king important affairs ; and being well received by 
importante negocio bien recibir de 

the court, without giving either by his words or by his 
sin ni a laspalabra ni al 

countenance the slightest sign of his hidden purpose, 
semhlante leve serial cculto seniimiento 

he knew how to feign with so much artifice, ho:v 

saber (Irr.) fingir artificio 

necessary his presence tvas in Africa, * that the king 
commanded him to return without delay to his 
in and a r volver sin detencion 

embassy. On departing he asked permission 
embajada al despedirse (irr.) pedir (irr.) licencia 



1 Was secure the conquest. 

2 Persuadidcs los micros, y concluida con gran tecreio el tratado. For the 
omission of being see the Syntax of the Participle. 

3 Did prontaniente la vnelta. 

* Lo liectssario que era su pres:ncia en Africa. 
O 



290 SYNTAX. 

to take toitk him 1 his daughter Cava, (the sole) 
para llevarse unico 

motive of his journey ; pretending that her mother ivas 
motivo viage pretentar 

attached * by a mortal disorder, and desired with 

de enfermedad desear con 

anxiety the consolation of seeing, and of taking 
ansia consuelo ver (irr.) despedirse (irr.) 

leave of her daughter, before she paid* with the last 

hija ultimo 

breath the common tribute to nature. The king gave 
aliento comun tribuio naturaleza 
her to him 4 campassionating the cause, 'without any 

compedecer (irr.) de motivo 
suspicion $ of artifice in the proceeding of the Count, 

artijicio proceder 

who as soon as he arrived at Mauritania found 

luego que llegar encontrar (irr.) 

matured all the preparations necessary for the 
acalado prevention necessario para 

execution of his projects, 
execucion proyecto 



EXERCISE TENTH. 6 

The same continued. 

Don Julian advanced with five hundred men to 
adelantarse d 

occupy Heraclea, known now by the name of 
ocupar conocer hoi/ con nombre 

Gibraltar. He ivas followed by 7 a body of twelve 

cuerpo 
thousand Saracens, commanded by Tarif, an Arabian 
mandar Arabe 

1 Consigo. See the Etyro -<o~y P ersonal Pronouns. 

2 Se h&llaba su madre acomei ids* 

3 Antes de pagar. 4 Dioscla el rey. 

5 Sin ofrecersele scspecha. 

6 In this last exercise the irregular -/e*bs will no longer be marked, 

7 Sio-uiole, 



SYNTAX. 291 

general, of as much valour as prudence. The trumpet 

igual valor que prudencia trompeia 

of rebellion resounded on all sides ; l multitudes of the 

rebelion resonar por parte enjambre 
discontented came 2 to be incorporated under the Count. 
malcontento venir a incorpordrse con 
The king informed of the treason, persuaded himself 

infvrmar traicion persuadirse 

inconsiderately that it would be easy to stifle it 

con ligereza facil escarmentar 

in the beginning sending against the rebels his 

principles ervoiar rebelde 

nephew, Don Sancho with a body of troops tumul- 

sobrino iropa tumulta" 

tuously raised ; but its facility deceived him^ for 
riamente levant ar Jhcilidad engahar porque 

almost all these with their general were put (to the 
cast ■ — pas a do ci 

sword.) The Moors being masters of the field * 
cuchillo Moros dueho campana 

extended themselves throughout all Andalusia (like 
extender se por ci 

an inundation.) The (fortified places) - were 

raodo de inundacion plaza 

undefended, and the people being unarmed, 

sin dejensa pueblo (plur.) desarmar 

either place their safety in flight, or perish by the 
6 poner la seguridad ,fuga 6 perecer a 

edge of the Sarracenic sabre. The houses are delivered 
Jilos Saraceno alfange casa eniregarse 

tip 5 to pillage, the (public edifices) to the fire, and 

— edificio f ue g° 

the inhabitants to the sword, confusion, consternation, 

persona — scores alto 

and terror, Jlying to all parts. 6 In the mean time the 
volar parte mientras tanto 

1 F^esounded on all sides the trumpet, &c. 

? Came multitudes, 6:c. 

s But deceived him its facility. 

4 Masters of the field the Moors, &c. 

5 The verb first. G Ih'ng to all parts, confusioiu^, 

O 4 



292 SYNTAX. 

Moors, animated by the successes of their arms 

animar con slices o arrnas 

increased every day by the reinforcements which 
engrosarse cada dia con refnerzo 

came to them from Africa ; so that it appeared that 
venir — tanto que parccer 

all Africa had passed over to Spain. 
pasarse a 

When a monarch has known how (to make himself 
cuando monarca saber hacerse 

beloved) he finds a resource against the greatest 

nmar cncontrar recurso 

reverses of fortune in the heart of his subjects ; but 
rebcse fortuna corazon vasallo 

as Don Roderic had made himself so hateful he 
como aborrecible ' 

found no person in whom he could place his con- 
hallar persona en poder colocar con- 

iidence. However as he touched as if with his 
fianza sin embargo tocar como la 

hand that fatal period which tvas l to decide concern- 
ma no — — punto decidir de 
ing ^ his crown, his states, and his life, he obliged 
corona estado vida obligard 
more than a thousand men to take arms, without 

a tomar las annas sin 
considering that he was arming as many enemies (as 
advertir arraar enemigo 

there were) discontented men. He placed himself at 
como descontento ponerse d 

the head of this army and marched against the Moors 

f rente ejercito marchar 

and the rebels. He met them near Xeres, 

rebelde alcanzar cerca de 

on the boder of the river Guadalete, where he gave 

a or ill a rio donde 

them a general and decisive battle. Don Roderic 
. — — — decisivo bat alia 

1 See Syntax of the Infinitive. 

2 The preposition to be repeated before every noun. See the 
Syntax of that part of speech. 



SYNTAX. 293 

fought (like one who) knew that the gaining or the 

pelear como quien saber 

losing of all depended on that action, l but his crimes, 

pero delito 
as auxiliaries of the Moors, fought against him ; 

auxiliar contra 

and the time of divine vengeance had arrived. % A 

tiempo divi?io venganza llegar 

great part of his own army turned its arms against 

parte ejerciio volver las arm as 

the other, attacking it in flank in the hottest 

Geometer por los costados vivo 

of the fight. This made him lose all spirit, and 

bat alia perder aliento 

putting spurs to his horse, he endeavoured to save 
meter espuela cabello procurar salvarse 

himself by flight, having disappeared (in such a 

con fuga desaparecer de 

manner) that unto this day it is not certainly known 3 
mantra hast a dia 

what was the last end of his disgraceful life. It 

ultimo destino desgraciado 

is conjectured that he died swallowed up in the 

conjecturarse morir ahogado 

waves of the Guadalete, as on the banks of that 

onda — por que a margen 

river were found his horse, his royal mantle, his 

encontrarse real manio 

crown, and his boots,— sad remains of his 

corona botines funesto despojo 

unhappy death. In Portugal is read over a 
desdicado muerte ■ — leerse sobre 

sepulchre this epitaph : " Here lies Roderic, last 

sepulchro epitqfio aqui yacer(de£.) 

king of the Goths." Whatever might have been 

reij Godo comoquiera que poder 

1 Que estaba pendieiite de aquella action el ganarlo todo, 6 el perderU* 
todo. For the insertion of the article before the infinitive, see the 
Svntax of the latter. 

2 But fought against him his crimes, &c. — -had arrived the time, §e. 

3 Xo se sabe a puntojijo. 



294« SYNTAX. 

the end of this monarch, he could not fail to know 

fin poder dejar conocer 

the avenging sword of divine justice in the bloody 

ve?igudor espada justicia sangriento 

accomplishment of h r s catastrophe. 
execution catastrqfe 

Roderic tvas not (the onhj one) punished, 1 because he 
solo eastigar por que 

had not been the only delinquent. His army disor- 
solo delinquent e desor* 

ganised, 2 without king, and without general, was the 
denar cauddlo 

victim of the Sarracen sabre, and all the kingdom 
victima Saraceno alfange 

remained a prey of the African. Tarif divided his 
quedar por presa dividir 

army into several bodies, which at the same time 

en macho cuerpo a un 

spread over all Spain. All those who made resist- 
exiender por hacer resist* 

ance xvere put to thesxvord,* and the rest remained at 
encia pasar demas d 

the will of the conqueror, more as slaves than as 

arbitrio vencedor esclavo que 

prisoners. The unbridled avarice of those barbarians, 
prisionero desenfrenado codicia barbaro 

inclined them to pillage (every thing). The sword 
empehar en pillarlo todo espada 

devoured, the fire consumed, famine wasted, and every 
devorar fi ue g° consumir hambre talar 
thing would have perished, if the same avarice of the 

perecer avaricia 

conqueror had not spared it. Seldom has there been 

conservar lo 
seen 4 in the world a desolation so terrible. It was a 
man do desolation ■ 



1 Was not alone Roderic the punished. 

2 Let the participle precede ejercito. 

3 Were put to the sword all those who made resistance. 

4 Pocas veces se vio. 



SYNTAX. 295 

deluge of miseries, which purified the land from 
dihivio mal purificar tierra 

another deluge of crimes. In less than three years 

culpa de ana 

Spain passed under the dominion of the Sarracens. 
pasar a dominion 

The revenge of Count Julian was more frightful 
venganza ruidoso 

perhaps than what he himself had imagined in the 
quizd de lo que Jlgurarse 

first ungovernable impulses of his anger. But having 

arrebatado impulso cole r a 

done treason to his religion, his country, and his king, 

liacer traicion patria 

he left his name to posterity laden with the execra- 
dejar nombre posteridad cargar execra- 

tion of all ages. (It is not known) whether he 
cion siglo ignorarse si 

survived the flame which he himself raised up ; and 
sobrevivir incendio excitar 

(it is not known) what was the end of his wretched 

no saber se Jin infeliz 

days. 



296 



APPENDIX TO 



APPENDIX TO SYNTAX. 



The following List is arranged in three columns. It 
contains in the first the words admitting certain prepx)- 
'nlions ; in the second, the prepositions themselves; and in 
the thirds the ivords governed by them % % 

los peligros 

la suerte 

alguno 

aigo 

alguno 

otra 

las gentes 

todos 

deseos 

los amigos 

la fruta 

riquezas 

las desgracias 

la amistad 

venir 

alguno 

tal tiempo 

la disputa 

la opinion de otro 

todos 

la casa 

sagrado 

otro dictamen 

otros 

sabios 

los incautos 

lo pasado 

los contrarios 

trabajos 

genio 

necio 

alguno 

la confianza 

akuno 



abalanzarse 


a 


abandonarse 


a 


abocarse 


con 


abochornarse 


de 


abogar 


por 


abordar (una nave) 


d, con 


aborrecible 


a 


aborrecido 


de 


abrasarse 


en 


abrirse 


d 9 con 


abstenerse 


de 


abundar 


de, en 


aburrido 


de 


abusar 


de 


acabar 


de 


acaecer 


a 


acaecer 


en 


acalorarse 


en, con 


acceder 


a 


accesible 


a 


acertar 


a, con 


acogerse 


a 


acomodarse 


a, con 


acompafiarse 


con 


aconsejarse 


con, de 


acontecer 


a 


acordarse 


de 


aco rd arse 


con 


acostumbrarse 


a 


acre 


de 


acreditarse 


de 


acred itarse 


con, para, con 


acreedor 


a, de 


acreedor 


de 



* Gramatica de la Lengna Castellana, Compuesta por 
Academia Espaiiola.- — Page 332. 



Real 





SYNTAX 




actuarse 


de, en 


Ins negocios 


acusar (a alguno) 


de* 


algun delito 


acusarse 


de 


las culpas 


aclelantarse 


a 


otros 


adherirse 


d 


otro dictamen 


adolecer 


de 


alguna enfermedad 


afterrarse 


en, con 


su opinion 


aferrarse (una nave) 


con 


otra 


aficionarse 


d, de 


alguna cosa 


afirmarse 


en 


lo dicho 


ageno 


de 


verdad 


a^radable 


al 


paladar 


agradecido 


d 


Ins beneficios 


agraviarse 


de 


alguno 


agraviarse 


de 


la sentencia 


agregarse 


d 


otros 


agrio 


al 


gusto 


agudo 


de 


ingenio 


ahitarse 


de 


ma nj ares 


ahogarse 


en 


el mar 


ahorcajarse 


en 


las espaldas 


ahorrar 


de 


razones 


no ahorrarse 


con 


ninguno 


air arse 


con 


alguno 


ajustarse 


con 


alguno 


ajustarse 


a 


la razon 


alabarse 


de 


valiente 


alargarse 


d 


la ciudad 


alegrarse 


de 


algo 


alejarse 


de 


su tierra 


alimentarse 


de, con 


yerbas 


alimentarse 


de 


esperanzas 


alindar 


con 


otra heredad 


alto 


a 


cuerpo 


allanarse 


d 


lo justo 


am able 


de 


todos 


amable 


de 


genio 


arnanceburse 


con 


los libros 


amante 


de 


alguno 


amafiarse 


d 


escribir 


amoroso 


con 


los suyos 


ampararse 


de 


algo, de alguna cosa 


ancho 


de 


boca 


andar 


con 


el tiempo 


andar 


de 


capa 


andar 


en 
o 5 


pleitcs 



29T 



298 

andar 

andar 

angosto 

anhelar 

anticiparse 

aovar 

aparar 

aparecerse 

aparecerse 

aparejarse 

apartarse 

apartarse 

apasionarse 

apearse 

apechugar 

apechugar 

apedrear 

apegarse 

apelar 

apelar 

apercibirse 

apercibirse 

apetecible 

apetecido 

apiadarse 

aplicarse 

apoderarse 

apostar 

apresurarse 

apresurarse 

apretar 

aprobarse 

aprobado 

aprupiado 

apropiarse 

apropincuarse 

aprovecharse 

aprovecharse 

apto 

apurado 

aquietarse 

arder 

arderse 

araarse 

arrebozarse 

arrecirse 



PENDIX 


TO 


d 


gatas 


por 


tierra 


de 


manga 


a, por 


mayor fortuna 


d 


otro 


en 


la ribera 


en 


la mano 


a 


alguno 


en 


el c ami no 


para 


el trabajo 


de 


la ocasion 


a 


un lado 


a, de, por 


alguno 


de 


su opinion 


con 


alguna cosa 


por 


los peligros 


con 


las palabras 


a 


alguna cosa 


de 


la sentencia 


a 


otro medio 


de 


armas 


d 9 para 


la batalla 


al 


gusto 


de, por 


todos 


de 


los pobres 


a 


los estudios 


de 


la hacienda 


a 


ccrrer 


a 


venir 


por 


alguna cosa 


por 


la cintura 


en 


alguna facultad 


de 


cirujano 


para 


el oficio 


a 


si 


a 


alguno 


en 


la virtud 


de 


la ccasion 


para 


el empleo 


de 


medios 


en 


la disputa 


en 


deseos 


en 


quimeras 


de 


paciencia 


con 


algo 


de 


frio 





SYNTAX. 




arreglarse 


a 


las leyes 


arregostarse 


d 


alguna cosa 


arremeter 


a, con, contra 


el aiuro 


arrepentirse 


de 


las culpas 


arrestarse 


a 


todo 


arribar 


a 


tierra 


arrimarse 


a 


la pared 


arrinconarse 


en 


casa 


arrogarse (algo) 


a 


si misrao 


arrojarse 


a 


pelear 


arroparse 


con 


la capa 


arrostar 


a, con 


los peligros 


asarse 


de 


calor 


ascender 


& 


otro empleo 


asegurarse 


de 


su contrario 


asentir 


a 


otro dictameu 


asesorarse 


con 


letrados 


asistir 


a 


los enfermos 


asistir 


en 


tal casa 


asociarse 


a, con 


otro 


asoraarse 


u,por 


la ventana 


as parse 


a 


gritos 


asparse 


por 


alguna cosa 


aspero 


al 


gusto 


aspero 


en 


las palabras 


aspirar 


d 


mayor fortdna 


atarse 


a 


una sola cosa 


atemorizarse 


de, por 


algo 


atender 


d 


la conversacion 


atenerse 


a 


lo seguro 


atento 


con 


sus mayores 


atestiguar 


con 


otro 


atinar 


dy con 


la casa 


atollarse 


en 


los caminos 


atraer 


d 


si 


atreverse 


a 


cosas grandes 


atreverse 


con 


todos 


atribuir 


d 


otro 


atribularse 


en, con 


los trabajos 


atropellarse 


en 


las acciones 


atufarse 


en 


la conversacion 


atufarse 


por 


poco 


aunarse 


con 


otro 


ausentarse 


de 


Madrid 


avecindarse 


en 


algun pueblo 


avenirse 


con 


todos 



299 



soo 



APPENDIX TO 



aventajarse 


d 


otros 


avergonzarse 


a 


pedir 


avergonzarse 


de 


algo 


avereguarse 


con 


alguno 


aviarse 


de 


ropa 


avocar (alguna cosa) 


a 


si 


avocarse 


con 


alguno 


balancear 


d 


tal parte 


balancear 


en 


la duda 


balar 


por 


dinero 


bambolear 


en 


la m aroma 


banarse 


en 


agua 


barar 


en 


tierra 


barbear 


con 


la pared 


bastardear 


de 


su naturaleza 


bastardear 


en 


sus acciones 


bat all ar 


con 


los enemigos 


bajar 


d 


la cue.va 


bajar 


de 


la torre 


bajar 


de 


autoridad 


bajar 


hdcia 


el vaile 


bajo 


de 


cuerpo 


benenco 


a, para 


la salud 


bianco 


de 


cutis 


blando 


de 


corteza 


blasfemar 


de 


la virtud 


blasonar 


de 


valiente 


bordar (algo) 


de, con 


plata 


bordar (algo) 


al 


tambor 


bordar 


de 


pasados 


bostezar 


de 


harabre 


boto 


de 


punta 


boy ante 


en 


la fortuna 


braraar 


de 


corage 


brear 


d 


cbasco 


bregar 


con 


alguno 


brindar 


con 


regalos 


brindar 


a 


la salud de alguno 


bueno 


de, para 


comer 


bufar 


de 


ira 


bullif 


en, por 


todas partes 


burlarse 


de 


algo 


caber 


de 


pies 


caber 


en 


la mano 


caer 


d 7 hacia 


tal parte 


caer 


de 


io alto 





SYNTAX. 
( 


30; 

tierra, en cuenta, 


caer 


en < 


en error, en tai tiempo, 
en lo que se dice 


caer 


por 


pascua 


caer 


sobre 


los enemigos 


calarse 


de 


agua 


calentarse 


a 


la lumbre 


calificar 


de 


docto 


callar (la verdad) 


a 


otro 


callar 


de, por 


miedo 


caluraniar (a alguno) 


de 


injusto 


calzarse 


a 


alguno 


cambiar (alguna cosa) 


con, por 


otra 


caminar 


a, para 


Sevilla 


caminar 


a 


pie 


caminar 


por 


el monte 


cansarse 


de, con 


el trabajo 


cansarse 


de 


pretender 


cansarse 


en 


el carnino 


capaz 


de 


cien arrobas 


capaz 


de, para 


el empleo 


capitular 


con 


el enemigo 


capitular (a alguno) 


de 


mal juez 


cargarse 


de 


razon 


casa (una persona 6 cosa) con 


otra 


catequizar (a alguno) 


para 


alguna cosa 


causar (perjuicio) 


a 


alguno 


cautivar (a alguno) 


con, po 


r beneficios 


cavar (la iraaginacion) 


en 


alguno 


cavar (con la imagination) en 


alguna cosa 


cazcalear 


de 


una parte a otra 


ceder 


a 


otro, a la autoridad 


ceder 


en 


beneficio de alguno 


censurar (alguna cosa) 


de 


mala 


ceiiirse 


a 


lo posible 


circunscribirse 


a 


una cosa 


clamar 


a 


Dios 


clamar 


por 


dinero 


clamorear 


por 


los muertos 


coartar (la facultad) 


d 


alguno 


cobrar (dinero) 


de 


los deudores 


colegir 


de, por 


los antecedentes 


coligarse 


con 


alguno 


columpiarse 


en 


el aire 


combatir 


con, contra el enemigo 


combinar (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


comedirse 


en 


las palabras 



302 


APPENDIX TO 


comenzar 


d 


decir 


comerse 


de 


envidia 


compatible 


con 


lajusticia 


compensar (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


competir 


con 


alguno 


complacerse 


de, en 


alguna cosa 


componerse 


con 


los deudores 


componerse 


de 


bueno y malo 


comprar (algo) 


al, del 


vendedor 


comprehensible 


al 


entendimiento 


comprobar (algo) 


con 


instrumentos 


comprometerse 


con 


alguno 


comprometerse 


en 


jueces arbitros 


comunicar (luz) 


a 


alguna parte 


comunicar (uno) 


con 


otro 


concebir (alguna cosa) 


de 


tal modo 


concebir (algo) 


en 


el animo 


concebir (una cosa) 


por 


buena 


conceder (algo) 


d 


otro 


conceptuar (a alguno) 


de 9 por 


sabio 


concertar (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


concordar (la copia) 


con 


el original 


concurrir 


a 


algun fin 


concurrir 


* 

a 


alguna parte 


concurrir 


con 


otros 


concurrir (muchos) 


en 


un dictamen 


condenar (a uno) 


a 


galeras 


condenar (a uno) 


en 


las costas 


condescencler 


a 


los ruegos 


condescender 


con 


la instancia 


condolerse 


. de 


los trabajos 


conducir (algo) 


d 


tal parte 


conducir (una cosa) 


al 


bien de otro 


confabularse 


con 


los contrarios 


confederate 


con 


alguno 


conferir (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


conferir (un negocio) 


coti) entre los amigos 


confesar (el delito) 


al 


juez 


confesarse 


a 


Dios 


confesarse 


con 


alguno 


confesarse 


de 


sus culpas 


confiar (una cosa) 


a 


una persona 


confiar 


€n y de 


alguno 


confinar (Espaila) 


con 


Francia 


confirmarse 


en 


su dictamen 


conformarse 


con 


el tiempo 


conforme 


dp con 


su opinion 





SYNTAX. 


i 


eonfrontar 


con 


alguno 


confrontar (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


confundirse 


de 


lo que se ve 


confundirse 


en 


sus juicios 


congeniar 


con 


alguno 


congraciarse 


con 


otro 


congratularse 


con 


los SU) T OS 


congratularse 


de 


alguna cosa 


conjeturar (algo) 


de r for 


seilales 


conmutar (algo) 


con 


otra cosa 


conmutar (un, voto) 


en 


otra cosa 


consagrarse 


a 


Dios 


consentir 


en 


algo 


consolarse 


con 


sus parientes 


conspirar 


a 


alguna cosa 


conspirar 


contra 


alguno 


conspirar 


en 


un intento 


constar (el todo) 


de 


partes 


con star 


por 


escrito 


consultar 


a 


alguno para un em[ 


consultar 


con 


letrados 


consumado 


en 


una facultad 


contaminarse 


con 


los viciosos 


contaminarse 


de 


heregias 


conteraporizar 


con 


alguno 


contender 


con 


alguno 


contender 


sobre 


alguna cosa 


contenerse 


en 


su obligacion 


contestar 


* 

a 


lapregunta 


contraer (algo) 


a 


un asunto 


contrapesar (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


contraponer (una cosa) 


a 


otra 


contrapuntarse 


con 


alguno 


contrapuntarse 


de 


palabras 


contravenir 


a 


la ley 


contribuir 


a 


tal cosa 


contribuir 


con 


dinero 


convalecer 


de 


la enfermedad 


convencerse 


de 


la razon 


convenir 


con 


otro 


convenir 


en 


alguna cosa 


conversar 


con 


alguno 


conversar 


en 


materias de estado 


convertir (la hacienda) 


en 


dinero 


conyertirse 


a 


Dios 


convidar (a alguno) 


a 


comer 


convidar (a alguno) 


con 


dinero 



303 



304 


APPENDIX TO 


convidarse 


a 


los trabajos 


convocar 


a 


junta 


cooperar (con otro) 


a 


alguna cosa 


correrse 


de 


verguenza 


corresponder , 


a 


los beneficios 


corresponderse 


con 


los amigos 


cotejar (lacopia) 


con 


el original 


crecer 


en 


virtudes 


crecido 


de 


cuerpo 


creer 


en 


Dios 


creerse 


de 


alguna cosa 


cuadrar 


con 


el encargo 


cuadrar (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno * 


cual 


de 


los dos 


cucharetear 


en 


todo 


cuidar (de algo) 


de 


alguno 


culpar (h uno) 


de 


omiso 


cumplir 


con 


alguno 


cumplir 


con 


su obligacion 


curarse 


de 


alguna enfermedad 


curarse 


en 


salud 


curtirse 


al 


aire 


curtido 


del 


sol 


chancearse 


con 


alguno 


chapuzar (algo) 


en 


el agua 


chico 


de 


cuerpo 


chocar 


a 


alguno 


chocar 


con 


otro 


dar (algo) 


a 


alguno 


dar (a alguno) 


de 


palos 


dar 


de 


bianco 


dar 


en 


manias 


dar 


por 


visto 


darse 


a 


estudiar 


darse 


al 


diantre 


darse 


por 


vencido 


deber (diner©) 


a 


alguno 


decaer 


de 


su autoridad 


decir (algo) 


a 


otro 


decir (bien) 


con 


una cosa 


decir (bien) 


de 


alguno 


declararse 


d 


alguno 


declararse 


por 


unpartido 


declinar 


d y hdcia 


tal parte 


declinar 


en 


bajeza 


dedicar (tieinpo) 


al 


estudio 





SYNTAX. 




dediearse 


d 


la virtud 


defender (a uno) 


de 


sus contrarios 


deferir (al parecer) 


de 


otro 


de fraud ar (algo) 


de 


la autoridad de otro 


degenerar 


de 


su nacimie*nto 


dejar (una man da) 


a 


alguno 


dejar 


de 


alguno 


dejar (algo) 


en 


escribir 


delante 


de 


manos de otro 


delatarse 


al 


juez 


deleitarse 


con 


la vista 


deleitarse 


en 


oir 


deliberar 


sobre 


tal cosa 


dentro 


de 


casa 


depender 


de 


alguno 


deponer (a alguno) 


de 


su empleo 


depositar (algo) 


en 


alguno parte 


derivar 


de 


otra autoridad 


derrenegar 


de 


alguna cosa 


desabrirse 


con 


alguno 


desabrocharse 


con 


alguno 


desagradecido 


a 


algun beneficio 


desahogarss (con alguno) 


de 


su pena 


desapropriarse 


de 


algo 


desavenirse 


con 


alguno 


desavenirse (unos) 


de 


otros 


desayunarse 


de 


alguna noticia 


descabezarse 


en 


alguna cosa 


descalabazarse 


en 


alguna cosa 


descansar 


de 


la fatiga 


descantillar (algo) 


de 


alguna cosa 


descargarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


descartarse 


de 


algun encargo 


descender 


a 


los valles 


descender 


de 


buen linage 


descolgarse 


de, por 


la muralla 


descollar 


sobre 


otros 


descomponerse 


con 


alguno 


desconfiar 


de 


alguno 


desconocido 


a 


los benerlcios 


descontar (aigo) 


de 


alguna cosa 


descubrirse 


con 


alguno 


descuidarse 


de, en 


su obligacion 


desdecir 


de 


su caracter 


desdecirse 


de 


lo dicbo 


desdeiiarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


desembarazarse 


de 


estorvos 



305 



306 


APPENDIX TO 


desembarcar 


de 


la nave 


desembarcar 


en 


el puerto 


desenfrenarse 


en 


vicios 


desertar 


de 


las banderas 


desesperar 


de 


la pretension 


desfalcar (algo) 


de 


alguna cosa 


desgajarse 


de 


los montes 


deshacerse 


a 


trabajar 


deshacerse 


de 


alguna cosa 


deshacerse 


en 


llanto 


desmentir 


a 


alguno 


desmentir (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


desuudarse 


de 


pasiones 


despedirse 


de 


alguna cosa 


despeilarse 


de 


un vicio en otro 


despertar 


a 


alguno 


despertar 


del 


sueilo 


despicarse 


de 


la ofensa 


despoblarse 


de 


gente 


despdsarse 


con 


alguno 


desprenderse 


de 


algo 


despues 


de 


alguna Cosa 


desquiciar (a alguno) 


de 


su poder 


desquitarse 


de 


la perdida 


desterrar (a uno) 


de 


su patria 


destrizarse 


a 


llorar 


destrizarse 


de 


enfado 


desvergonzarse 


con 


alguno 


desviarse 


del 


camino 


desvivirse 


por 


algo 


detenerse 


en 


dificultades 


determinarse 


a 


partir 


detras 


de 


la iglesia 


devolver (la causa) 


al 


juez 


deferir (algo) 


a, para 


otro tiernpo 


dignarse 


de 


conceder algo 


dimanar (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


discernar (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


disgust arse 


de, con 


alguna cosa 


disponer 


de 


los bienes 


disponerse 


a 


caminar 


disputar 


de, soh % e 


alguna cosa 


disentir 


de 


otro dictamen 


distar (un pueblo) 


de 


otro 


distinguir (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


distraerse 


de, en 


la conversacion 


disuadir (a alguno) 


de 


alguna cosa 





SYNTAX. 




dividir (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


dividir 


en 


partes 


dividir 


eutre 


muchos 


dividir 


por 


mitad 


dolerse 


de 


los pecados 


dotado 


de 


ciencia 


dudar 


de 


alguna cosa 


durar 


hasta 


el invierno 


durar 


por 


mucbo tiempo 


duro 


de 


corteza 


echar (algo) 


a, en, por 


tierra 


echar (olor) 


de 


si 


elevarse 


a, hasta 


el cielo 


elevarse 


de 


la tierra 


embarcarse 


en 


negocios 


embobarse 


con, de, en 


alguna cosa 


emboscarse 


en 


el monte 


embutir (alguna cosa) 


de 


algo don 


embutir (una cosa) 


en 


otra 


enmendarse 


con 


la correccion 


enmendarse 


de, en 


alguna cosa 


empaparse 


en 


agua 


emparejar 


con 


alguno 


emparentar 


con 


alguno 


empefiarse 


en 


una cosa 


emplearse 


en 


alguna cosa 


enagenarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


enamorarse 


de 


alguno 


enamoricarse 


de 


alguno 


encajarse 


en, por 


alguna parte 


encaramarse 


en, por, sobre 


! ia pared 


encararse 


a, con 


alguno 


encargarse 


de 


algun negoeio 


encasquetarse (algo) 


en 


la cabeza 


encastiilarse 


en 


alguna parte 


encenagarse 


en 


vicios 


encenderse 


en 


ira 


encerrarse 


en 


su casa 


encomendarse 


a 


Dios 


enconarse 


con 


alguno 


encbarcarse 


en 


agua 


enfermar 


del 


pecho 


enfrascarse 


en 


la disputa 


engolfarse 


en 


cosas graves 


engreirse 


con 


la fortuna 


enlazar (alguna cosa) 


con 


otra 


enradarse (una cosa) 


con, en 


otra 



307 



308 APPENDIX TO 


ensayarse 


en 


alguna cosa 


entender 


de 


alguna cosa 


entender 


, en 


sus negocios 


enterarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


enterarse 


en 


algun negocio 


entrar 


en 


alguna parte 


entregar (algo) 


a 


aiguno 


entremeterse 


en 


cosas de otro 


enviar (algo) 


a 


aiguno 


equivocarse (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


equivocarse 


en 


algo 


escaparse 


de 


la prision 


escaparse 


por 


la ventuna 


escamentar 


de, con 


alguna cosa 


escarmentar 


eu 


cabeza agena 


esconderse 


en 


aiguno parte 


esconderse 


de 


aiguno 


escaso 


de 


medios 


escribir (cartas) 


a 


aiguno 


esculpir 


en 


bronce 


esmerarse 


en 


alguna cosa 


espantarse 


de 


algo 


estampar 


en 


papel 


estar 


a 


la orden de otro 


estar 


de 


viage 


estar 


en 


alguna parte 


estar 


en 


anirno de 


estar 


en 


lo que se hace 


estar 


•para 


salir 


estar 


por 


aiguno 


estar (alguna cosa) 


for 


suceder 


estrecharse 


con 


aiguno 


estrecharse 


en 


los gastos 


estrellarse 


con 


aiguno 


estrellarse tn } 


, b, contra alguna cosa 


estribar 


en 


alguna cosa 


exceder (una cosa) 


a 


otra 


exceder (una cantidad) 


en 


mil reales 


exceptuar (a aiguno) 


de 


alguna cosa 


excluir (a aiguno) 


de 


alguna parte, 6 cosa 


excusarse 


con 


aiguno 


excusarse 


de 


hacer alguna cosa 


exhortar (a aiguno) 


a 


tal cosa 


eximir (a aiguno) 


de 


alguna cosa 


exonerar (a aiguno) 


de 


su empleo 


expeler (a aiguno) 


de 


alguna parte 


experto 


en 


las artes 





SYNTAX. 


SOS 


extraer (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


extraviarse 


de 


la carrera 


facil 


de 


digerir 


fal tar 


a 


la palabra 


faltar 


de 


alguna parte 


falto 


de 


juicio 


fastidiarse 


de 


manjares 


fatigarse 


de } en, por 


alguna cosa 


favorable 


a, para 


alguno 


favorecerse 


de 


alguno 


fiarse 


de 


alguno 


iiar (algo) 


a 


alguno 


fiel 


a, con 


sus amigos 


fijar (algo) 


en 


la pared 


flexible 


a 


la razon 


fluctuar 


en, entre 


dudas 


fortificarse 


en 


alguna parte 


fran que arse 


a, con 


alguno 


frisar (una persona, 6 cos 


a) con 


otra 


fuera 


de 


cosa 


fuerte 


de 


condicion 


fundarse 


en 


razon 


girar (una letra) 


a 


cargo de otro 


girar 


de 


una parte a otra 


girar 


por 


tal parte 


girar 


sobre 


una casa de comerci© 


gloriarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


gordo 


de 


talle 


gozar 


de 


alguna cosa 


graduar (una cosa) 


de 9 por 


buena 


grangear (la voluntad) 


a 


alguno 


guardarse 


de 


alguno, de alguna cosa 


guarecerse 


de 


alguna persona 6 cosa 


guarecerse 


en 


alguna parte 


guarnecer (una cosa) 


con, de 


otra 


guiado 


de 


alguno 


guiarse 


por 


alguno 


guindarse 


por 


la pared 


gustar 


de 


alguna cosa 


habii 


en 


papeles 


habil 


para 


el empleo 


habilitar (a uno) 


en, para 


alguna cosa 


habitar 


con 


alguno 


habitar 


en 


tal parte 


habituarse 


a, en 


alguna cosa 


hablar 


con, pot 


* alguno 



310 APPENDIX \ 


ro 


hablar 


de 9 en, sobre alguna cosa 


hablar 


en 


griego 


hacer 


a 


todo 


hacer 


de 


valiente 


hacer 


para 


si 


hacer 


por 


alguno 


hacerse 


con 


buenos libros 


hallar (alguna cosa) 


en 


tal parte 


hallarse 


a, en 


la fiesta 


hartarse 


de 


comida 


henchir (el cantaro) 


de 


agua 


herir (a alguno) 


en 


la estimacion 


herido 


de 


la injuria 


hermanar (ana cosa) 


con 


otra 


hervir (un iugar) 


de, en 


gente 


hincarse 


de 


rodillas 


bocicar 


en 


alguna cosa 


holgarse 


con, de 


alguna cosa 


huir 


de 


alguna persona 6 cosa 


humanarse 


a 


alguna cosa 


humanarse 


con 


los inferiores 


humillarse 


a 


alguna persona 6 cosa 


hundir (alguna cosa) 


en 


el agua 


hundirse 


en 


un pantano 


idoneo 


para 


alguna cosa 


igual 


a, con 


otro 


igual 


en 


fuerzas 


Igualar (una cosa) 


a, con 


otra 


irapelir (a alguno) 


de ? en 


alguna cosa 


irnbuir (a alguno) 


a 


alguna cosa 


impelido 


de 


la necesidad 


impenetrable 


a 


los mas perspicaces 


impenetrable 


en 


el secreto 


impetrar (algo) 


de 


alguno 


implicarse 


con, en 


alguna cosa 


imponer (pena) 


a 


alguno 


imponerse 


en 


alguna cosa 


importar 


a 


alguno 


importunado 


de, por 


otro 


importunar (a alguno;, 


con 


impresiones 


impresionar (a alguno) 


contra 


otro 


impresionar 


de, en 


alguna cosa 


imprimir (alguna cosa) 


en 


el animo 


impropio 


de, en, para 


su edad 


impugnar (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


impugn a do 


de ? por 


much os 



imputar (la culpa) 

inaccesible 

inapeable 

incansable 

incapaz 

incesante 

incidir 

inciter (a alguno) 

incitar (a. alguno) 

inclinar (a alguno) 

incluir 

incompatible 

incomprehensible 

inconsecuente 

inconstante 

incorporar (una cosa) 

increible 

incumbir (una cosa) 

incunir 

indeciso 

indignarse 

indisponer (a uno) 

inducir (a alguno) 

inductivo 

indultar (a alguno) 

infatigable 

infecto 

inferior 

inferior 

inferir (una cosa) 

inficionado 

infiel 

inflexible 

inflexible 

influir 

informal' (a alguno) 

infundir (animo) 

ingrato 

ingrato 

inhabil 

inhabilitar (a alguno) 
inhibir (aljuez) 
injerir (un arbol) 
insensible 
inseparable 
insertar (una cosa) 
iusinuar (una cosa) 



SYNTAX. 




a 


otro 


a 


los pretendientes 


de 


su opinion 


en 


el trabajo 


de 


remedio 


en 


sus tareas 


en 


culpa 


a 


su defensa 


contra 


otro 


a 


la virtud 


en 


el numero 


con 


el mando 


a 


los hombres 


en 


alguna cosa 


en 


su proceder 


a, con, en 


otra 


a, para 


muchos 


a 


alguno 


en 


delitos 


en 


resolver 


con, contra 


alguno 


con 


otro 


a 


pecar 


de 


error 


de 


la pena 


en 


el trabajo 


de 


heregia 


a 


otro 


en 


alguna cosa 


de, por 


otra 


de 


peste 


a 


su a mi go 


a 


la razon 


en 


su dictamen 


en 


alguna cosa 


de, sobre 


alguna cosa 


a, en 


alguno 


a 


los benelicios 


con 


los amigos 


para 


el empleo 


para 


alguna cosa 


de, en 


el conocimiento 


en 


otro 


a 


las injurias 


de 


la virtud 


en 


otra 


§ 


alguna 



311 



312 

insinuarse 

insipido 

insistir 

inspirar (alguna cosa) 

instruir (a alguno) 

interceder 

interceder 

Interesarse 

interesarse 

interesarse 

internarse 

internarse 

interpoiar (unas cosas) 

interponar (su autoridad 

intervenir 

intervenir 

introducirse 

introducirse 

invalido 

invern ar 

inverti r (el caudal) 

ir (de Madrid) 

ir 

ir 

ir 

ir 

jactarse 

jugar 

jugar (tmos) 

jugar (alguna cosa) 

juntar (una cosa) 

justificarse 

juzgar 

ladear (una cosa) 

ladearse (alguno) 

lamentarse 

lanzar (algo) 

largo 

largo 

lastimarse 

lastimai^se 

leer (los-pensamientos) 

lejos 

levantar (las manos) 

levantar (alguna cosa) 

levantar (alguna cosa) 



APPENDIX 

con 

al 
en f sobre 
a 
de, en, sobre 

con 

por 

con 

por 

en 

con 

en 

con 

con 

en 

por 

con 
en, por 
de, por 

en 

en 

a, hacia 

contra 

por 

por 

tras 

de 

a 

con 

con 

a, con 

de 

de 

a 
a 
de 

a, contra 

de 

de 
con, en 

de 
a 

de 

al 
del 

en 



TO 

los poderosos 

gusto 

alguna cosa 

alguno 

alguna cosa 

alguno por otro 

otro con alguno 

alguno por otro 

otro con alguno 

alguna cosa 

alguno 

alguna cosa 6 lugar 

otras 

alguno 

las cosas 

alguno 

los que mandan 

alguna parte 

los contrarios 

tal parte 

otro uso 

Cadiz 

alguno 

el camino 

pan 

alguno 

alguna cosa 
tal juego 
otros 
otra 
otra 

algun cargo 
alguna cosa 

tal parte 

otro partido 

la disgracia 

alguno 

cuerpo 

manos 

una piedra 

aiguno 

alguno 

tierra 

cielo 

suelo 

alto 





SYNTAX. 


31* 


libertar (a alguno) 


de 


paligro 


librar (a alguno) 


de 


riesgos 


lidiar 


con 


alguno 


ligar (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


ligero 


de 


pies 


limitar (las facultades) 


a 


alguno 


limitado 


de 


talentos 


lindar (una posesion) 


con 


otra 


llevar (algo) 


a 


alguna parte 


llevarse 


de 


alguna pasion 


luchar 


con 


alguno 


ludir (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


malquistarse 


con 


alguno 


manar (agua) 


de 


una fuente 


inanco 


de 


una mano 


mancomunarse 


con 


otros 


mandar (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


manifestar (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


mantener (conversacion) 


a 


alguno 


inantenerse 


de 


yerbas 


mantenerse 


en 


paz 


maquinar 


contra 


alguno 


maquinar 


en, sobre 


alguna cosa 


maravillarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


mas 


de 


cien ducados 


inatarse 


por 


conseguir alguna cosa 


matarse 


a 


trabajar 


rnatizar 


con, de 


colores 


mediano 


de 


cuerpo 


madiar 


con, por 


alguno 


inediar 


entre 


los contrarios 


medirse 


con 


sus fuerzas 


medirse 


en 


las palabras 


medrar 


en 


la hacienda 


mejorar 


de 


empleo 


mejorar (a alguno) 


en 


tei'cio y quinto 


menor 


de 


edad 


menos 


de 


cien ducados 


merecer 


a, con, de 


alguno 


mesurarse 


en 


las acciones 


meter (dinero) 


en 


el cofre 


meter (a alguno) 


en 


empefio 


meter (una cosa) 


entre 


otras 


metarse 


a 


gobernar 


meters© 


a 
P 


caballero 



314< APPENDIX 


TO 


meterse 


con 


los que mandan 


meterse 


en 


los peligros 


mezclar (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


mezclarse 


en 


negocios 


mirar (la ciudad) 


a 


oriente 


mirar 


por 


alguno 


mirarse 


en 


alguna cosa 


moderarse 


en 


las palabras 


mofarse 


de 


alguno 


mojar (alguna cosa) 


en 


agua 


molerse 


a 


trabajar 


molido 


de 


andar 


molestar (a uno) 


con 


visitas 


molesto 


a 


todos 


montar 


a 


caballo 


montar 


en 


mula 


montar 


en 


colera 


morar 


en 


poblado 


morir 


de 


poca edad 


morir 


de 


enfermedad 


morirse 


de 


frio 


morirse 


por 


lograr alguna cosa 


motejar (a alguno) 


de 


ignorante 


motivar (la providencia) 


con 


razones 


mo verse 


de 


una parta a otra 


muchos 


de 


los presentes 


mudar (alguna cosa) 


a 


otra 


mudar 


de 


intento 


mudarse 


de 


casa 


murmurar 


de 


alguno 


nacer 


con 


fortuna 


nacer (alguna cosa) 


de 


alguna parte 


nacer 


en 


las malvas 


11 ace r 


para 


trabajos 


nadar 


en 


el rio 


navegar 


a 


Indias 


negarse 


a 


la comunicacion 


nimio 


en 


su proceder 


ninguno 


de 


los presentes 


nivelarse 


a 


lo justo 


nombrar (a alguno) 


para 


el empleo 


notar (a alguno) 


de 


hablador 


notificar (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


obligar (a alguno) 


a 


alguna cosa 


obstar (una cosa) 


a 


otra 



, 


SYNTAX. 




obstinarse 


en 


alguna cosa 


obtener (alguna gracia) 


de 


alguno 


ocultar (alguna cosa) 


d, de 


alguno 


ocuparse 


en 


trabajar 


ofenderse 


con 


alguna cosa 


ofrecer (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


ofrecerse 


a 


los peligros 


oler (una cosa) 


a 


otra 


olvidarse 


de 


lo pasado 


opinar 


en, sobre 


alguna cosa 


oprimir (a alguno) 


con 


el poder 


optar 


a 


los empleos 


ordenarse 


de 


sacerdote 


orillar 


a 


alguna parte 


pactar (alguna cosa) 


con 


otro 


pagar 


con 


palabras 


pagar 


en 


dinero 


pagarse 


de 


buenas razones 


pal ad ears e 


con 


alguna cosa 


paliar (alguna cosa) 


con 


otra 


palido 


de 


semblante 


parar 


a 


la puerta 


parar 


en 


casa 


pararse 


a 


descansar 


pararse 


con 


alguno 


pararse 


en 


alguna cosa 


parco 


en 


la comida 


parecer 


en 


alguna parte 


parecerse 


a 


otro 


participar (algo) 


a 


alguno 


participar 


de 


alguna cosa 


particularizarse 


con 


alguno 


particularizarse 


en 


alguna cosa 


partir 


a 


Italia 


partir (algo) 


con 


otro 


partir 


en 


pedazos 


partir 


entire 


enemigos 


partir 


por 


mitad 


partir 


por 


entero 


partirse 


de 


Espana 


pasar 


a 


Madrid 


pasar 


de 


Sevilla 


pasar 


entre 


montes 


pasar 


por 


el camino 


pasar 


por> entn 
f2 


s 6rboles 



315 



316 


APPENDIX 


TO 


pasar 


por 


cobarde 


pasarse (alguna cosa) 


de 


la memoria 


pasarse (la fruta) 


de 


madura 


pasarse (alguno) 


de 


letras 


pasearse 


con 


otro 


pasearse 


por 


el campo 


pecar 


contra 


la ley 


pecar 


de 


ignorante 


pecar 


en 


alguna cosa 


pecar 


por 


demasia 


pedir (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


pedir 


con 


justicia 


pedir 


contra 


alguno 


pedir 


de 


justicia 


pedir 


en 


justicia 


pedir 


por 


Dios 


pedir 


por 


alguno 


pegar (una cosa) 


a 


otra 


pegar (una cosa) 


con 


otra 


pegar 


contra, en la pared 


pelearse 


por 


alguna cosa 


peligrar 


en 


alguna cosa 


pelotearse 


con 


alguno 


penar 


en 


la otra vida 


penar 


por 


alguna persona 6 cosa 


penetrar 


hasta 


las entrailas 


penetrado 


de 


dolor 


pensar 


en } sobre 


alguna cosa 


perder (algo) 


de 


vista 


perderse (alguno) 


de 


vista 


perderse 


en 


el camino 


perecer 


de 


hambre 


perecerse 


de 


risa 


perecerse 


por 


alguna cosa 


peregrinar 


por 


el mundo 


perfumar 


con 


incienso 


permanecer 


en 


alguna parte 


permitir (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


permutar (una cosa) 


con, por 


otra 


perseguido 


de 


enemigos 


perseverar 


en 


algun intento 


persuadir (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


persuadirse 


a 


alguna cosa 


persuadirse 


de, por 


las razones de otro 


pertenecer (una cosa) 


a 


alguno 


pertrecharse 


de 


lo necesario 





SYNTAX. 




pesado 


en 


la conversacion 


pesarle (a alguno) 


de 


lo que ha hecho 


pescar 


con 


red 


piar 


por 


alguna cosa 


picar 


de, en 


todo 


picarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


pintiparado 


a 


alguno 


plagarse 


de 


granos 


plantar (a alguno) 


de 


alguna parte 


plantarse 


en 


Cadiz 


poblar 


de 


arboles 


poblar 


en 


buen parage 


poblarse 


de 


gente 


ponderar (una cosa) 


de 


grande 


poner (a uno) 


a 


oficio 


poner (alguna cosa) 


en 


alguna parte 


poner (a alguno) 


por 


corregidor 


ponerse 


a 


escribir 


porfiar 


con 


alguno 


portarse 


con 


decencia 


posar 


en 


alguna parte 


poseido 


de 


temor 


postrado 


de 


la enfermedad 


postrarse 


a 


los pies de alguno 


postrarse 


en 


cama 


postrarse 


en 


tierra 


precedido 


de 


otro 


preciarse 


de 


valiente 


precipitarse 


de, por 


alguna parte 


preterido 


a 


otro 


preferido 


de 


alguno 


preguntar (alguna cosa) 


d 


alguno 


pre nd arse 


de 


alguno 


prender (las plantas) 


en 


la tierra 


preocuparse 


de 


alguna cosa 


prepararse 


a, para 


alguna cosa 


preponderar (una cosa) 


a 


otra 


prescindir 


de 


alguna cosa 


presentar (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


presentar (a uno) 


para 


una prebenda 


preservar (a alguno) 


de 


dailo 


presidir 


a 


otros 


presidir 


en 


un tribunal 


presidido 


de 


otro 


prestar (dinero) 


a 


alguno 


prestar (la dieta) 


para 


la salud 


prestar 


sobre 
p3 


prenda 



317 



318 



APPENDIX TO 

docto 

la mentira 



presumir de 

prevalecer (la verdad) sobre 

prevenir (alguna cosa) a alguno 

prevenirse de lo necesario 

prevenirse para un viage 

primero de, entre todos 

pringarse en alguna cosa 

privar (a alguno) de lo suyo 

privar con alguno 

probar a saltar 

probar de todo 

proceder a la eleccion 

proceder con, sin acuerdo 

proceder contra alguno 

proceder (una cosa) de otra 

procesar (a uno) por delitos 

procurar por alguno 

proejar contra las olas 

profesar en religion 

prometer (alguna cosa) a alguno 

promover (a alguno) a algun cargo 

propasarse a, en alguna cosa 

proponer (alguna cosa) a alguno 

proponer (a alguno) en primer lugar 

propocionar (a alguno) para alguna cosa 

proporcionarse a las fuerzas 

prolougar (el plazo) para alguna cosa 

prorumpir en * lagrimas 

proveer (la plaza) de viveres 

proveer (el empleo) en alguno 

provenir de otra cosa 

provocar a ira 

provocar (a alguno) con malas palabras 

proximo (a alguno) a morir 

pujar por alguna cosa 

purgarse de sospecha 

quebrantar (los huesos) a alguno 

quebrar (el corazon) a alguno 

quedar de asiento 

quedar de pies 

quedar en casa 

quedar (camino) por andar 

quedar por alguno 

quedar por cobarde 

quedar (una cosa) por mia 

quedarse en el sermon 

quejarse « alguno 





SYNTAX. 




quejarse 


. d€ 


alguno 


querellarse 


a, ante 


eljuez 


qaerellarse 


de 


su vecino 


queraar 


con 


mal razones 


quemarse 


de 


algunas palabras 


quemarse 


por 


alguna cosa 


querido 


de 


sus amigos 


quien 


de 


ellos 


quitar (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


quitar (alguna cosa) 


de 


alguna parte 


quitarse 


de 


quimeras 


rabiar 


de 


horabre 


rabiar 


j)or 


comer 


radicarse 


en 


la virtud 


raer 


de 


alguna cosa 


rallar (las tripas) 


a 


cualquiera 


razonar 


con 


alguno 


rayar 


con 


la virtud 


rebalsarse (el agua) 


en 


alguna parte 


rebatir (una cantidad) 


de 


otra 


rebajar (una cantidad) 


de 


otra 


recaer 


en 


la enfermedad 


recalcarse 


en 


lo dicho 


recatarse 


de 


alguno 


recavar (alguna cosa) 


de, con 


alguno 


recetar (medicinas) 


a, para 


alguno 


recetar 


contra 


alguno 


recibir (alguna cosa) 


de 


alguno 


recibir 


a 


cuenta 


recibir (a alguno) 


en 


casa 


recibirse 


de 


abogado 


recio 


de 


cuerpo 


reclinarse 


en, sobre 


alguna cosa 


recluir (a algnno) 


en 


alguna parte 


recobrarse 


de 


la enfermedad 


recogerse 


d 


casa 


recomender (alguna cosa) 


alguno 


recompensar (agravios) 


con 


beneficios 


reconcentrarse (el odio) 


en 


el corazon 


reconciliar (a uno) 


con 


otro 


reconvenir (a alguno) 


con, de, sobre alguna cosa 


recostarse 


en, sobre 


la silla 


recudir (a alguno) 


con 


el sueldo 


redondearse 


de 


deudas 


reducir (alguna cosa) 


a 


la mitad 


redundar 


en 


beneficio 



319 



320 

reemplazar (a alguno) 

referirse 

refocilarse 

refugiarse 

reglarse 

regodearse 

reirse 

reirse 

remirarse 

rendirse 

renegar 

repartir (alguna cosa) 

representarse (alguna cosa) 

resbalarse 

resentirse 

residir 

residir 

resolverse 

responder 

Testar (una cantidad) 

restituirse 

resultar (una cosa) 

retirarse 

retirarse 

retraerse 

retraerse 

retroceder 

reventar 

reventar 

revestirse 

revolcarse 

revolver 

robar (dinero) 

rodar (el carro) 

rodear (a alguno) 

rodear (una plaza) 

rogar (alguna cosa) 

romper 

romper 

rozarse (una cosa) 

saber 

saber 

sacar (una cosa) 

sacar 

sacar 

sacrificar (alguna cosa) 



APPENDIX TO 

su empleo 

alguna cosa 

aiguna cosa 

sagrado 

lojusto 

alguna cosa 

carcajadas 

alguno 

alguna cosa 

la razon 

alguna cosa 

algunos 

la imaginacion 

las manos 

alguna cosa 

asiento en alguna parte 

la corte 

alguna cosa 

la pregunta 

otra 

su casa 

otra 

la soledad 

mundo 

alguna parte 

alguna cosa 

hacia tal parte 

risa 

hablar 

autoridad 

los vicios 



en 

a 

con 

a, en 

a 

a, con 

a 

de 

en 

a 

de 

a, entre 

a 

de 

de 

de 

en 

a 

a 

de 

a 

de 

a 

del 
a 
de 
a 
de 
por 
de 



en 



contra 9 Mcia,sobre el enemigo 
alguno 
tierra 

todas partes 
murallas 
alguno 
alguno 
alguna parte 
las palabras 



a 

por 

por 

con> de 

a 

con 

por 

en 

a 

de 
a 

de 
en 

m 



vino 
trabajos 
la plaza 
alguna parte 
limpio 
Dios 





SYNTAX. 




sacrificarse 


por 


alguno 


salir 


a 


alguna cosa 


salir 


con 


la pretencion 


salir 


contra 


alguno 


salir 


de 


alguna parte 


salir 


por 


fiador 


saitar (una cosa) 


a 


la imaginacion 


saltar 


de 


el suelo 


saitar 


de 


gozo 


saltar 


en 


tierra 


salvar (a alguno) 


del 


peligro 


sanar 


de 


la enfermadad 


satisfacer 


por 


las culpas 


satisfacerse 


de 


la deuda 


segregar (a alguno) 


de 


alguna parte 


segregar (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


seguirse (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


semejar 6 semejarse (una cosa) a 


otra 


sentarse 


a 


la mesa 


sentarse 


en 


la silla 


sentenciar (a uno) 


a 


destierro 


sentirse 


de 


algo 


separar (una cosa) 


de 


otra 


ser (una cosa) 


a 


gusto de todos 


ser (una cosa) 


de, para 


algunos 


servir 


de 


mayordomo 


servir 


en 


palacio 


servirse 


de 


alguno 


sincerarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


sisar 


de 


la compra 


sitiado 


de 


enemigos 


sitiar 


por 


hambre 


situarse 


en 


alguna parte 


sobrellevar (los trabajos) 


con 


paciencia 


sobrellevar (a alguno) 


en 


sus trabajos 


sobrepujar (alguno) 


en 


autoridad 


sobresalir 


en 


galas 


sobresalir 


entre 


todos 


sobresaltarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


sojuzgado 


de 


enemigos 


someterse 


a 


alguno 


sonar (alguna cosa) 


a 


hueca 


sonar (alguna cosa) 


hdcia 


tal parte 


sordo 


a 


las voces 


sordo 


de 


un oido 


sorprender (a alguno) 


con 


alguna cosa 


sorprenderle 


en 


alguna cosa 



321 



322 APPENDIX 


TO 


sorprendido 


de 


la bulla 


sospechar (alguna cosa) 


de 


alguno 


sospechoso 


a 


alguno 


subdividir 


en 


partes 


subir 


de 


alguna parte 


subir 


sobre 


la mesa 


subir 


a 


alguna parte 


subrogar (una cosa) 


en 


lugar de otra 


subsistir 


del 


auxilio ageno 


subsistir 


en 


el dictamen 


substituir 


a, por 


alguno 


substituir (un poder) 


en 


alguno 


substraerse 


de 


la obediencia 


suceder (a alguno) 


en 


el empleo 


sufrir (los trabajos) 


con 


paciencia 


sugerir (alguna cosa) 


a 


alguno 


sugetarse 


a 


alguna cosa 


sumergir (alguna cosa) 


en 


el agua 


surnirse 


en 


alguna parte 


sumiso 


a 


la voluntad 


supeditado 


de 


los contrarios 


superior 


a 


sus enemigos 


superior 


en 


luces 


suplicar 


de 


la sentencia 


suplicar 


por 


alguno 


suplir 


por 


alguno 


surgir (la nave) 


en 


el puerto 


surtir 


de 


viveres 


suspenso 


de 


oficio 


suspirar 


por 


el mando 


sustentarse 


con 


yerbas 


sustentarse 


de 


esperanzas 


tachar (a alguno) 


de 


ligero 


terablar 


de 


frio 


temido 


de 


muchos 


temeroso 


de 


muerte 


temible 


a 


los contrarios 


templarse 


en 


comer 


tener (a uno) 


por 


otro 


tenerse 


en 


pie 


teiiir 


de 


azul 


tirar 


a, hdcia 


tal parte 


tirar 


por 


tal parte 


tiritar 


de 


frio 


titubear 


en 


alguna cosa 


tocar (la herencia) 


a 


alguno 



SYNTAX, 

tocar en 

tocado de 

toraar con, en 

tomar (una cosa) de 

torcido de 

tomar a 

tornar de 

trabajar en 

trabajar por 

trabajar por 

trabar de 

trabar (una cosa) con 

trabar en 

trabarse de 

trabucarse en 

traer (alguna cosa) a 

traer (alguna cosa) de 

traficar en 

transferir (alguna cosa) a 

transferase a 

transflgurarse en 

transformar (una cosa) con 

transitar por 

tianspirar por 

transportar (alguna cosa) a 
transportar (alguna cosa) de 

traspasar (alguna cosa) a 

traspasado de 
transplantar (de una parte) a 

tratar con 

tratar de 

tratar en 

travesear con 

triumfar de 

trocar (una cosa) por 

tropezar en 

ultimo de 

uncir (ios bueyes) at 

uniformar (una cosa) a, con 

unir (una cosa) s d } con 

unirse en 

unirse enire 

uno de P entre 

util a 

util para 

utilizarse en, con 



323 



alguna parte 
enfermedad 
manos 
tal modo 
cuerpo 
alguna parte 
alguna parte 
alguna cosa 
alguna cosa 

otro 

alguno 

otra 

alguna cosa 

palabras 

las palabras 

alguna parte 

alguna parte 

droga 

otro tiempe 

tal parte 

otra cosa 

otra 

alguna parte 

todas partes 

alguna parte 

alguna parte 

alguno 

dolor 

otra 

alguno 

alguna cosa 

lanas 

alguno 

los enemigos 

otra 

alguna cosa 

todos 

carro 

otra 

otra 

coinunidad 

si 

muchos 

la patria 

tal cosa 

alguna cosa 



324 



APPENDIX TO SYNTAX. 



Tacar 


al 


estudio 


vaciarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


vaciarse 


por 


la boca 


vacilar 


en 


la eleccion 


vaciiar 


entre 


la esperanza y el timor 


vacio 


de 


entendimento 


vagar 


por 


el mundo 


valerse 


de 


alguno, de alguna cosa 


valuar (una cos a) 


en 


tal precio 


vanagloriarse 


de 


alguna cosa 


vecino 


al 


trono 


vecino 


de 


Antonio 


velar 


a 


los muertos 


velar 


sobre 


alguna cosa 


vencerse 


a 


alguna cosa 


vencido 


de 


los contrarios 


venderse 


a 


alguno 


vengarse 


de 


otro 


venir 


a, de, por 


1 alguna parte 


venir 


con 


alguno 


verse 


con 


alguno 


verse 


en 


altura 


vestir 


d 


la raoda 


vestirse 


de 


pafio 


vigilar 


sobre 


sus subditos 


violentarse 


d } en 


alguna cosa 


visible 


a, para 


todos 


vivir 


a 


su gusto 


vivir 


con 


alguno 


vivir 


de 


limosna 


vivir 


por 


milagro 


vivir 


sobre 


la haz de la tierra 


volar 


al 


cielo 


volar 


por 


el aire 


volver d 9 de, 


hdcia, por tal parte 


volver 


por 


la verdad 


votar 


en 


el pleito 


votar 


por 


alguno 


zabullirse 6 zambullirse 


en 


el agua 


zafarse 


de 


alguna persona 6 cosa 


zambucarse 


en 


alguna parte 


zampuzarse 


en 


agua 


zapatearse 


con 


alguno 


zozobrar 


en 
FINIS. 


la tormenta 



C. Baldwin, Printer; New Bridge-street, Londoa» 



+t 


















LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



003 213 030 6 







